DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Single/Dual/Triple/Quad
DS3/E3 Single-Chip Transceivers
www.maxim-ic.com
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
The DS3171, DS3172, DS3173, and DS3174
(DS317x) combine a DS3/E3 framer(s) and LIU(s) to
interface to as many as four DS3/E3 physical copper
lines.
APPLICATIONS
Access Concentrators
SONET/SDH ADM
and Muxes
PBXs
Digital Cross Connect
Test Equipment
Routers and Switches
Multiservice Access
Platform (MSAP)
DS3/E3
PORTS
Multiservice Protocol
Platform (MSPP)
DS3171
DS3171N
DS3172
DS3172N
DS3173
DS3173N
DS3174
DS3174N
DS3/E3
FRAMER/
FORMATTER
SYSTEM
BACKPLANE
DS317x
PDH Multiplexer/
Demultiplexer
Integrated Access Device
(IAD)
FEATURES
ORDERING INFORMATION
PART
DS3/
E3
LIU
TEMP RANGE
0°C to +70°C
-40°C to +85°C
0°C to +70°C
-40°C to +85°C
0°C to +70°C
-40°C to +85°C
0°C to +70°C
-40°C to +85°C
Single (DS3171), Dual (DS3172), Triple
(DS3173), or Quad (DS3174) Single-Chip
Transceiver for DS3 and E3
All Four Devices are Pin Compatible for Ease of
Port Density Migration in the Same Printed
Circuit Board Platform
Each Port Independently Configurable
Performs Receive Clock/Data Recovery and
Transmit Waveshaping for DS3 and E3
Jitter Attenuator can be Placed Either in the
Receive or Transmit Paths
Interfaces to 75Ω Coaxial Cable at Lengths Up to
380 meters, or 1246 feet (DS3) or 440 meters, or
1443 feet (E3)
Uses 1:2 Transformers on Both Tx and Rx
On-Chip DS3 (M23 or C-Bit) and E3 (G.751 or
G.832) Framer(s)
Ports Independently Configurable for DS3, E3
Built-In HDLC Controllers with 256-Byte FIFOs
for the Insertion/Extraction of DS3 PMDL, G.751
Sn Bit, and G.832 NR/GC Bytes
On-Chip BERTs for PRBS and Repetitive Pattern
Generation, Detection, and Analysis
Large Performance-Monitoring Counters for
Accumulation Intervals of at Least 1 Second
Flexible Overhead Insertion/Extraction Ports for
DS3, E3 Framers
PIN-PACKAGE
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
400 TE-PBGA (27mm x
27mm, 1.27mm pitch)
Note: Add the “+” suffix for the lead-free package option.
Note: Some revisions of this device may incorporate deviations from published specifications known as errata. Multiple revisions of any device
may be simultaneously available through various sales channels. For information about device errata, click here: www.maxim-ic.com/errata.
1
REV: 110206
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Pin Compatible with the DS318x Family of
Devices and the DS316x Family of Devices
8-/16-Bit Generic Microprocessor Interface
Low-Power (~1.73W) 3.3V Operation (5V
Tolerant I/O)
Small High-Density Thermally Enhanced Plastic
BGA Packaging (TE-PBGA) with 1.27mm Pitch
Industrial Temperature Operation:
-40°C to +85°C
IEEE1149.1 JTAG Test Port
FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Loopbacks Include Line, Diagnostic, Framer,
Payload, and Analog with Capabilities to Insert
AIS in the Directions Away from Loopback
Directions
Ports can be Disabled to Reduce Power
Integrated Clock Rate Adapter to Generate the
Remaining Internally Required 44.736MHz (DS3)
and 34.368MHz (E3) from a Single Clock
Reference Source at One of Three Standard
Frequencies (DS3, E3, STS-1)
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
The DS3171 (single), DS3172 (dual), DS3173 (triple), and DS3174 (quad) perform framing, formatting, and line
transmission and reception. These devices contain integrated LIU(s), framer/formatter for M23 DS3, C-bit DS3,
G.751 E3, G.832 E3, or a combination of the above signal formats.
Each LIU has independent receive and transmit paths. The receiver LIU block performs clock and data recovery
from a B3ZS- or HDB3-coded AMI signal and monitors for loss of the incoming signal, or can be bypassed for
direct clock and data inputs. The receiver LIU block optionally performs B3ZS/HDB3 decoding. The transmitter LIU
drives standard pulse-shape waveforms onto 75Ω coaxial cable or can be bypassed for direct clock and data
outputs. The jitter attenuator can be placed in either transmit or receive data path when the LIU is enabled. The
DS3/E3 framers transmit and receive serial data in properly formatted M23 DS3, C-bit DS3, G.751 E3, or G.832 E3
data streams. Unused functions can be powered down to reduce device power. The DS317x DS3/E3 SCTs
conform to the telecommunications standards listed in Section 4.
2
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Figure 1-1 shows the external components required at each LIU interface for proper operation. Figure 1-2 shows
the functional block diagram of one channel DS3/E3 LIU.
Figure 1-1. LIU External Connections for a DS3/E3 Port of a DS317x Device
Each DS3/E3 LIU Interface
Transmit
TXP
330Ω
(1%)
VDD
0.01uF
0.1uF
1uF
VDD
0.01uF
0.1uF
1uF
0.01uF
0.1uF
1uF
TXN
VDD
RXP
VSS
1:2ct
3.3V
Power
Plane
Receive
330Ω
(1%)
Ground
Plane
VSS
RXN
VSS
1:2ct
TOHENn
TOHn
TOHCLKn
TOHSOFn
TCLKOn/TGCLKn
TSOFOn/TDENn
Figure 1-2. DS317x Functional Block Diagram
TAIS
DS317x
TUA1
TPOSn/TDATn
TNEGn
TLCLKn
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
RXPn
RXNn
DLB
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
RSERn
RCLKOn/RGCLKn
RSOFOn/RDENn
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
Clock Rate
Adapter
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
LLB
ALB
RDATn
RNEGn/ RLCVn
RLCLKn
TCLKIn
TSERn
TSOFIn
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
TXPn
TXNn
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
3
JTRST
JTCLK
JTMS
JTDI
JTDO
ROHn
ROHCLKn
ROHSOFn
ALE
CS
RD/DS
WR/ R/W
RDY
MODE
WIDTH
INT
GPIO[8:1]
RST
D[15:0]
A[10:1]
A[0]/BSWAP
CLKC
CLKB
CLKA
n = port # (1-4)
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
2
APPLICATIONS
12
FEATURE DETAILS
13
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3
GLOBAL FEATURES........................................................................................................................................ 13
RECEIVE DS3/E3 LIU FEATURES .................................................................................................................. 13
RECEIVE DS3/E3 FRAMER FEATURES............................................................................................................ 13
TRANSMIT DS3/E3 FORMATTER FEATURES .................................................................................................... 13
TRANSMIT DS3/E3 LIU FEATURES ................................................................................................................ 14
JITTER ATTENUATOR FEATURES ..................................................................................................................... 14
CLOCK RATE ADAPTER FEATURES ................................................................................................................. 14
HDLC OVERHEAD CONTROLLER FEATURES ................................................................................................... 14
FEAC CONTROLLER FEATURES ..................................................................................................................... 14
TRAIL TRACE BUFFER FEATURES ................................................................................................................... 15
BIT ERROR RATE TESTER (BERT) FEATURES ................................................................................................ 15
LOOPBACK FEATURES ................................................................................................................................... 15
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE FEATURES...................................................................................................... 15
TEST FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................ 15
4
STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
16
5
ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY
17
6
MAJOR OPERATIONAL MODES
18
6.1
6.2
7
DS3/E3 SCT MODE ..................................................................................................................................... 18
DS3/E3 CLEAR CHANNEL MODE ................................................................................................................... 20
MAJOR LINE INTERFACE OPERATING MODES
7.1
7.2
7.3
8
21
DS3HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU MODE ................................................................................................................. 21
HDB3/B3ZS/AMI NON-LIU LINE INTERFACE MODE ....................................................................................... 23
UNI LINE INTERFACE MODE ........................................................................................................................... 24
PIN DESCRIPTIONS
25
8.1 SHORT PIN DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................................................................................. 25
8.2 DETAILED PIN DESCRIPTIONS......................................................................................................................... 28
8.3 PIN FUNCTIONAL TIMING ................................................................................................................................ 36
8.3.1 Line IO.................................................................................................................................................. 36
8.3.2 DS3/E3 Framing Overhead Functional Timing .................................................................................... 39
8.3.3 DS3/E3 Serial Data Interface............................................................................................................... 40
8.3.4 Microprocessor Interface Functional Timing ........................................................................................ 42
8.3.5 JTAG Functional Timing....................................................................................................................... 47
9
INITIALIZATION AND CONFIGURATION
9.1
10
48
MONITORING AND DEBUGGING ....................................................................................................................... 49
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
50
10.1 PROCESSOR BUS INTERFACE ......................................................................................................................... 50
10.1.1 8/16 Bit Bus Widths.............................................................................................................................. 50
10.1.2 Ready Signal (RDY) ............................................................................................................................. 50
10.1.3 Byte Swap Modes ................................................................................................................................ 50
10.1.4 Read-Write / Data Strobe Modes......................................................................................................... 50
10.1.5 Clear on Read / Clear on Write Modes ................................................................................................ 50
10.1.6 Global Write Method ............................................................................................................................ 51
10.1.7 Interrupt and Pin Modes....................................................................................................................... 51
10.1.8 Interrupt Structure ................................................................................................................................ 51
10.2 CLOCKS ........................................................................................................................................................ 52
10.2.1 Line Clock Modes................................................................................................................................. 52
4
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.2.2 Sources of Clock Output Pin Signals ................................................................................................... 54
10.2.3 Line IO Pin Timing Source Selection ................................................................................................... 57
10.2.4 Clock Structures On Signal IO Pins ..................................................................................................... 59
10.2.5 Gapped Clocks..................................................................................................................................... 60
10.3 RESET AND POWER-DOWN ............................................................................................................................ 60
10.4 GLOBAL RESOURCES ..................................................................................................................................... 63
10.4.1 Clock Rate Adapter (CLAD)................................................................................................................. 63
10.4.2 8 kHz Reference Generation ............................................................................................................... 64
10.4.3 One Second Reference Generation..................................................................................................... 66
10.4.4 General-Purpose IO Pins ..................................................................................................................... 66
10.4.5 Performance Monitor Counter Update Details ..................................................................................... 67
10.4.6 Transmit Manual Error Insertion .......................................................................................................... 68
10.5 PER PORT RESOURCES ................................................................................................................................. 69
10.5.1 Loopbacks............................................................................................................................................ 69
10.5.2 Loss Of Signal Propagation ................................................................................................................. 71
10.5.3 AIS Logic.............................................................................................................................................. 71
10.5.4 Loop Timing Mode ............................................................................................................................... 74
10.5.5 HDLC Overhead Controller .................................................................................................................. 74
10.5.6 Trail Trace ............................................................................................................................................ 74
10.5.7 BERT.................................................................................................................................................... 74
10.5.8 SCT port pins ....................................................................................................................................... 74
10.5.9 Framing Modes .................................................................................................................................... 76
10.5.10 Line Interface Modes............................................................................................................................ 76
10.6 DS3/E3 FRAMER / FORMATTER ..................................................................................................................... 78
10.6.1 General Description ............................................................................................................................. 78
10.6.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 78
10.6.3 Transmit Formatter............................................................................................................................... 79
10.6.4 Receive Framer.................................................................................................................................... 79
10.6.5 C-Bit DS3 Framer/Formatter ................................................................................................................ 83
10.6.6 M23 DS3 Framer/Formatter ................................................................................................................. 86
10.6.7 G.751 E3 Framer/Formatter................................................................................................................. 88
10.6.8 G.832 E3 Framer/Formatter................................................................................................................. 90
10.7 HDLC OVERHEAD CONTROLLER.................................................................................................................... 96
10.7.1 General Description ............................................................................................................................. 96
10.7.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 96
10.7.3 Transmit FIFO ...................................................................................................................................... 97
10.7.4 Transmit HDLC Overhead Processor .................................................................................................. 97
10.7.5 Receive HDLC Overhead Processor ................................................................................................... 98
10.7.6 Receive FIFO ....................................................................................................................................... 98
10.8 TRAIL TRACE CONTROLLER............................................................................................................................ 99
10.8.1 General Description ............................................................................................................................. 99
10.8.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................... 99
10.8.3 Functional Description........................................................................................................................ 100
10.8.4 Transmit Data Storage ....................................................................................................................... 100
10.8.5 Transmit Trace ID Processor ............................................................................................................. 100
10.8.6 Transmit Trail Trace Processing ........................................................................................................ 100
10.8.7 Receive Trace ID Processor .............................................................................................................. 100
10.8.8 Receive Trail Trace Processing ......................................................................................................... 101
10.8.9 Receive Data Storage ........................................................................................................................ 101
10.9 FEAC CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................... 102
10.9.1 General Description ........................................................................................................................... 102
10.9.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 102
10.9.3 Functional Description........................................................................................................................ 102
10.10 LINE ENCODER/DECODER ............................................................................................................................ 104
10.10.1 General Description ........................................................................................................................... 104
10.10.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 104
10.10.3 B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder ......................................................................................................................... 104
5
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.10.4 Transmit Line Interface ...................................................................................................................... 105
10.10.5 Receive Line Interface ....................................................................................................................... 105
10.10.6 B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder ......................................................................................................................... 105
10.11 BERT......................................................................................................................................................... 107
10.11.1 General Description ........................................................................................................................... 107
10.11.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 107
10.11.3 Configuration and Monitoring............................................................................................................. 107
10.11.4 Receive Pattern Detection ................................................................................................................. 108
10.11.5 Transmit Pattern Generation.............................................................................................................. 110
10.12 LIU—LINE INTERFACE UNIT ......................................................................................................................... 111
10.12.1 General Description ........................................................................................................................... 111
10.12.2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 111
10.12.3 Detailed Description ........................................................................................................................... 112
10.12.4 Transmitter ......................................................................................................................................... 112
10.12.5 Receiver ............................................................................................................................................. 113
11
OVERALL REGISTER MAP
116
12
REGISTER MAPS AND DESCRIPTIONS
119
12.1 REGISTERS BIT MAPS .................................................................................................................................. 119
12.1.1 Global Register Bit Map ..................................................................................................................... 119
12.1.2 HDLC Register Bit Map...................................................................................................................... 122
12.1.3 T3 Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................... 124
12.1.4 E3 G.751 Register Bit Map ................................................................................................................ 124
12.1.5 E3 G.832 Register Bit Map ................................................................................................................ 125
12.1.6 Clear Channel Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................ 126
12.2 GLOBAL REGISTERS .................................................................................................................................... 127
12.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions.................................................................................................................... 127
12.3 PER PORT COMMON .................................................................................................................................... 134
12.3.1 Register Bit Descriptions.................................................................................................................... 134
12.4 BERT......................................................................................................................................................... 144
12.4.1 BERT Register Map ........................................................................................................................... 144
12.4.2 BERT Register Bit Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 144
12.5 B3ZS/HDB3 LINE ENCODER/DECODER ....................................................................................................... 152
12.5.1 Transmit Side Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map ......................................................................... 152
12.5.2 Receive Side Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map .......................................................................... 153
12.6 HDLC......................................................................................................................................................... 157
12.6.1 HDLC Transmit Side Register Map.................................................................................................... 157
12.6.2 HDLC Receive Side Register Map..................................................................................................... 161
12.7 FEAC CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................... 165
12.7.1 FEAC Transmit Side Register Map.................................................................................................... 165
12.7.2 FEAC Receive Side Register Map..................................................................................................... 167
12.8 TRAIL TRACE ............................................................................................................................................... 170
12.8.1 Trail Trace Transmit Side................................................................................................................... 170
12.8.2 Trail Trace Receive Side Register Map ............................................................................................. 172
12.9 DS3/E3 FRAMER ........................................................................................................................................ 176
12.9.1 Transmit DS3 ..................................................................................................................................... 176
12.9.2 Receive DS3 Register Map................................................................................................................ 178
12.9.3 Transmit G.751 E3 ............................................................................................................................. 187
12.9.4 Receive G.751 E3 Register Map ....................................................................................................... 189
12.9.5 Transmit G.832 E3 Register Map ...................................................................................................... 195
12.9.6 Receive G.832 E3 Register Map ....................................................................................................... 198
12.9.7 Transmit Clear Channel ..................................................................................................................... 207
12.9.8 Receive Clear Channel ...................................................................................................................... 208
13
JTAG INFORMATION
210
13.1 JTAG DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................................... 210
13.2 JTAG TAP CONTROLLER STATE MACHINE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 211
13.3 JTAG INSTRUCTION REGISTER AND INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................................... 213
6
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
13.4 JTAG ID CODES ......................................................................................................................................... 214
13.5 JTAG FUNCTIONAL TIMING .......................................................................................................................... 214
13.6 IO PINS ...................................................................................................................................................... 214
14
PIN ASSIGNMENTS
215
15
PACKAGE INFORMATION
218
15.1 400-LEAD TE-PBGA (27MM X 27MM, 1.27MM PITCH) (56-G6003-003) ....................................................... 218
16
PACKAGE THERMAL INFORMATION
219
17
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
220
18
AC TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
222
18.1 FRAMER AC CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................................... 224
18.2 LINE INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................................... 224
18.3 MISC PIN AC CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................................. 225
18.4 OVERHEAD PORT AC CHARACTERISTICS...................................................................................................... 225
18.5 MICRO INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................... 226
18.6 CLAD JITTER CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................................................. 229
18.7 LIU INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................................................................ 229
18.7.1 Waveform Templates ......................................................................................................................... 229
18.7.2 LIU Input/Output Characteristics........................................................................................................ 231
18.8 JTAG INTERFACE AC CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................................... 233
19
REVISION HISTORY
234
7
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1. LIU External Connections for a DS3/E3 Port of a DS317x Device ........................................................... 3
Figure 1-2. DS317x Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 3
Figure 2-1. Four-Port DS3/E3 Line Card ................................................................................................................... 12
Figure 6-1. DS3/E3 SCT Mode.................................................................................................................................. 19
Figure 6-2. DS3/E3 Clear Channel Mode.................................................................................................................. 20
Figure 7-1. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU Mode..................................................................................................................... 22
Figure 7-2. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI Non-LIU Line Interface Mode...................................................................................... 23
Figure 7-3. UNI Line Interface Mode ......................................................................................................................... 24
Figure 8-1. TX Line IO B3ZS Functional Timing Diagram ......................................................................................... 36
Figure 8-2. TX Line IO HDB3 Functional Timing Diagram ........................................................................................ 37
Figure 8-3. RX Line IO B3ZS Functional Timing Diagram......................................................................................... 37
Figure 8-4. RX Line IO HDB3 Functional Timing Diagram ........................................................................................ 38
Figure 8-5. TX Line IO UNI Functional Timing Diagram............................................................................................ 38
Figure 8-6. RX Line IO UNI Functional Timing Diagram ........................................................................................... 39
Figure 8-7. DS3 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing......................................................................................... 39
Figure 8-8. E3 G.751 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing ................................................................................ 39
Figure 8-9. E3 G.832 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing ................................................................................ 39
Figure 8-10. DS3 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing...................................................................................... 40
Figure 8-11. E3 G.751 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing ............................................................................. 40
Figure 8-12. E3 G.832 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing ............................................................................. 40
Figure 8-13. DS3 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing........................................................................... 41
Figure 8-14. E3 G.751 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing .................................................................. 41
Figure 8-15. E3 G.832 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing .................................................................. 41
Figure 8-16. DS3 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing............................................................................ 42
Figure 8-17. E3 G.751 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing ................................................................... 42
Figure 8-18. E3 G.832 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing ................................................................... 42
Figure 8-19. 16-Bit Mode Write.................................................................................................................................. 43
Figure 8-20. 16-Bit Mode Read ................................................................................................................................. 43
Figure 8-21. 8-Bit Mode Write.................................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 8-22. 8-Bit Mode Read ................................................................................................................................... 44
Figure 8-23. 16-Bit Mode without Byte Swap ............................................................................................................ 45
Figure 8-24. 16-Bit Mode with Byte Swap ................................................................................................................. 45
Figure 8-25. Clear Status Latched Register on Read................................................................................................ 46
Figure 8-26. Clear Status Latched Register on Write................................................................................................ 46
Figure 8-27. RDY Signal Functional Timing Write..................................................................................................... 47
Figure 8-28. RDY Signal Functional Timing Read..................................................................................................... 47
Figure 10-1. Interrupt Structure ................................................................................................................................. 52
Figure 10-2. Internal TX Clock................................................................................................................................... 55
Figure 10-3. Internal RX Clock .................................................................................................................................. 56
Figure 10-4. Example IO Pin Clock Muxing............................................................................................................... 60
Figure 10-5. Reset Sources....................................................................................................................................... 61
Figure 10-6. CLAD Block ........................................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 10-7. 8KREF Logic ......................................................................................................................................... 65
Figure 10-8. Performance Monitor Update Logic ...................................................................................................... 68
Figure 10-9. Transmit Error Insert Logic.................................................................................................................... 69
Figure 10-10. Loopback Modes ................................................................................................................................. 70
Figure 10-11. ALB Mux.............................................................................................................................................. 70
Figure 10-12. AIS Signal Flow ................................................................................................................................... 73
Figure 10-13. Framer Detailed Block Diagram .......................................................................................................... 78
Figure 10-14. DS3 Frame Format.............................................................................................................................. 80
Figure 10-15. DS3 Subframe Framer State Diagram ................................................................................................ 80
Figure 10-16. DS3 Multiframe Framer State Diagram............................................................................................... 81
Figure 10-17. G.751 E3 Frame Format ..................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 10-18. G.832 E3 Frame Format ..................................................................................................................... 91
Figure 10-19. MA Byte Format .................................................................................................................................. 91
8
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-20. HDLC Controller Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 96
Figure 10-21. Trail Trace Controller Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 99
Figure 10-22. Trail Trace Byte (DT = Trail Trace Data)........................................................................................... 101
Figure 10-23. FEAC Controller Block Diagram........................................................................................................ 102
Figure 10-24. FEAC Codeword Format................................................................................................................... 103
Figure 10-25. Line Encoder/Decoder Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 104
Figure 10-26. B3ZS Signatures ............................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 10-27. HDB3 Signatures............................................................................................................................... 106
Figure 10-28. BERT Block Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 107
Figure 10-29. PRBS Synchronization State Diagram.............................................................................................. 109
Figure 10-30. Repetitive Pattern Synchronization State Diagram........................................................................... 110
Figure 10-31. LIU Functional Diagram..................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 10-32. DS3/E3 LIU Block Diagram............................................................................................................... 112
Figure 10-33. Receiver Jitter Tolerance .................................................................................................................. 115
Figure 13-1. JTAG Block Diagram........................................................................................................................... 210
Figure 13-2. JTAG TAP Controller State Machine .................................................................................................. 211
Figure 13-3. JTAG Functional Timing...................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 14-1. DS3174 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA ..................................................................................... 215
Figure 14-2. DS3173 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA ..................................................................................... 216
Figure 14-3. DS3172 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA ..................................................................................... 216
Figure 14-4. DS3171 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA ..................................................................................... 217
Figure 18-1. Clock Period and Duty Cycle Definitions............................................................................................. 222
Figure 18-2. Rise Time, Fall Time, and Jitter Definitions......................................................................................... 222
Figure 18-3. Hold, Setup, and Delay Definitions (Rising Clock Edge) .................................................................... 222
Figure 18-4. Hold, Setup, and Delay Definitions (Falling Clock Edge).................................................................... 223
Figure 18-5. To/From Hi Z Delay Definitions (Rising Clock Edge) .......................................................................... 223
Figure 18-6. To/From Hi Z Delay Definitions (Falling Clock Edge) ......................................................................... 223
Figure 18-7. Micro Interface Nonmultiplexed Read/Write Cycle ............................................................................. 227
Figure 18-8. Micro Interface Multiplexed Read Cycle.............................................................................................. 228
Figure 18-9. E3 Waveform Template....................................................................................................................... 230
Figure 18-10. DS3 Pulse Mask Template................................................................................................................ 231
9
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1. Standards Compliance ............................................................................................................................. 16
Table 7-1. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU Mode Configuration Registers ............................................................................... 21
Table 7-2. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI Non-LIU Mode Configuration Registers ....................................................................... 23
Table 7-3. UNI Line Interface Mode Configuration Registers.................................................................................... 24
Table 8-1. DS3174 Short Pin Descriptions................................................................................................................ 25
Table 8-2. Detailed Pin Descriptions ......................................................................................................................... 28
Table 9-1. Configuration of Port Register Settings .................................................................................................... 49
Table 10-1. LIU Enable Table.................................................................................................................................... 54
Table 10-2. All Possible Clock Sources Based on Mode and Loopback................................................................... 54
Table 10-3. Source Selection of TLCLK Clock Signal ............................................................................................... 55
Table 10-4. Source Selection of TCLKOn (internal TX clock) ................................................................................... 56
Table 10-5. Source Selection of RCLKO Clock Signal (internal RX clock) ............................................................... 56
Table 10-6. Transmit Line Interface Signal Pin Valid Timing Source Select ............................................................. 57
Table 10-7. Transmit Framer Pin Signal Timing Source Select ................................................................................ 58
Table 10-8. Receive Line Interface Pin Signal Timing Source Select ....................................................................... 58
Table 10-9. Receive Framer Pin Signal Timing Source Select ................................................................................. 59
Table 10-10. Reset and Power-Down Sources ......................................................................................................... 62
Table 10-11. CLAD IO Pin Decode............................................................................................................................ 64
Table 10-12. Global 8 kHz Reference Source Table................................................................................................. 65
Table 10-13. Port 8 kHz Reference Source Table..................................................................................................... 65
Table 10-14. GPIO Global Signals ............................................................................................................................ 66
Table 10-15. GPIO Pin Global Mode Select Bits....................................................................................................... 66
Table 10-16. GPIO Port Alarm Monitor Select .......................................................................................................... 67
Table 10-17. Loopback Mode Selections .................................................................................................................. 69
Table 10-18. Line AIS Enable Modes ........................................................................................................................ 73
Table 10-19. Payload (Downstream) AIS Enable Modes .......................................................................................... 74
Table 10-20. TSOFIn Input Pin Functions ................................................................................................................. 75
Table 10-21. TSOFOn/TDENn/Output Pin Functions................................................................................................ 75
Table 10-22. TCLKOn/TGCLKn Output Pin Functions.............................................................................................. 75
Table 10-23. RSOFOn/RDENn Output Pin Functions............................................................................................... 75
Table 10-24. RCLKOn/RGCLKn Output Pin Functions ............................................................................................. 76
Table 10-25. Framing Mode Select Bits FM[2:0] ....................................................................................................... 76
Table 10-26. Line Mode Select Bits LM[2:0].............................................................................................................. 77
Table 10-27. C-Bit DS3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions .......................................................................................... 83
Table 10-28. M23 DS3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions ........................................................................................... 86
Table 10-29. G.832 E3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions ........................................................................................... 91
Table 10-30. Payload Label Match Status................................................................................................................. 95
Table 10-31. Pseudorandom Pattern Generation.................................................................................................... 108
Table 10-32. Repetitive Pattern Generation ............................................................................................................ 108
Table 10-33. Transformer Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 113
Table 10-34. Recommended Transformers............................................................................................................. 114
Table 11-1. Global and Test Register Address Map ............................................................................................... 117
Table 11-2. Per Port Register Address Map............................................................................................................ 118
Table 12-1. Global Register Bit Map........................................................................................................................ 119
Table 12-2. Port Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................... 120
Table 12-3. BERT Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................ 120
Table 12-4. Line Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................... 121
Table 12-5. HDLC Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................ 122
Table 12-6. FEAC Register Bit Map ........................................................................................................................ 122
Table 12-7. Trail Trace Register Bit Map................................................................................................................. 123
Table 12-8. T3 Register Bit Map.............................................................................................................................. 124
Table 12-9. E3 G.751 Register Bit Map................................................................................................................... 124
Table 12-10. E3 G.832 Register Bit Map................................................................................................................. 125
Table 12-11. Clear Channel Register Bit Map......................................................................................................... 126
Table 12-12. Global Register Map........................................................................................................................... 127
10
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 12-13. Per Port Common Register Map ........................................................................................................ 134
Table 12-14. BERT Register Map............................................................................................................................ 144
Table 12-15. Transmit Side B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map ..................................................... 152
Table 12-16. Receive Side B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map ...................................................... 153
Table 12-17. Transmit Side HDLC Register Map .................................................................................................... 157
Table 12-18. Receive Side HDLC Register Map ..................................................................................................... 161
Table 12-19. FEAC Transmit Side Register Map .................................................................................................... 165
Table 12-20. FEAC Receive Side Register Map ..................................................................................................... 167
Table 12-21. Transmit Side Trail Trace Register Map............................................................................................. 170
Table 12-22. Trail Trace Receive Side Register Map.............................................................................................. 172
Table 12-23. Transmit DS3 Framer Register Map .................................................................................................. 176
Table 12-24. Receive DS3 Framer Register Map ................................................................................................... 178
Table 12-25. Transmit G.751 E3 Framer Register Map .......................................................................................... 187
Table 12-26. Receive G.751 E3 Framer Register Map ........................................................................................... 189
Table 12-27. Transmit G.832 E3 Framer Register Map .......................................................................................... 195
Table 12-28. Receive G.832 E3 Framer Register Map ........................................................................................... 198
Table 12-29. Transmit Clear Channel Register Map ............................................................................................... 207
Table 12-30. Receive Clear Channel Register Map ................................................................................................ 208
Table 13-1. JTAG Instruction Codes ....................................................................................................................... 213
Table 13-2. JTAG ID Codes .................................................................................................................................... 214
Table 14-1. Pin Assignment Breakdown ................................................................................................................. 215
Table 17-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions ............................................................................................ 220
Table 17-2. DC Electrical Characteristics................................................................................................................ 220
Table 17-3. Output Pin Drive ................................................................................................................................... 221
Table 18-1. Framer Port Timing............................................................................................................................... 224
Table 18-2. Line Interface Timing ............................................................................................................................ 224
Table 18-3. Misc Pin Timing .................................................................................................................................... 225
Table 18-4. Overhead Port Timing .......................................................................................................................... 225
Table 18-5. Micro Interface Timing .......................................................................................................................... 226
Table 18-6. DS3 Waveform Template ..................................................................................................................... 229
Table 18-7. DS3 Waveform Test Parameters and Limits ........................................................................................ 229
Table 18-8. E3 Waveform Test Parameters and Limits........................................................................................... 230
Table 18-9. Receiver Input Characteristics—DS3 Mode......................................................................................... 231
Table 18-10. Receiver Input Characteristics—E3 Mode ......................................................................................... 232
Table 18-11. Transmitter Output Characteristics—DS3 Modes .............................................................................. 232
Table 18-12. Transmitter Output Characteristics—E3 Mode .................................................................................. 232
Table 18-13. JTAG Interface Timing........................................................................................................................ 233
11
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
2 APPLICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Access Concentrators
Multiservice Access Platforms
ATM and Frame Relay Equipment
Routers and Switches
SONET/SDH ADM
SONET/SDH Muxes
PBXs
Digital Cross Connect
PDH Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
Test Equipment
Integrated Access Device (IAD)
Figure 2-1 shows an application for the DS3174.
Figure 2-1. Four-Port DS3/E3 Line Card
T3/E3 Line Card (#1)
Four
DS3/E3
Lines
T3/E3
Trans formers
DS3/E 3
Backplane
Signals
Digital Cross
Connect (DCS)
DS3174
Quad
DS3/E3
SCT
T3/E3
Trans formers
T3/E3 Line Card (#n+1)
DS3174
Quad
DS3/E3
SCT
DS3/E3
Backplane
Singals
T3/E3 Line Card (#n)
Four
DS3/E3
Lines
DS3/E3
Backplane
Signals
DS31 74
Quad
DS3/E3
SCT
T3/E3 Line Card (#n+n)
DS3174
Quad
DS3/E3
SCT
12
T3/E3
Trans formers
T3/E3
Trans formers
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
3 FEATURE DETAILS
The following sections describe the features provided by the DS3171 (single), DS3172 (dual), DS3173 (triple), and
DS3174 (quad) single-chip transceivers (framers and LIUs, SCTs).
3.1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.2
•
•
•
•
•
3.3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.4
•
•
•
•
•
Global Features
Supports the following transmission protocols:
• C-bit DS3
• M23 DS3
• G.751 E3
• G.832 E3
• Clear-channel serial data at line rates up to 52 Mbits/s
Optional transmit loop timed clock(s) mode using the associated port’s receive clock(s)
Optional transmit clock mode using references generated by the internal Clock Rate Adapter (CLAD)
Requires only a single reference clock for all three LIU data rates using internal CLAD
The LIU can be powered down and bypassed for direct logic IO to/from line circuits.
Jitter attenuator can be placed in either transmit or receive path when the LIU is enabled.
Clock, data and control signals can be inverted for a direct interface to many other devices
Detection of loss of transmit clock and loss of receive clock
Automatic one-second, external or manual update of performance monitoring counters
Each port can be placed into a low-power standby mode when not being used
Framing and line code error insertion available
Receive DS3/E3 LIU Features
AGC/Equalizer block handles from 0 dB to 15 dB of cable loss
Loss-of-lock PLL status indication
Interfaces directly to a DSX monitor signal (20 dB flat loss) using built-in pre-amp
Digital and analog Loss of Signal (LOS) detectors (ANSI T1.231 and ITU G.775)
Per-channel power-down control
Receive DS3/E3 Framer Features
Frame synchronization for M23 or C-bit Parity DS3, or G.751 E3 or G.832 E3
B3ZS/HDB3/AMI decoding
Detection and accumulation of bipolar violations (BPV), code violations (CV), excessive zeros occurrences
(EXZ), F-bit errors, M-bit errors, FAS errors, LOF occurrences, P-bit parity errors, CP-bit parity errors, BIP-8
errors, and far end block errors (FEBE)
Detection of RDI, AIS, DS3 idle signal, loss of signal (LOS), severely errored framing event (SEFE), change of
frame alignment (COFA), receipt of B3ZS/HDB3 codewords, DS3 application ID bit, DS3 M23/C-bit format
mismatch, G.751 national bit, and G.832 RDI (FERF), payload type, and timing marker bits
HDLC port for DS3 path maintenance data link (PMDL), G.751 national bit or G.832 NR or GC channels
FEAC port for DS3 FEAC channel
16-byte Trail Trace Buffer port for G.832 trail access point identifier
DS3 M23 C bits and stuff bits configurable as payload or overhead, stored in registers for software inspection
Most framing overhead fields presented on the receive overhead port
Transmit DS3/E3 Formatter Features
Insertion of framing overhead for M23 or C-bit parity DS3, or G.751 E3 or G.832 E3
B3ZS/HDB3 encoding
Generation of RDI, AIS, and DS3 idle signal
Automatic or manual insertion of bipolar violations (BPVs), excessive zeros (EXZ) occurrences, F-bit errors, Mbit errors, FAS errors, P-bit parity errors, CP-bit parity errors, BIP-8 errors, and far end block errors (FEBE)
HDLC port for DS3 path maintenance data link (PMDL), G.751 national bit or G.832 NR or GC channels
13
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.5
•
•
•
•
•
3.6
•
•
•
•
3.7
•
•
•
•
•
3.8
•
•
•
•
•
•
3.9
•
•
•
•
•
FEAC port for DS3 FEAC channel can be configured to send one codeword, one codeword continuously, or
two different codewords back-to-back to send DS3 Line Loopback commands
16-byte Trail Trace Buffer port for the G.832 trail access point identifier
Insertion of G.832 payload type, and timing marker bits from registers
DS3 M23 C bits configurable as payload or overhead, as overhead they can be controlled from registers or the
transmit overhead port
Most framing overhead fields can be sourced from transmit overhead port
Formatter bypass mode for clear channel or externally defined format applications
Transmit DS3/E3 LIU Features
Wide 50+20% transmit clock duty cycle
Line Build-Out (LBO) control
Tri-state line driver outputs support protection switching applications
Per-channel power-down control
Output driver monitor status indication
Jitter Attenuator Features
Fully integrated and requiring no external components
Can be placed in transmit or receive path
FIFO depth of 16 bits
Standard compliant transmission jitter and wander
Clock Rate Adapter Features
Generation of the internally needed DS3 (44.736 MHz) and E3 (34.368 MHz) clocks a from single input
reference clock
Input reference clock can be 51.84 MHz, 44.736MHz or 34.368 MHz
Internally derived clocks can be used as references for LIU and jitter attenuator
Derived clocks can be transmitted off-chip for external system use
Standards compliant jitter and wander requirements.
HDLC Overhead Controller Features
Each port has a dedicated HDLC controller for DS3/E3 framer link management
256-byte receive and transmit FIFOs
Handles all of the normal Layer 2 tasks including zero stuffing/de-stuffing, FCS generation/checking, abort
generation/checking, flag generation/detection, and byte alignment
Programmable high and low water marks for the transmit and receive FIFOs
Terminates the Path Maintenance Data Link in DS3 C-bit Parity mode and optionally the G.751 Sn bit or the
G.832 NR or GC channels
RX data is forced to all ones during LOS, LOF and AIS detection to eliminate false packets
FEAC Controller Features
Each port has a dedicated FEAC controller for DS3/E3 link management
Designed to handle multiple FEAC codewords without Host intervention
Receive FEAC automatically validates incoming codewords and stores them in a 4-byte FIFO
Transmit FEAC can be configured to send one codeword, one codeword continuously, or two different
codewords back-to-back to send DS3 Line Loopback commands
Terminates the FEAC channel in DS3 C-Bit Parity mode and optionally the Sn bit in E3 mode
14
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
3.10 Trail Trace Buffer Features
•
•
•
•
Each port has a dedicated Trail Trace Buffer for E3-G.832 link management
Extraction and storage of the incoming G.832 trail access point identifier in a 16-byte receive register
Insertion of the outgoing trail access point identifier from a 16-byte transmit register
Receive trace identifier unstable status indication
3.11 Bit Error Rate Tester (BERT) Features
•
•
•
•
•
Each port has a dedicated BERT tester
Generation and detection of pseudo-random patterns and repetitive patterns from 1 to 32 bits in length
Pattern insertion/extraction in DS3/E3 payload or entire data stream to and from the line interface
Large 24-bit error counter allows testing to proceed for long periods without host intervention
Errors can be inserted in the generated BERT patterns for diagnostic purposes (single bit errors or specific biterror rates)
3.12 Loopback Features
•
•
•
•
•
Analog interface loopback – ALB (transmit to receive)
Line facility loopback – LLB (receive to transmit) with optional transmission of unframed all-one AIS payload
toward system/trunk interface
Framer diagnostic loopback – DLB (transmit to receive) with automatic transmission of DS3 AIS or unframed
all-one AIS signal toward line/tributary interface(s)
DS3/E3 framer payload loopback – PLB (receive to transmit) with optional transmission of unframed all-one
AIS payload toward system/trunk interface
Simultaneous line facility loopback and framer diagnostic loopback
3.13 Microprocessor Interface Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multiplexed or non-multiplexed address bus modes
8-bit or 16-bit data bus modes
Byte swapping option in 16-bit data bus mode
Read/Write and Data Strobe modes
Ready handshake output signal
Global reset input pin
Global interrupt output pin
Two programmable I/O pins per port
3.14 Test Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Five pin JTAG port
All functional pins are inout pins in JTAG mode
Standard JTAG instructions: SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS, EXTEST, CLAMP, HIGHZ, IDCODE
RAM BIST on all internal RAM
Hi-Z pin to force all digital output and inout pins into HIZ
TEST pin for manufacturing scan test modes
15
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
4 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Table 4-1. Standards Compliance
SPECIFICATION
ANSI
T1.102-1993
T1.107-1995
T1.231-1997
T1.404-1994
ETSI
ETS 300 686
TBR 24
ETS EN 300 689
ETS 300 689
IETF
RFC 2496
ISO
ISO 3309:1993
ITU-T
G.703
G.704
G.751
G.775
G.823
G.824
G.832
I.432
O.151
Q.921
Telcordia
GR-499-CORE
GR-820-CORE
IEEE
IEEE Std 11491990
SPECIFICATION TITLE
Digital Hierarchy – Electrical Interfaces
Digital Hierarchy – Formats Specification
Digital Hierarchy – Layer 1 In-Service Digital Transmission Performance Monitoring
Network-to-Customer Installation – DS3 Metallic Interface Specification
Business TeleCommunications; 34Mbps and 140Mbits/s digital leased lines (D34U, D34S,
D140U and D140S); Network interface presentation, 1996
Business TeleCommunications; 34Mbit/s digital unstructured and structured lease lines;
attachment requirements for terminal equipment interface, 1997
Access and Terminals (AT); 34Mbps Digital Leased Lines (D34U and D34S); Terminal
equipment interface, July 2001
Business TeleCommunications (BTC); 34 Mbps digital leased lines (D34U and D34S),
Terminal equipment interface, V 1.2.1, 2001-07
Definition of Managed Objects for the DS3/E3 Interface Type, January, 1999
Information Technology – Telecommunications & information exchange between systems –
High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) procedures – Frame structure, Fifth Edition, 1993
Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces, 1991
Synchronous Frame Structures Used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8488 and 44 736 kbit/s
Hierarchical Levels, July, 1995
Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at the Third Order Bit Rate of 34,368 kbit/s and the
Fourth Order bit Rate of 139,264 kbit/s and Using Positive Justification, 1993
Loss Of Signal (LOS) and Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Defect Detection and Clearance
Criteria, November, 1994
The Control of Jitter and Wander Within Digital Networks Which are Based on the 2048
kbit/s Hierarchy, 1993
The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks that are Based on the 1544kbps
Hierarchy, 1993
Transport of SDH Elements on PDH Networks – Frame and Multiplexing Structures,
November, 1995
B-ISDN User-Network Interface – Physical Layer Specification, March, 1993
Error Performance Measuring Equipment Operating at the Primary Rate and Above,
October, 1992
ISDN User-Network Interface – Data Link Layer Specification, March 1993
Transport Systems Generic Requirements (TSGR): Common Requirements, Issue 2,
December 1998
Generic Digital Transmission Surveillance, Issue 1, November 1994
IEEE Standard Test Access Port and Boundary-Scan Architecture, (Includes IEEE Std
1149-1993) October 21, 1993
16
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
5 ACRONYMS AND GLOSSARY
Definition of the terms used in this Datasheet:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CCM – Clear Channel Mode
CLAD – Clock Rate Adapter
Clear Channel – A Datastream with no framing included, also known as Unframed
FRM – Frame Mode
FSCT – Framer Single Chip Transceiver Mode
HDLC – High Level Data Link Control
Packet – HDLC packet
SCT – Single Chip Transceiver (Framer and LIU)
SCT Mode – DS3/E3 Framer and LIU,
Unchannelized – See Clear Channel
17
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
6 MAJOR OPERATIONAL MODES
The major operational modes are determined by the FM[2:0] framer mode bits and a few other control bits. Unused
features are powered down and the data paths are held in reset. The configuration registers of the unused features
can be written to and read from. The function of some IO pins change in different operational modes. The line
interface operational mode is determined by the LM[2:0] bits.
6.1
DS3/E3 SCT Mode
This mode is for standard operation that uses the device in the single chip transceiver mode. It utilizes the
framer/formatter as well as the transmit/receive LIU.
FRAME MODE
FM[2:0]
DS3 C-bit Framed
000
DS3 M23 Framed
001
E3 G.751 Framed
010
E3 G.832 Framed
011
JA Off, B3ZS or HDB3
001
0
TLEN
PORT.CR2
0
JA RX, B3ZS or HDB3
010
0
0
JA TX, B3ZS or HDB3
011
0
0
JA Off, AMI
001
1
0
JA RX, AMI
010
1
0
JA TX, AMI
011
1
0
LIU MODE
LM[2:0]
TZSD & RZSD
18
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
TOHENn
TOHn
TOHCLKn
TOHSOFn
TCLKOn/TGCLKn
TSOFOn/TDENn
Figure 6-1. DS3/E3 SCT Mode
TAIS
TUA1
TPOSn/TDATn
TNEGn
TLCLKn
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
RXPn
RXNn
DLB
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
RSERn
RCLKOn/RGCLKn
RSOFOn/RDENn
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
Clock Rate
Adapter
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
LLB
ALB
RDATn
RNEGn/ RLCVn
RLCLKn
TCLKIn
TSERn
TSOFIn
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
TXPn
TXNn
DS317x
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
19
JTRST
JTCLK
JTMS
JTDI
JTDO
ROHn
ROHCLKn
ROHSOFn
ALE
CS
RD/DS
WR/ R/W
RDY
MODE
WIDTH
INT
GPIO[8:1]
RST
D[15:0]
A[10:1]
A[0]/BSWAP
CLKC
CLKB
CLKA
n = port # (1-4)
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
6.2
DS3/E3 Clear Channel Mode
This mode bypasses the framer/formatter for unchannelized datastreams that don’t include DS3 framing or E3
framing.
MODE
FM[2:0]
Clear Channel
1XX
Figure 6-2. DS3/E3 Clear Channel Mode
TAIS
TUA1
TPOSn/TDATn
TNEGn
TLCLKn
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
PLB
LLB
RDATn
RNEGn/ RLCVn
RLCLKn
RXPn
RXNn
DLB
TX BERT
ALB
TXPn
TXNn
TCLKIn
TSERn
TSOFIn
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
RSERn
RCLKOn/RGCLKn
RSOFOn/RDENn
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
Clock Rate
Adapter
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
20
TCLKOn/
TGCLKn
JTRST
JTCLK
JTMS
JTDI
JTDO
ROHn
ROHCLKn
ROHSOFn
ALE
CS
RD/DS
WR/ R/W
RDY
MODE
WIDTH
INT
GPIO[8:1]
RST
D[15:0]
A[10:1]
A[0]/BSWAP
CLKC
CLKB
CLKA
n = port # (1-4)
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
7 MAJOR LINE INTERFACE OPERATING MODES
The line interface modes provide the following functions:
1. Enabling/disabling of RX and TX LIU.
2. Enabling/Disabling of jitter attenuator (JA).
3. Selection of the location of JA, i.e. RX or TX path.
4. Selection of the line coding type: i.e. B3ZS/HDB3/AMI or UNI.
7.1
DS3HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU Mode
The TZCDS and RZCDS bits in the line encoder/decoder block select between no encoding/decoding (AMI) and
encoding/decoding (B3ZS, HDB3). When the HDB3/B3ZS line decoder/encoder is enabled, the framing modes (FM
bits) select between B3ZS and HDB3 line coding. The DS3 modes select the B3ZS line code while the E3 modes
select the HDB3 line code.
Table 7-1. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU Mode Configuration Registers
MODE
LM[2:0]
LINE.TCR.TZSD &
LINE.RCR.RZSD
TLEN
PORT.CR2
JA Off, B3ZS or HDB3
001
0
0
JA RX, B3ZS or HDB3
010
0
0
JA TX, B3ZS or HDB3
011
0
0
JA Off, AMI
001
1
0
JA RX, AMI
010
1
0
JA TX, AMI
011
1
0
21
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 7-1. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI LIU Mode
TAIS
TUA1
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
LLB
ALB
TXNn
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
RXPn
RXNn
FROM FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
DLB
TXPn
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
TO FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
CLKB
n = port # (1-4)
CLKC
CLKA
Clock Rate
Adapter
22
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
7.2
HDB3/B3ZS/AMI Non-LIU Line Interface Mode
The Non-LIU Line Interface Mode disables the LIU and a digital representation of AMI is output/input on the
TPOSn/TNEGn signals and the RPOSn/RNEGn signals. Selection between AMI and HDB3/B3ZS is made via the
LINE.TCR Register. HDB3 and B3ZS selection is controlled by the configuration selected by the FM bits. The DS3
modes select the B3ZS line code while the E3 modes select the HDB3 line code.
Table 7-2. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI Non-LIU Mode Configuration Registers
MODE
LM[2:0]
LINE.TCR.TZSD &
LINE.RCR.RZSD
TLEN
PORT.CR2
LIU Off, B3ZS or HDB3
000
0
1
LIU Off, AMI
000
1
1
Figure 7-2. HDB3/B3ZS/AMI Non-LIU Line Interface Mode
TAIS
TUA1
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
RLCLKn
RPOSn
RNEGn
FROM FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
DLB
LLB
ALB
TPOSn
TNEGn
TLCLKn
TO FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
CLKB
n = port # (1-4)
CLKC
CLKA
Clock Rate
Adapter
23
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
7.3
UNI Line Interface Mode
This mode is valid for all framing modes, providing a digital NRZ input/output on RDATn and TDATn and clocked
by RLCLKn and TLCLKn. The B3ZS/HDB3 decoder/encoder block is disabled except for the BPV counter, which is
used to count RLCV errors.
Table 7-3. UNI Line Interface Mode Configuration Registers
MODE
LM[2:0]
Unipolar Mode
LINE.TCR.TZSD &
LINE.RCR.RZSD
1XX
X
TLEN
PORT.CR2
1
Figure 7-3. UNI Line Interface Mode
TUA1
FROM FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
TDATn
LLB
ALB
RLCLKn
DLB
TLCLKn
TO FRAMING LOGIC
OR EXTERNAL PINS
RDATn
CLKB
CLKC
CLKA
Clock Rate
Adapter
n = port #
(1-4)
24
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
8 PIN DESCRIPTIONS
Note: In JTAG mode, all digital pins are bidirectional to increase the effectiveness of board level ATPG patterns for
isolation of interconnect failures.
8.1
Short Pin Descriptions
Table 8-1. DS3174 Short Pin Descriptions
n=1,2,3,4 (port number); Ipu (input with pullup), Oz (output tri-stateable), (needs an external pullup or pulldown resistor to keep from floating),
Oa (Analog output), Ia (Analog input), IO (Bidirectional inout); all unused input pins without pullup should be tied low.
NAME
TYPE
TLCLKn
TPOSn / TDATn
TNEGn
TXPn
TXNn
RLCLKn
RXPn
RXNn
RPOSn / RDATn
RNEGn / RLCVn
O
O
O
Oa
Oa
I
Ia
Ia
Ia
Ia
TOHn
TOHENn
TOHCLKn
TOHSOFn
ROHn
ROHCLKn
ROHSOFn
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
TCLKIn
TSOFIn
TSERn
TCLKOn / TGCLKn
TSOFOn / TDENn
RSERn
RCLKOn / RGCLKn
RSOFOn / RDENn
I
I
I
O
O
O
O
O
FUNCTION
Line IO
Transmit Line Clock Output
Transmit Positive AMI / Data
Transmit Negative AMI
Transmit Positive analog
Transmit Negative analog
Receive Clock Input
Receive Positive analog
Receive Negative analog
Positive AMI / Data
Negative AMI / Line Code Violation
DS3/E3 Overhead Interface
Transmit Overhead
Transmit Overhead Enable
Transmit Overhead Clock
Transmit Overhead Start Of Frame
Receive Overhead
Receive Overhead Clock
Receive Overhead Start Of Frame
DS3/E3 Serial Data
Transmit Line Clock Input
Transmit Start Of Frame Input
Transmit Serial Data
Transmit Clock Output / Gapped Clock
Transmit Framer Start Of Frame / Data Enable
Receive Serial Data
Receive / Clock Output / Gapped Clock
Receive Framer Start Of Frame / Data Enable
25
PIN #
PORT
4
PORT
3
PORT
2
PORT
1
V11
V14
W14
W6
Y6
Y12
W5
Y5
W15
Y15
C11
C14
B14
B6
A6
A12
B5
A5
B15
A15
Y8
V4
U4
M2
M1
W8
R2
R1
Y3
W3
A8
C4
D4
J2
J1
B8
F2
F1
A3
B3
U11
T14
T11
T12
T10
T13
U14
D11
E14
E11
E12
E10
E13
D14
U8
T5
V8
V7
U10
U5
Y2
D8
E5
C8
C7
D10
D5
B2
Y14
U12
V13
Y13
V12
W11
Y11
W12
A14
D12
C13
A13
C12
B11
A11
B12
W4
W7
T6
U7
Y7
T9
U9
T8
B4
B7
E6
D7
A7
E9
D9
E8
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
NAME
TYPE
D[15]
D[14]
D[13]
D[12]
D[11]
D[10]
D[9]
D[8]
D[7]
D[6]
D[5]
D[4]
D[3]
D[2]
D[1]
D[0]
A[10]
A[9]
A[8]
A[7]
A[6]
A[5]
A[4]
A[3]
A[2]
A[1]
A[0] / BSWAP
ALE
CS
RD / DS
IO
WR / R/W
RDY
INT
MODE
WIDTH
I
Oz
Oz
I
I
GPIO[8]
GPIO[7]
GPIO[6]
GPIO[5]
GPIO[4]
GPIO[3]
GPIO[2]
GPIO[1]
TEST
HIZ
RST
IO
JTCLK
JTMS
JTDI
JTDO
I
Ipu
Ipu
Oz
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
FUNCTION
Microprocessor Interface
Data [15:0]
Address [10:1]
Address [0] / Byte Swap
Address Latch Enable
Chip Select (active low)
Read Strobe (active low) / Data Strobe (active
low)
Write Strobe (active low) / R/W Select
Ready handshake (active low)
Interrupt (active low)
Mode select RD/WR or DS strobe mode
WIDTH select 8 or 16-bit interface
Misc I/O
General-Purpose IO [8:1]
PIN #
J5
T4
R4
P4
N4
V3
U3
T3
P3
N3
W2
U2
T2
P2
U1
P1
C3
D3
E3
G3
H3
D2
E2
G2
H2
E1
H1
N2
L3
K3
K4
K2
L4
B1
L5
Test enable (active low)
High impedance test enable (active low)
Reset (active low)
V2
V1
C2
C1
P5
R5
G5
F5
M3
R3
B16
JTAG
JTAG Clock
JTAG Mode Select (with pull-up)
JTAG Data Input (with pull-up)
JTAG Data Output
F3
F4
J3
G4
26
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
NAME
JTRST
TYPE
Ipu
VSS
PWR
FUNCTION
JTAG Reset (active low with pull-up)
CLAD
Clock A
Clock B
Clock C
POWER
Ground, 0 Volt potential
CLKA
CLKB
CLKC
I
IO
IO
VDD
PWR
Digital 3.3V
AVDDRn
AVDDTn
AVDDJn
AVDDC
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
Analog 3.3V for receive LIU on port n
Analog 3.3V for transmit LIU on port n
Analog 3.3V for jitter attenuator on port n
Analog 3.3V for CLAD
No Connects
No Connect, Unused
NC
NC
27
PIN #
E4
K1
L1
L2
K10, K9, K8, J10, J9, J8,
H10, H9, M7, M6, L7. L6,
K7. K6, J7, J6, A1, N10,
N9, M10, M9, M8, L10, L9,
L8, R12, R11, R10, R9,
P12, P11, P10, P9, Y1,
N12, N11, M13, M12, M11,
L13, L12, L11, M15, M14,
L15, L14, K15, K14, J15,
J14, Y20, K13, K12, K11,
J13, J12, J11, H12, H11,
G12, G11, G10, G9, F12,
F11, F10, F9, A20
H8, H7, H6, G8, G7, G6,
F8, F7, F6, A2, R8, R7, R6,
P8, P7, P6, N8, N7, N6,
W1, R15, R14, R13, P15,
P14, P13, N15, N14, N13,
Y19, H15, H14, H13, G15,
G14, G13, F15, F14, F13,
B20
Y4, A4, T1, D1
T7, E7, N1, J4
V6, C6, N5, G1
K5
A9, A10, A16–A19, B9,
B10, B13, B17–B19, C5,
C9, C10, C15–C20, D6,
D13, D15–D20, E15–E20,
F16–F20, G16–G20, H4,
H5, J16–J20, K16–K20,
L16–L20, M4, M5, M16M20, N16–N20, P16–P20,
R16–R20, T15–T20, U6,
U13, U15–U20, V5, V9,
V10, V16–V20, W9, W10,
W13, W16–W20, Y9, Y10,
Y15–Y18
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
8.2
Detailed Pin Descriptions
Table 8-2. Detailed Pin Descriptions
n=1,2,3,4 (port number); Ipu (input with pullup), Oz (output tri-stateable) (needs an external pullup or pulldown resistor to keep from floating), Oa
(Analog output), Ia (analog input), IO (Bidirectional inout); all unused input pins without pullup should be tied low.
PIN NAME
TYPE
TLCLKn
O
TPOSn /
TDATn
O
TNEGn
O
TXPn
Oa
TXNn
Oa
PIN DESCRIPTION
LINE IO
Transmit Line Clock Output
TLCLKn: This signal is available when the transmit line interface pins are enabled
(PORT.CR2.TLEN). This clock is typically used as the clock reference for the TDATn and
TNEG signals, but can also be used as the reference for the TSOFIn, TSERn, and TSOFOn /
TDENn signals.
This output signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 MHz +20 ppm
o E3: 34.368 MHz +20 ppm
Transmit Positive AMI / Data Output
TPOSn: When the port line interface is configured for B3ZS, HDB3 or AMI mode and the
transmit line interface pins are enabled (PORT.CR2.TLEN), a high on this pin indicates that a
positive pulse should be transmitted on the line. The signal is updated on the positive clock
edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is updated on
the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TLCLKn line clock output
pins, but it can be referenced to the TCLKOn, TCLKIn, RLCLKn or RCLKOn pins. This output
signal can be disabled when the TX LIU is enabled.
This output signal can be inverted.
TDATn: When the port line interface is configured for UNI mode and the transmit line interface
pins are enabled (PORT.CR2.TLEN), the un-encoded transmit signal is output on this pin. The
signal is updated on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is
not inverted, otherwise it is updated on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically
referenced to the TLCLK line clock output pins, but it can be referenced to the TCLKOn,
TCLKIn, RLCLKn or RCLKOn pins
This output signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Transmit Negative AMI / Line OH Mask
TNEGn: When the port line is configured for B3ZS, HDB3 or AMI mode and the transmit line
interface pins are enabled (PORT.CR2.TLEN), a high on this pin indicates that a negative pulse
should be transmitted on the line. The signal is updated on the positive clock edge of the
referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is updated on the falling
edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TLCLKn line clock output pins, but it
can be referenced to the TCLKOn, TCLKIn, RLCLKn or RCLKOn pins.
This output signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Transmit Positive Analog
TXPn: This pin and the TXNn pin form a differential AMI output which is coupled to the
outbound 75Ω coaxial cable through a 2:1 step-down transformer (Figure 1-1). This output is
enabled when the TX LIU is enabled and the output is enabled to be driven. When it is not
enabled, it is in a high impedance state.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Transmit Negative Analog
TXNn: This pin and the TXPn pin form a differential AMI output which is coupled to the
outbound 75Ω coaxial cable through a 2:1 step-down transformer (Figure 1-1). This output is
enabled when the TX LIU is enabled and the output is enabled to be driven. When it is not
enabled, it is in a high impedance state.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
28
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
RXPn
Ia
RXNn
Ia
RLCLKn
I
RPOSn /
RDATn
Iad
RNEGn /
RLCVn
Iad
PIN DESCRIPTION
Receive Positive analog
RXPn: This pin and the RXNn pin form a differential AMI input which is coupled to the outbound
75Ω coaxial cable through a 2:1 step-up transformer (Figure 1-1). This input is used when the
RX LIU is enabled and is ignored when the LIU is disabled.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Receive Negative analog
RXNn: This pin and the RXPn pin form a differential AMI input which is coupled to the outbound
75Ω coaxial cable through a 2:1 step-up transformer (Figure 1-1). This input is used when the
LIU is enabled and is ignored when the LIU is disabled.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Receive Line Clock Input
RLCLKn: This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the RPOSn / RDATn, RNEGn /
RLCVn signals but can also be used as the reference clock for the RSERn, RSOFOn / RDENn,
TSOFIn, TSERn, TSOFOn / TDENn, TPOSn / TDATn and TNEGn signals. This input is ignored
when the LIU is enabled.
This input signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 MHz +20 ppm
o E3: 34.368 MHz +20 ppm
Receive Positive AMI / Data
RPOSn: When the port line is configured for B3ZS, HDB3 or AMI mode and the LIU is disabled,
a high on this pin indicates that a positive pulse has been detected using an external LIU. The
signal is sampled on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is
not inverted, otherwise it is sampled on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically
referenced to the RLCLKn line clock input pins, but it can be referenced to the RCLKOn output
pins.
This input signal can be inverted.
RDATn: When the port line interface is configured for UNI mode, the un-encoded receive signal
is input on this pin. The signal is sampled on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin
if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is sampled on the falling edge of the clock.
The signal is typically referenced to the RLCLKn line clock input pins, but it can be referenced
to the RCLKOn output pins.
This input signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Receive Negative AMI / Line Code Violation / Line OH Mask input
RNEGn: When the port line is configured for B3ZS, HDB3 or AMI mode and the LIU is disabled,
a high on this pin indicates that a negative pulse has been detected using an external LIU. The
signal is sampled on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is
not inverted, otherwise it is sampled on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically
referenced to the RLCLKn line clock input pins, but it can be referenced to the RCLKOn output
pins.
This input signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
RLCVn: When the port line interface is configured for UNI mode, the BPV counter in the
encoder/decoder block is incremented each clock when this signal is high. The signal is
sampled on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not
inverted, otherwise it is sampled on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically
referenced to the RLCLKn line clock input pins, but it can be referenced to the RCLKOn output
pins.
This input signal can be inverted.
29
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
TOHn
I
TOHENn
I
TOHCLKn
O
TOHSOFn
O
ROHn
O
ROHCLKn
O
ROHSOFn
O
PIN DESCRIPTION
DS3/E3 OVERHEAD INTERFACE
Transmit Overhead
TOHn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this signal
will be used to over-write the DS3 or E3 framing overhead bits when TOHENn is active. In T3
mode, the X-bits, P-bits, M-bits, F-bits, and C-bits are input. In G.751 E3 mode, all of the FAS,
RAI, and National Use bits are input. In G.832 E3 mode, all of the FA1, FA2, EM, TR, MA, NR,
and GC bytes are input. The TOHSOFn signal marks the start of the framing bit sequence. This
signal is sampled at the same time as the TOHCLKn signal transitions high to low.
This signal can be inverted.
Transmit Overhead Enable / Start Of Frame Input
TOHENn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this
signal will be used the determine which DS3 or E3 framing overhead bits to over-write with the
signal on the TOHn pins. The TOHSOFn signal marks the start of the framing bit sequence.
This signal is sampled at the same time as the TOHCLKn signal transitions high to low.
This signal can be inverted.
Transmit Overhead Clock
TOHCLKn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this
clock is used for the transmit overhead port signals TOHn, TOHENn and TOHSOFn. The
TOHSOFn output signal is updated and the TOHn and TOHENn input signals are sampled at
the same time this clock signal transitions from high to low. The external logic is expected to
sample TOHSOFn signal and update the TOHn and TOHENn signals on the rising edge of this
clock signal. This clock is a low frequency clock.
This signal can be inverted.
Transmit Overhead Start Of Frame
TOHSOFn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this
signal is used to mark the start of a DS3 or E3 overhead sequence on the TOHn pins. In T3
mode, the first X-bit is marked. In G.751 E3 mode, the first bit of the FAS word is marked. In
G.832 E3 mode, the first bit of the FA1 byte is marked. The sequence starts on the same high
to low transition of the TOHCLKn clock that this signal is high. This signal is updated at the
same time as the TOHCLKn signal transitions high to low.
This signal can be inverted.
Receive Overhead
ROHn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this signal
outputs the value of the receive overhead bits. The ROHSOFn signal marks the start of the
framing bit sequence. In T3 mode, the X-bits, P-bits, M-bits, F-bits, and C-bits are output (Note:
In M23 mode, the C-bits are extracted even though they are marked as data at the payload
interface). In G.751 E3 mode, all of the FAS, RAI, and National Use bits are output. In G.832
E3 mode, all of the FA1, FA2, EM, TR, MA, NR, and GC bytes are output.
This signal is updated at the same time as the ROHCLKn signal transitions high to low.
This signal can be inverted.
Receive Overhead Clock
ROHCLKn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes, this
clock is used for the receive overhead port signals ROHn and ROHSOFn. The ROHSOFn and
ROHn output signals are updated at the same time this clock signal transitions from high to low.
The external logic is expected to sample ROHSOFn and ROHn signal on the rising edge of this
clock signal. This clock is a low frequency clock.
This signal can be inverted.
Receive Overhead Start Of Frame
ROHSOFn: When the port framer is configured for one of the DS3 or E3 framing modes this
signal is used to mark the start of a DS3 or E3 overhead sequence on the ROHn pins. In T3
mode, the first X-bit is marked. In G.751 E3 mode, the first bit of the FAS word is marked. In
G.832 E3 mode, the first bit of the FA1 byte is marked. The sequence starts on the same high
to low transition of the ROHCLKn clock that this signal is high. This signal is updated at the
same time as the ROHCLKn signal transitions high to low.
This signal can be inverted.
30
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
TCLKIn
I
TSOFIn
I
TSERn
I
TCLKOn /
TGCLKn
O
PIN DESCRIPTION
DS3/E3 SERIAL DATA OVERHEAD INTERFACE
Transmit Line Clock Input
TCLKIn: This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the TSOFIn, TSERn, and
TSOFOn / TDENn signals but can also be used as the reference for the TPOSn / TDATn and
TNEGn signals. This clock is not used when the part is in loop time mode or the CLAD clocks
are used as the transmit clock source. (PORT.CR3.CLADC)
This input signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 MHz +20 ppm
o E3: 34.368 MHz +20 ppm
Transmit Start Of Frame Input
See Table 10-20.
TSOFIn: This signal can be used to align the start of the DS3 or E3 frames on the TSERn pin to
an external signal. In SCT modes, the TSOFIn signal can be used to align the start of frame
signal position on the TSERn/TOHn
Pin to the rising edge of a signal on this pin. The signal edge does not need to occur on every
frame and can be tied high or low. The signal is sampled on the positive clock edge of the
referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is sampled on the falling
edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TCLKIn transmit clock input pins, but
it can be referenced to the TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn and RLCLKn clock pins.
This signal can be inverted.
Transmit Serial Data
TSERn: When the port framer is configured for either the DS3 or E3 SCT modes, this pin is
used as the source of the DS3/E3 payload data. When the port is configured for a clear channel
mode, this pin is used as the source of the DS3/E3 data signal. The signal is sampled on the
positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it
is sampled on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TCLKIn
transmit clock input pins, but it can be referenced to the TLCLKn, TCLKOn / TGCLKn, RCLKOn
and RLCLKn clock pins
This signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Transmit Clock Output / Gapped Clock
See Table 10-22.
TCLKOn: When the port is configured for unframed SCT or framed SCT modes and TCLKOn is
selected, this clock output is enabled. This clock is the same clock as the internal framer
transmit clock. This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the TSOFIn, TSERn, and
TSOFOn / TDENn signals but can also be used as the reference for the TPOSn / TDATn and
TNEGn signals.
This signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 MHz +20 ppm
o E3: 34.368 MHz +20 ppm
TGCLKn: When the port is configured for framed DS3/E3 mode and TGCLKn is selected, this
gated output clock is enabled. This gapped clock is the same clock as the internal framer
transmit clock and is gated by TDENn. This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the
TSERn signal.
This signal can be inverted.
31
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
TSOFOn /
TDENn
O
RSERn
O
RCLKOn /
RGCLKn
O
RSOFOn /
RDENn
O
PIN DESCRIPTION
Framer Start Of Frame / Data Enable
See Table 10-21.
TSOFOn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes and the
TSOFOn pin function is selected, this signal is used to indicate the start of the DS3/E3 frame on
the TSERn pin. This signal pulses high three clocks before the first overhead bit in a DS3 or E3
frame that will be input on TSERn. The signal is updated on the positive clock edge of the
referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is updated on the falling
edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TCLKIn transmit clock input pins, but
it can be referenced to the TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn and RLCLKn clock pins.
This signal can be inverted.
TDENn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes and the TDENn
pin function is selected, this signal is used to mark the DS3/E3 frame bits on the TSERn pin.
The signal goes high three clocks before the start of DS3/E3 payload bits and goes low three
clocks before the end of the DS3/E3 payload bits. The signal is updated on the positive clock
edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is updated on
the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the TCLKIn transmit clock
input pins, but it can be referenced to the TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn and RLCLKn clock pins.
This signal can be inverted.
Receive Serial Data
RSERn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes, this pin outputs
the receive data signal from the LIU or receive line pins. The signal is updated on the positive
clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is
updated on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the RCLKOn
receive clock output pin, but it can be referenced to the RGCLKn and RLCLKn clock pins.
This signal can be inverted
o DS3: 44.736 Mbps +20ppm
o E3: 34.368 Mbps +20ppm
Receive Clock Output / Gapped Clock
See Table 10-24.
RCLKOn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes and RCLKOn is
selected, this clock output signal is active. It is the same as the internal receive framer clock.
This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the RSERn, RSOFOn / RDENn signals
but can also be used as the reference for the RPOSn / RDATn, RNEGn / RLCVn, TSOFIn,
TSERn, TSOFOn / TDENn, TPOSn / TDATn and TNEGn signals.
This signal can be inverted.
o DS3: 44.736 MHz +20 ppm
o E3: 34.368 MHz +20 ppm
RGCLKn: When the port is configured for DS3/E3 framed mode and RGCLKn is selected, this
gated clock output signal is active. It is the same as the internal receive framer clock gated by
RDENn. This clock is typically used for the reference clock for the RSERn.
This signal can be inverted
Receive Framer Start Of Frame /Data Enable
See Table 10-23.
RSOFOn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes and the
RSOFOn pin function is enabled, this signal is used to indicate the start of the DS3/E3 frame.
This signal indicates the first DS3/E3 overhead bit on the RSERn pin when high. The signal is
updated on the positive clock edge of the referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not
inverted, otherwise it is updated on the falling edge of the clock. The signal is typically
referenced to the RCLKOn receive clock output pin, but it can be referenced to the RLCLKn
clock input pin.
This signal can be inverted.
RDENn: When the port framer is configured for the DS3 or E3 framed modes and the RDENn
pin function is enabled, this signal is used to indicate the DS3/E3 payload bit positions of the
data on the RSERn pin. The signal goes high during each DS3/E3 payload bit and goes low
during each DS3/E3 overhead bit. The signal is updated on the positive clock edge of the
referenced clock pin if the clock pin signal is not inverted, otherwise it is updated on the falling
edge of the clock. The signal is typically referenced to the RCLKOn receive clock output pin,
but it can be referenced to the RLCLKn clock input pin.
This signal can be inverted.
32
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
D[15:0]
IO
A[10:1]
I
A[0] /
BSWAP
ALE
I
CS
I
RD /
DS
I
WR /
R/W
I
RDY
Oz
INT
Oz
MODE
I
WIDTH
I
PIN DESCRIPTION
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE
Bi-directional 16 or 8-bit data bus
This bus is tri-state when RST pin is low or CS pin is high.
D[15:0]: A 16-bit or 8-bit data bus used to input data during register writes, and data outputs
during register reads. The upper 8 bits are not used and never driven in 8-bit bus mode.
Weak pull up resistors or bus holders should be used for each pin.
Address bus (minus LSB)
A[10:1]: identifies the specific 16 bit registers, or group of 8 bit registers, being accessed. A[10]
must be tied to ground for the DS3181 and DS3182 versions.
Address bus LSB / Byte Swap
A[0]: This signal is connected to the lower address bit in 8-bit systems. (WIDTH=0)
1 = Output register bits 15:8 on D[7:0], D[15:8] not driven
0 = Output register bits 7:0 on D[7:0], D[15:8] not driven
BSWAP: This signal is tied high or low in 16-bit systems.
(WIDTH=1)
1 = Output register bits 15:8 on D[7:0], 7:0 on D[15:8]
0 = Output register bits 7:0 on D[7:0], 15:8 on D[15:8]
Address Latch Enable
ALE: This signal is used to latch the address on the A[10:0] pins in multiplexed address
systems. When it is high the address is fed through the address latch to the internal logic.
When it transitions to low, the address is latched and held internally until the signal goes back
high. ALE should be tied high for non-multiplexed address systems.
Chip Select (active low)
CS: This signal must be low during all accesses to the registers
Read Strobe (active low) / Data Strobe (active low)
RD: Read Strobe mode (MODE=0):
RD is low during a register read.
DS: Data Strobe mode (MODE=1):
DS is low during either a register read or a write.
Write Strobe (active low) / R/W Select
WR: Write Strobe mode (MODE=0):
WR is low during a register write.
R/W: Data Strobe mode (MODE=1):
R/W is high during a register read cycle, and low during a register write cycle.
Ready handshake (active low)
RDY: This ready signal is driven low when the current read or write cycle is in progress. When
the current read or write cycle is not ready it is driven high. When device is not selected, it is not
driven.
Interrupt (active low)
This signal is tri-state when RST pin is low.
INT: This interrupt signal is driven low when an event is detected on any of the enabled
interrupt sources in any of the register banks. When there are no active and enabled interrupt
sources, the pin can be programmed to either drive high or not drive high. The reset default is
to not drive high when there is no active and enabled interrupt source. All interrupt sources are
disabled when RST=0 and they must be programmed to be enabled.
Mode select RD/WR or DS strobe mode
MODE: 1 = Data Strobe Mode, 0 = Read/Write Strobe Mode
Data bus width select 8 or 16-bit interface
WIDTH: 1 = 16-bits, 0 = 8 bits
33
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
GPIO1
IO
GPIO2
IO
GPIO3
IO
GPIO4
IO
GPIO5
IO
GPIO6
IO
GPIO7
IO
GPIO8
IO
TEST
I
HIZ
I
RST
I
JTCLK
I
JTMS
Ipu
JTDI
Ipu
JTDO
Oz
JTRST
Ipu
PIN DESCRIPTION
MISC I/O
General-Purpose IO 1
GPIO1: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or an alarm output signal for
port 1.
General-Purpose IO 2
GPIO2: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or the 8KREFO output signal,
or an alarm output signal for port 1.
General-Purpose IO 3
GPIO3: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or an alarm output signal for
port 2.
General-Purpose IO 4
GPIO4: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or the 8KREFI input signal, or
an alarm output signal for port 2. When configured for 8KREFI mode the signal frequency
should be 8,000 Hz +/- 500 ppm and about 50% duty cycle.
General-Purpose IO 5
GPIO5: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or an alarm output signal for
port 3.
General-Purpose IO 6
GPIO6: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or the TMEI input signal, or an
alarm output signal for port 3. When configured for TMEI input, the signal low time and high
time must be greater than 500 ns.
General-Purpose IO 7
GPIO7: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or an alarm output signal for
port 4.
General-Purpose IO 8
GPIO8: This signal is configured to be a general-purpose IO pin, or the PMU input signal, or an
alarm output signal for port 4. When configured for PMU input, the signal low time and high time
must be greater than 500 ns.
Test enable (active low)
TEST: This signal enables the internal scan test mode when low. For normal operation tie high.
This is an asynchronous input.
High impedance test enable (active low)
HIZ: This signal puts all digital output and bi-directional pins in the high impedance state when
it low and JTRST is low. For normal operation tie high. This is an asynchronous input.
Reset (active low)
RST: This signal resets all the internal processor registers and logic when low. This pin should
be low while power is applied and set high after the power is stable. This is an asynchronous
input.
JTAG
JTAG Clock
JTCLK: This clock input is typically a low frequency (less than 10 MHz) 50% duty cycle clock
signal.
JTAG Mode Select (with pull-up)
JTMS: This input signal is used to control the JTAG controller state machine and is sampled on
the rising edge of JTCLK.
JTAG Data Input (with pull-up)
JTDI: This input signal is used to input data into the register that is enabled by the JTAG
controller state machine and is sampled on the rising edge of JTCLK.
JTAG Data Output
JTDO: This output signal is the output of an internal scan shift register enabled by the JTAG
controller state machine and is updated on the falling edge of JTCLK. The pin is in the high
impedance mode when a register is not selected or when the JTRST signal is high. The pin
goes into and exits the high impedance mode after the falling edge of JTCLK
JTAG Reset (active low with pullup)
JTRST: This input forces the JTAG controller logic into the reset state and forces the JTDO pin
into high impedance when low. This pin should be low while power is applied and set high after
the power is stable. The pin can be driven high or low for normal operation, but must be high for
JTAG operation.
34
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
PIN NAME
TYPE
CLKA
I
CLKB
IO
CLKC
IO
VSS
PWR
VDD
PWR
AVDDRn
PWR
AVDDTn
PWR
AVDDJn
PWR
AVDDC
PWR
PIN DESCRIPTION
CLAD
Clock A
CLKA: This clock input is a DS3 signal(44.736MHz +/-20ppm) when the CLAD is disabled or it
is one of the CLAD reference clock signals when the CLAD is enabled.
Clock B
CLKB: This pin is a E3(34.368 MHz +/-20 ppm) input signal when the CLAD is disabled or it
can be enabled to output a generated clock when the CLAD is enabled. The pin is driven low
when it is not selected to output a clock signal and the CLAD is enabled. Refer to Table 10-11.
Clock C
CLKC: This pin is a STS-1 (51.84 MHz +/-20ppm) input signal when the CLAD is disabled or it
can be enabled to output a generated clock when the CLAD is enabled. The pin is driven low
when it is not selected to output a clock signal and the CLAD is enabled. Refer to Table 10-11.
POWER
Ground, 0 Volt potential
Common to digital core, digital IO and all analog circuits
Digital 3.3V
Common to digital core and digital IO
Analog 3.3V for receive LIU on port n
Powers receive LIU on port n
Analog 3.3V for transmit LIU on port n
Powers transmit LIU on port n
Analog 3.3V for jitter attenuator on port n
Powers jitter attenuator on port n
Analog 3.3V for CLAD
Powers clock rate adapter common to all ports
35
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
8.3
Pin Functional Timing
8.3.1
Line IO
8.3.1.1
B3ZS/HDB3/AMI Mode Transmit Pin Functional Timing
There is no suggested time alignment between the TXPn, TXNn and TX LINE signals and the TLCLKn clock signal.
The TX DATA signal is not a readily available signal, it is meant to represent the data value of the other signals.
The TXPn and TXNn signals are only available when the line is in B3ZS/HDB3 or AMI mode and the LIU is
enabled. The TPOSn, TNEGn and TLCLKn signals are only available when the line is in B3ZS/HDB3 or AMI mode
and the transmit line pins are enabled. The TPOSn, TNEGn and TLCLKn pins can be enabled at the same as the
LIU is enabled.
The TPOSn and TNEGn signals change a small delay after the positive edge of the reference clock if the clock pin
is not inverted; otherwise they change after the negative edge. The TLCLKn clock pin is the clock reference
typically used for the TPOSn and TNEGn signals, but they can be time referenced to the TCLKIn, TCLKOn,
RLCLKn or RCLKOn clock pins. The TPOSn and TNEGn pins can be inverted, but the polarity of TXPn and TXNn
cannot be inverted.
TXPn and TXNn are differential analog output pins. They are biased around ½ VDD and pulse above and below
the bias voltage by about 1 Volt. These signals are connected to the windings of a 1:2 step down transformer and
the other winding of the transformer creates the TX LINE signal. The TX LINE signal is a bipolar signal that pulses
about 1 Volt positive and 1 Volt negative above and below ground (0 volts). See Figure 1-1 for a diagram of the
external connections.
Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 show the relationship between the analog and the digital outputs.
Figure 8-1. TX Line IO B3ZS Functional Timing Diagram
TLCLK
(TX DATA)
TPOS
TNEG
B
TXP
V
B
V
B
V
B
V
BIAS V
TXN
0V
(TX LINE)
+
-
B3ZS CODEWORD
36
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-2. TX Line IO HDB3 Functional Timing Diagram
TLCLK
(TX DATA)
TPOS
B
TNEG
TXP
V
B
V
B
V
B
V
BIAS V
TXN
0V
(TX LINE)
+
-
HDB3 CODEWORD
8.3.1.2
B3ZS/HDB3/AMI Mode Receive Pin Functional Timing
There is no suggested time alignment between the RXPn, RXNn and RX LINE signals and the RLCLKn clock
signal. The RX DATA signal is not an always readily available signal, it is meant to represent the data value of the
other signals. The signal on RSERn will be the same as the RX DATA signal except delayed.
The RXPn and RXNn pins are only available when the line is in B3ZS/HDB3 or AMI mode and the LIU is enabled.
The RPOSn, RNEGn and RLCLKn pins are only available when the line is in B3ZS/HDB3 or AMI mode and the LIU
is disabled.
The RPOSn and RNEGn signals are sampled at the rising edge of the reference clock signal if the clock pin is not
inverted; otherwise they are sampled at the negative edge. The RLCLKn clock pin is the clock reference used for
the RPOSn and RNEGn signals. The RPOSn and RNEGn pins can be inverted.
RXPn and RXNn are differential analog input pins. They are biased around ½ VDD and pulse above and below the
bias voltage by about 1 Volt with zero cable length. These signals are connected to the windings of a 1:2 step up
transformer and the other winding of the transformer is connected to the RX LINE signal. The RX LINE signal is a
bipolar signal that pulses about 1 Volt positive and 1 Volt negative above and below ground (0 volts) with zero
cable length. See Figure 1-1 for a diagram of the external connections.
Figure 8-3 and Figure 8-4 show the relationship between the analog and the digital outputs.
Figure 8-3. RX Line IO B3ZS Functional Timing Diagram
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
B
RNEG
RXP
V
B
V
B
V
B
V
BIAS V
RXN
0V
(RX LINE)
+
-
B3ZS CODEWORD
37
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-4. RX Line IO HDB3 Functional Timing Diagram
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
B
RNEG
RXP
V
B
V
B
V
B
V
BIAS V
RXN
0V
(RX LINE)
+
-
HDB3 CODEWORD
8.3.1.3
UNI Mode Transmit Pin Functional Timing
The TDATn pin is available when the line interface is in the UNI mode and the transmit line pins are enabled
The TDATn signal changes a small delay after the positive edge of the reference clock signal if the clock pin is not
inverted, other wise they change after the negative edge. The TLCLKn clock pin is the clock reference typically
used for the TDATn signal, but the TDATn can be time referenced to the TCLKIn, TCLKOn, RLCLKn or RCLKOn
clock pins. The TDATn pins can be inverted. See Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5. TX Line IO UNI Functional Timing Diagram
TLCLK
TDAT
8.3.1.4
UNI Mode Receive Pin Functional Timing
The RDATn pin is available when the line interface is in the UNI mode. The RLCVn pin is available when the line
interface is in the UNI
All bits on the RDATn pin, will come out the RSERn pin, if the RSERn pin is enabled.
The signal on the RLCVn pin enables the BPV counter, which is in the line interface, to increment each clock it is
high.
The RDATn and RLCVn signals are sampled at the rising edge of the reference clock signal if the clock pin is not
inverted; otherwise they are sampled at the negative edge. The RLCLKn clock pin is the clock reference used for
the RDATn and RLCVn signals. The RDATn and RLCVn pins can be inverted. See Figure 8-6.
38
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-6. RX Line IO UNI Functional Timing Diagram
RLCLK
RDAT
RLVC
INC BPV COUNTER TWICE
8.3.2
INC BPV COUNTER ONCE
DS3/E3 Framing Overhead Functional Timing
Figure 8-7 shows the relationship between the DS3 receive overhead port pins.
Figure 8-7. DS3 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing
ROHCLK
ROHSOF
ROH
FAS
10
1
A
FAS
1
N
2
3
4
FAS
2
5
FAS
3
6
FAS
4
7
FAS
5
8
FAS
6
9
FAS
7
10
FAS
9
FAS
8
11
12
FAS
10
13
A
FAS
1
N
14
15
FAS
2
16
17
FAS
3
18
FAS
4
FAS
5
19
20
FAS
4
FAS
5
FAS
6
21
FAS
8
22
FAS
9
23
FAS
10
24
Figure 8-8 shows the relationship between the E3 G.751 receive overhead port pins.
Figure 8-8. E3 G.751 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing
ROHCLK
ROHSOF
ROH
FAS
10
1
A
2
N
3
FAS
1
4
FAS
2
5
FAS
3
6
FAS
4
7
FAS
5
8
FAS
6
9
FAS
7
10
FAS
8
FAS
9
11
12
FAS
10
13
A
N
14
15
FAS
1
16
FAS
2
17
FAS
3
18
19
20
FAS
6
21
FAS
8
22
FAS
9
23
FAS
10
24
Figure 8-9 shows the relationship between the E3 G.832 receive overhead port pins.
Figure 8-9. E3 G.832 Framing Receive Overhead Port Timing
ROHCLK
ROHSOF
ROH
GC
6
1
GC
7
2
GC
8
3
FA1
1
4
FA1
2
5
FA1
3
6
FA1
4
7
FA1
5
8
FA1
6
9
FA1
7
10
FA1
8
FA2
1
11
12
39
FA2
2
13
FA2
3
14
FA2
4
15
FA2
5
16
FA2
6
17
FA2
7
18
FA2
8
19
EM
1
20
EM
2
21
EM
3
22
EM
4
23
EM
5
24
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-10 shows the relationship between the DS3 transmit overhead port pins.
Figure 8-10. DS3 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing
TOHCLK
TOHSOF
TOHEN
TOH
F73
C73
F74
1
2
3
X1
4
F11
5
C11
F12
C12
F13
C13
6
7
8
9
10
F14
X2
11
12
F21
13
C21
14
F22
15
C22
16
F23
17
C23
18
F24
19
P1
20
F31
C31
21
22
F32
23
C32
24
Figure 8-11 shows the relationship between the E3 G.751 transmit overhead port pins.
Figure 8-11. E3 G.751 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing
TOHCLK
TOHSOF
TOHEN
TOH
FAS
10
1
A
2
N
3
FAS
1
FAS
2
FAS
3
FAS
4
FAS
5
FAS
6
FAS
7
FAS
8
FAS
9
FAS
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A
N
14
15
FAS
1
FAS
2
FAS
3
FAS
4
FAS
5
FAS
6
FAS
8
FAS
9
FAS
9
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Figure 8-12 shows the relationship between the E3 G.832 transmit overhead port pins.
Figure 8-12. E3 G.832 Framing Transmit Overhead Port Timing
TOHCLK
TOHSOF
TOHEN
TOH
8.3.3
8.3.3.1
GC
6
GC
7
GC
8
FA1
1
FA1
2
FA1
3
FA1
4
FA1
5
FA1
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FA1
7
10
FA1
8
11
FA2
1
12
FA2
2
FA2
3
FA2
4
FA2
5
FA2
6
FA2
7
FA2
8
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
EM
1
20
EM
2
21
EM
3
22
EM
4
23
EM
5
24
DS3/E3 Serial Data Interface
DS3/E3 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Functional Timing
The TSERn pin is used to input DS3 or E3 payload data bits in all framing modes as well as the C-bits, which can
be treated as payload, in DS3 M23 and E3 G.751 framing modes. The TDENn signal is used to determine the DS3
or E3 payload bit positions on TSERn. The TDENn signal goes high three clocks before the first bit of a payload
sequence is clocked into the TSERn pin and it goes low three clocks before the payload sequence is stopped
being clocked in to the TSERn pin. The TSOFOn signal pulses high three clocks before the start of the DS3 or E3
overhead bit position on TSERn. The TSOFIn pin is used to set the DS3 or E3 frame position. When the TSOFIn
pin transitions low to high, the first DS3/E3 overhead bit position on TSERn will be forced to align to it
Figure 8-13 to Figure 8-15 show the relationship between the SCT transmit port pins.
40
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-13. DS3 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing
TCLKO or
TCLKI
TSOFO
TSOFI
DS3 TGCLK
DS3 TSER
DS3 TDEN
TSER DATA IS OVERWRITTEN WITH OH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 8-14. E3 G.751 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing
TCLKO or
TCLKI
TSOFO
TSOFI
E3 TGCLK
TSER DATA IS OVERWRITTEN WITH OH
E3 TSER
E3 TDEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 8-15. E3 G.832 SCT Mode Transmit Serial Interface Pin Timing
TCLKO or
TCLKI
TSOFO
TSOFI
E3 TGCLK
TSER DATA IS OVERWRITTEN WITH OH
E3 TSER
E3 TDEN
1
8.3.3.2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
DS3/E3 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Functional Timing
The RSERn signal has the DS3 or E3 payload as well as the DS3 or E3 overhead bits. The RDENn signal is used
to enable external logic for payload processing and will be high during the DS3 or E3 payload bits and low during
the DS3 or E3 overhead bits. The RGCLKn signal can also be used to clock only the DS3 or E3 payload bits into
external logic since the clock is stopped during the DS3 or E3 overhead bits. The RSOFOn signal marks the first
overhead bit of the DS3 or E3 frame.
Figure 8-16 to Figure 8-18 show the relationship between the SCT receive port pins.
41
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-16. DS3 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing
RCLKO or
RCLKI
RSOFO
DS3 RGCLK
DS3 RSER
X1
DS3 RDEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Figure 8-17. E3 G.751 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing
RCLKO or
RCLKI
RSOFO
E3 RGCLK
FAS 1111010000
A
N
14
15
E3 RSER
E3 RDEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Figure 8-18. E3 G.832 SCT Mode Receive Serial Interface Pin Timing
RCLKO or
RCLKI
RSOF
E3 RGCLK
FA1 11110110
FA2 00101000
E3 RSER
E3 RDEN
8.3.4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Microprocessor Interface Functional Timing
Figure 8-19 and Figure 8-21 show examples of a 16-bit databus and an 8-bit databus, respectively. In 16-bit mode,
the A[0]/BSWAP signal controls whether or not to byte swap. In 8-bit mode, the A[0]/BSWAP signal is used as the
LSB of the address bus (A[0]). The selection of databus size is determined by the WIDTH input signal. See also
Section 10.1.1.
42
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-19. 16-Bit Mode Write
A[0]/BSWAP
0x2B0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x1234
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x1234
Figure 8-20. 16-Bit Mode Read
A[0]/BSWAP
0x2B0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x1234
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x1234
43
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-21. 8-Bit Mode Write
A[0]/BSWAP
A[10:1]
D[7:0]
0x2B0
0x2B0
0x34
0x12
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x34
0x2B1 = 012
Figure 8-22. 8-Bit Mode Read
A[0]/BSWAP
0x2B0
0x2B0
A[10:1]
D[7:0]
0x12
0x34
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x34
0x2B1 = 012
Figure 8-23 and Figure 8-24 are examples of databuses without and with byte swapping enabled, respectively.
When the A[0]/BSWAP pin is set to 0, byte swapping is disabled, and when one, byte swapping is enabled. This
pin should be static and not change while operating. Note: Address bit A[0] is not used in 16-bit mode. See also
Section 10.1.2.
44
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-23. 16-Bit Mode without Byte Swap
A[0]/BSWAP
0x2B0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x2B2
0x1234
0x5678
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x1234
0x2B2 = 0x5678
Figure 8-24. 16-Bit Mode with Byte Swap
A[0]/BSWAP
0x2B2
0x2B0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x3412
0x7856
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Note: Address 0x2B0 = 0x1234
0x2B2 = 0x5678
Clearing status latched registers on a read or write access is selectable via the GL.CR1.LSBCRE register bit.
Clearing on read clears all bits in the register, while the clear on write clears only those bits which are written with a
‘1’ when the user writes to the status latched register.
To use the Clear on Read method, the user must only read the status latched register. All bits are set to zero after
the read. Figure 8-25 shows a read of a status latched register and another read of the same register verifying the
register has cleared.
To use the Clear on Write method, the user must write the register with ones in the bit locations that he desires to
clear. Figure 8-26 shows a read, a write, and then a subsequent read revealing the results of clearing of the bits
that he wrote a ‘1.’ See also Section 10.1.5.
45
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-25. Clear Status Latched Register on Read
A[0]/BSWAP
0x1C0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x1C0
0xFFFF
0x0000
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Figure 8-26. Clear Status Latched Register on Write
A[0]/BSWAP
0x1C0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x1C0
0x1C0
0x5555
0xFFFF
0xAAAA
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Figure 8-27 and Figure 8-28show exaggerated views of the Ready Signal to describe the difference in access
times to write or read to or from various memory locations on the DS317x device. Some registers will have a faster
access time than others will and if needed, the user can implement the RDY signal to maximize efficiency of read
and write accesses.
46
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 8-27. RDY Signal Functional Timing Write
A[0]/BSWAP
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x2B0
0x3A4
0x1234
0x0078
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
Figure 8-28. RDY Signal Functional Timing Read
A[0]/BSWAP
0x1C0
A[10:1]
D[15:0]
0x3A4
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
CS
WR
RD
RDY
Z
Z
Z
Z
See also Figure 18-7 and Figure 18-8.
8.3.5
JTAG Functional Timing
See Section 13.5.
47
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
9 INITIALIZATION AND CONFIGURATION
STEP 1: Check Device ID Code:
Before any testing can be done, device ID code, which is stored in GL.IDR, should be checked against device ID
codes shown below to ensure correct device is being used.
Current device ID codes are:
o
DS3171 rev 1.0:
0044h
o
DS3172 rev 1.0:
0045h
o
DS3173 rev 1.0:
0046h
o
DS3174 rev 1.0:
0047h
STEP 2: Initialize the Device.
Before configuring for operation, make sure the device is in a known condition with all registers set to their default
value by initiating a Global Reset (see Section 10.3). A Global Reset can be initiated via the RST pin or by the
Global Reset bit (GL.CR1.RST). A Port Reset is not necessary since the global reset includes a reset of all ports to
their default values.
STEP 3: Clear the Reset.
It is necessary to clear the RST bit to begin normal operation.
After clearing the RST bit, the device is configured for default mode.
Default mode:
Framer: C-bit DS3
LIU: Disabled
STEP 4: Clear the Data Path Resets and the Port Power-Down bit.
The default value of the Data Path Resets is one, which keeps the internal logic in the reset status. The user needs
to clear the following bits:
GL.CR1.RSTDP = 0
PORT.CR1.RSTDP = 0
PORT.CR1.PD = 0
STEP 5: Configure the CLAD
If using the LIU, configure the CLAD (which supplies the clock to the Receive LIU) via the CLAD bits in
the GL.CR2 register.
Note: The user must supply a DS3, E3, or STS-1 clock to the CLKA pin.
STEP 6: Select the clock source for the transmitter.
Loop Time (use the receive clock): Set PORT.CR3.LOOPT = 1
CLAD Source: Set PORT.CR3.CLADC = 0
TCLKI Source: Set PORT.CR3.CLADC = 1
If using the CLAD, properly configure the CLAD by setting the CLAD bits in GL.CR2.
STEP 7: Configure the Framing Mode and the Line Mode..
PORT.CR2.LM[2:0] = 011 (LIU on, JA in Rx side) or another setting. See Table 10-26
PORT.CR2.FM[2:0] set to correct mode. See Table 10-25.
STEP 8: Disable Payload AIS (downstream AIS) and Line AIS
PORT.CR1.PAIS[2:0] = 111
PORT.CR1.LAIS[1:0] = 11
STEP 9: Enable each port (for non-LIU modes)
PORT.CR2.TLEN = 1
48
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 9-1. Configuration of Port Register Settings
Note: The Line Mode has been configured with the LIU enabled and the JA in the receive path (LM[2:0] = 011) for
all modes. Only Port 1 registers have been displayed.
Test the DS317x with the following configuration settings.
MODE
PORT.CR1
0x040
PORT.CR2
0x042
PORT.CR3
0x044
PORT.CR4
0x046
DS3 C-Bit SCT
0x7C00
0000 0011 0000 0111
0x0000
0x0000
DS3 M13 SCT
0x7C00
0000 0011 0000 1111
0x0000
0x0000
E3.751 SCT
0x7C00
0000 0011 0001 0111
0x0000
0x0000
E3.823 SCT
0x7C00
0000 0011 0001 111X
0x0000
0x0000
Considerations
For best performance of the CLAD to meet jitter requirements across the temperature range, especially @ -40 C,
the following test registers should be set after reset:
Address 0x20B = 0x11
Address 0x20F = 0x11
9.1
Monitoring and Debugging
To determine if the device is receiving a good signal and that the chip is correctly configured for its environment,
check the following status registers.
Receive Loss of Lock – PORT.SR.RLOL – The clock recovery circuit of the LIU was unable to recover the clock
from the incoming signal. This may indicate that the LIU’s master clock does not match the frequency of the
incoming signal. Verify that the CLAD is configured to match the clock input on the CLKA, CLKB, and CLKC pins
(DS3, E3, STS-1). See Table 10-11.
Loss of Signal – LINE.RSR.LOS – This indicates that the LIU is unable to recover the clock and data because
there is no signal on the line, or that the signal is attenuated beyond recovery.
Loss of Frame – T3.RSR1.LOF (or E3751.RSR1 or E3832.RSR1) – This indicates that the framer was unable to
synchronize to the incoming data. Verify that the FM bits have been correctly configured for the correct mode of
traffic (DS3, E3 G.751, E3 G.832)
Other helpful techniques to utilize in diagnosing a problem include using Line Loopback and Diagnostic Loopback.
These features help to isolate and identify the source of the problem. Line Loopback will loop the receive input to
the transmit output, eliminating the transmit side input from the equation. Diagnostic Loopback will loop the transmit
output before the LIU to the receive framer, eliminating the analog Receive LIU and the receive side analog
circuitry.
One other potential problem is the Line Encoding/Decoding. The device needs to be configured in the same
mode as the far end piece of equipment. If the far end piece of equipment is transmitting and receiving HDB3/B3ZS
encoded data, the DS317x also must be configured to do the same. This is controlled by the LINE.TCR.TZSD and
the LINE.RCR.RZSD bits.
49
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
10.1 Processor Bus Interface
10.1.1 8/16 Bit Bus Widths
The external processor bus can be sized for 8 or 16 bits using the WIDTH pin. When in 8-bit mode (WIDTH=0), the
address is composed of all the address bits including A[0], the lower 8 data lines D[7:0] are used and the upper 8
data lines D[15:8] are not used and never driven during a read cycle. When in 16-bit mode (WIDTH=1), the
address bus does not include A[0] (the LSB of the address bus is not routed to the chip) and all 16 data lines
D[15:0] are used. See Figure 8-19 and Figure 8-21 for functional timing diagrams.
10.1.2 Ready Signal (RDY)
The RDY signal allows the microprocessor to use the minimum bus cycle period for maximum efficiency. When this
signal goes low, the RD or WR cycle can be terminated. See Figure 8-27 for functional timing diagrams.
NOTE: The RDY signal will not go active if the user attempts to read or write unused ports or unused registers not
assigned to any design blocks. The RDY signal will go active if the user writes or reads reserved registers or
unused registers within design blocks.
10.1.3 Byte Swap Modes
The processor interface can operate in byte swap mode when the data bus is configured for 16-bit operation. The
A[0]/BSWAP pin is used to determine whether byte swapping is enabled. This pin should be static and not change
while operating. When the A[0]/BSWAP pin is low the upper register bits REG[15:8] are mapped to the upper
external data bus lines D[15:8], and the lower register bits REG[7:0] are mapped to the lower external data bus
lines D[7:0]. When the A[0]/BSWAP pin is high the upper register bits REG[15:8] are mapped to the lower external
data bus lines D[7:0], and the lower register bits REG[7:0] are mapped to the upper external data bus lines D[15:8].
See Figure 8-23 and Figure 8-24 for functional timing diagrams.
10.1.4 Read-Write / Data Strobe Modes
The processor interface can operate in either read-write strobe mode or data strobe mode. When MODE=0 the
read-write strobe mode is enabled and a negative pulse on RD performs a read cycle, and a negative pulse on WR
performs a write cycle. When MODE=1 the data strobe mode is enabled and a negative pulse on DS when R/W is
high performs a read cycle, and a negative pulse on DS when R/W is low performs a write cycle. The read-write
strobe mode is commonly called the “Intel” mode, and the data strobe mode is commonly called the “Motorola”
mode.
10.1.5 Clear on Read / Clear on Write Modes
The latched status register bits can be programmed to clear on a read access or clear on a write access. The
global control register bit GL.CR1.LSBCRE controls the mode that all of the latched registers are cleared. When
LSBCRE=0, the latched register bits will be cleared when the register is written to and the write data has the
register bits to clear set. When LSBCRE=1, the latched register bits that are set will be cleared when the register is
read.
The clear on write mode expects the user to use the following protocol:
1. Read the latched status register
2. Write to the registers with the bits set that need to be cleared.
This protocol is useful when multiple uncoordinated software tasks access the same latched register. Each task
should only clear the bits with which it is concerned; the other tasks will clear the bits with which they are
concerned.
50
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The clear on read mode is simpler since the bits that were read as being set will be cleared automatically. This
method will work well in a software system where multiple tasks do not read the same latched status register. The
latched status register bits in clear on read mode are carefully designed not to miss events that occur while a
register is being read when the latched bit has not already been set. Refer to Figure 8-25 and Figure 8-26.
10.1.6 Global Write Method
All of the ports can be written to simultaneously using the global write method. This method is enabled by setting
the GL.CR1.GWM bit. When the global write method is enabled, a write to a register on any valid port will write to
the same register on all valid ports. A valid port is a port that is available in a particular packaged part. For
example, port four would not be valid in a DS3173 device. After reset, the global write method is not enabled.
When the GWM bit is set, read data from the port registers is not valid and read data from the global and test
registers is valid. The data value read back from a port register should be ignored.
10.1.7 Interrupt and Pin Modes
The interrupt (INT) pin is configurable to drive high or float when not active. The GL.CR1.INTM bit controls the pin
configuration, when it is set the INT pin will drive high when not active. After reset, the INT pin will be in high
impedance mode until an interrupt source is active and enabled to drive the interrupt pin.
10.1.8 Interrupt Structure
The interrupt structure is designed to efficiently guide the user to the source of an enabled interrupt source. The
status bits in the global status (GL.SR) and global status latched register (GL.SRL) are read to determine if the
interrupt source is a global event, a global performance monitor update or whether it came from one of the ports. If
the interrupt event came from one of the ports then the port status register (PORT.SR) and port status register
latched (PORT.SRL) can be read to determine if the interrupt source is a common port event like the performance
monitor update or LIU or whether it came from one of the DS3/E3 Framers, BERT, HDLC, FEAC or Trail Trace
status registers. If the interrupt came from one of the DS3/E3 Framers, BERT, HDLC, FEAC or Trail Trace status
registers, then one of those registers will need to be read to determine the event that caused the interrupt.
The source of an interrupt can be determined by reading three status registers: the global, port and block status
registers.
When a mode is not enabled, then interrupts from that source will not occur. For example, if E3 framing mode is
enabled, an interrupt source that is defined in DS3 framing, but not in E3 framing, cannot create a new interrupt.
Note that when modes are changed, the latched status bits of the new mode, as well as any other mode, may get
set. If the data path reset is set during or after the mode change, the latched status bits will be automatically
cleared. If the data path reset is not used to clear the latched status bits, then the registers must be cleared by
reading or writing to them based on the register clear method selected.
51
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-1. Interrupt Structure
SRL bit
SRIE bit
SRL bit
PORT.ISR bit
SRIE bit
SRL bit
GL.ISR.PISRn
SRIE bit
GL.ISRIE.
PISRIEn
BLOCK LATCHED
STATUS and
INTERRUPT
ENABLE
REGISTERS
PORT INTERRUPT
STATUS
REGISTER
GLOBAL
INTERRUPT
STATUS REGISTER
and INTERRUPT
ENABLE REGISTER
PORT
INTERRUPTS
INT
GLOBAL
INTERRUPTS
Figure 10-1 not only tells the user how to determine which event caused the interrupt, it also tells the user how to
enable a particular interrupt. Each block has a Status Register Interrupt Enable register that must be set in order to
enable an interrupt. The next step is to unmask the interrupt at the port level, on a per port basis. This is controlled
in the Global Interrupt Status Register Interrupt Enable register (GL.ISRIE). Now the device is ready to drive the
INT pin low when a particular status bit gets set.
For example, in order to enable DS3 Out of Frame interrupts on Port 2, the following registers would need to be
written:
Register bit
Address
Value Written
Note
T3.RSRIE1.OOFIE
0x2BC
0x0002
Unmask OOF interrupt on Port 2
GL.ISRIE.PISRIE2
0x010
0x0020
Unmask Port 2 interrupts
The following status registers bits will be set upon reception of OOF on Port 2:
Register bit
Address
Value Read
Note
T3.RSRL1.OOFL
0x2B8
0x0002
DS3 Out of Frame on Port 2
PORT.ISR.FMSR
0x250
0x0001
Framer Block Interrupt Active, Port 2
GL.ISR.PISR2
0x010
0x0020
Port 2 Interrupt Active
10.2 Clocks
10.2.1 Line Clock Modes
10.2.1.1 Loop Timing Enabled
When loop timing is enabled (PORT.CR3.LOOPT), the transmit clock source is the same as the receive clock
source. The TCLKIn pins are not used as a clock source. Because loop timing is enabled, the loopback functions
(LLB, PLB and DLB) do not cause the clock sources to switch when they are activated. The transmit and receive
52
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
signal pins can be timed to a single clock reference without concern about having the clock source change during
loopbacks.
10.2.1.1.1 LIU Enabled, Loop Timing Enabled
In this mode, the receive LIU sources the clock for both the receive and transmit logic. The RCLKOn, TCLKOn and
TLCLKn clock output pins will be the same. The transmit or receive line payload signal pins can be timed to any of
these clock. The use of the RCLKOn pin as the timing source is suggested. If RCLKOn is used as the timing
source, be sure to set PORT.CR3.RFTS = 0 for output timing.
10.2.1.1.2 LIU Disabled, Loop Timing Enabled
In this mode, the RLCLKn pins are the source of the clock for both the receive and transmit logic. The RCLKOn,
TCLKOn and TLCLKn clock output pins will both be the same as the RLCLKn clock. The transmit or receive line
payload signals can be timed to any of these clock pins. The use of the RLCLKn pin as the timing source is
suggested. If RLCLKn is used as the timing source, be sure to set PORT.CR3.RFTS = 1 for input timing.
10.2.1.2 Loop Timing Disabled
When loop timing is disabled, the transmit clock source can be different than the receive clock source. The
loopback functions, LLB, PLB and DLB, will cause the clock sources to switch when they are activated. Care must
be taken when selecting the clock reference for the transmit and receive signals.
The most versatile clocking option has the receive line interface signals timed to RLCLKn, the transmit line
interface signals timed to TLCLKn, the receive framer signals timed to RCLKOn, and the transmit framer signals
timed to TCLKOn. This clocking arrangement works in all modes.
When LLB is enabled, the clock on the TLCLKn pins will switch to the clock from the RLCLKn pins or RX LIU. It is
recommended that the transmit line interface signals be timed to the TLCLKn pins. If TLCLKn is used as the timing
source, be sure to set PORT.CR3.TLTS = 0 for output timing.
When PLB is enabled, the TCLKIn pin will not be used and the internal transmit clock is switched to the internal
receive clock. The clock on the TCLKOn pins will switch to the clock from the RLCLKn pins or RX LIU. The framer
input signals will be ignored while PLB is enabled. It is recommended that the transmit line interface signals be
timed to the TCLKOn pins.
When DLB is enabled, the internal receive clock is switched to the internal transmit clock which is sourced from the
TCLKIn pins or one of the CLAD clocks, and the clock on the RLCLKn pins or from the RX LIU will not be used.
The clock on the RCLKOn pins will switch to the clock on the TCLKIn pins or one of the CLAD clocks. The receive
line signals from the RX LIU or line interface pins will be ignored. It is recommended that the receive framer pins be
timed to the RCLKOn pins. If TCLKOn is used as the timing source, be sure to set PORT.CR3.TFTS = 0 for output
timing.
When both DLB and LLB are enabled, the TLCLKn clock pins are connected to either the RX LIU recovered clock
or the RLCLKn clock pins, and the RCLKOn clock pins will be connected to the TCLKIn clock pins or one of the
CLAD clocks. It is recommended that the transmit line signals be timed to the TLCLKn pins, the receive line
interface signals be timed to the RLCLKn pins, the receive framer signals be timed to the RCLKOn pins, and the
transmit framer signals be timed to the TCLKOn pins.
10.2.1.2.1 LIU Enabled - CLAD Timing Disabled – no LB
In this mode, the receive LIU sources the clock for the receive logic and the TCLKIn pins source the clock for the
transmit logic.
10.2.1.2.2 LIU Enabled - CLAD Timing Enabled – no LB
In this mode, the receive LIU sources the clock for the receive logic and one of the CLAD clocks sources the clock
for the transmit logic.
10.2.1.2.3 LIU Disabled - CLAD Timing Disabled – no LB
In this mode, the RLCLKn pins source the clock for the receive logic and the TCLKIn pins source the clock for the
transmit logic.
53
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.2.1.2.4 LIU Disabled - CLAD Timing Enabled – no LB
In this mode, the RLCLKn pins source the clock for the receive logic and one of the CLAD clocks sources the clock
for the transmit logic.
10.2.2 Sources of Clock Output Pin Signals
The clock output pins can be sourced from many clock sources. The clock sources are the transmit input clocks
pins (TCLKIn), the receive clock input pins (RLCLKn), the recovered clock in the receive LIUs, and the clock
signals in the clock rate adapter circuit (CLAD). The default clock source for the receive logic is the RLCLKn pin if
the LIU is disabled; otherwise the default clock is sourced from the RX LIU clock when the RX LIU is enabled. The
default clock source for the transmit logic is the CLAD clocks.
The LIU is enabled based on the line mode bits(LM[2:0]) (See Table 10-26). The bits LM[2:0], LBM[2:0], LOOPT
and CLADC are located in the port configuration registers. LIUEN is not a register bit; it is a variable based on the
line mode bits. Table 10-1 decodes the LM bits for LiUEN selection.
Table 10-1. LIU Enable Table
LM[2:0]
LIUEN
LIU Status
000
0
Disabled
001
1
Enabled
010
1
Enabled
011
1
Enabled
1XX
0
Disabled
Table 10-2 identifies the framer clock source and the line clock source depending on the mode that the device is
configured. Putting the device in loopback will typically mux in a different clock than the normal clock source.
Table 10-2. All Possible Clock Sources Based on Mode and Loopback
Rx FRAMER
CLOCK
SOURCE
MODE
LOOPBACK
Loop Timed
Any
Normal
None
Normal
LLB
Normal
PLB
Normal
DLB
Same as Tx
Normal
LLB and DLB
Same as Tx
RLCLKn or
RXLIU
RLCLKn or
RXLIU
RLCLKn or
RXLIU
RLCLKn or
RXLIU
Tx FRAMER
CLOCK
SOURCE
Tx LINE
CLOCK
SOURCE
Same as Rx
Same as Rx
TCLKIn or
CLAD
TCLKIn or
CLAD
Same as Rx
TCLKIn or
CLAD
TCLKIn or
CLAD
Same as Tx
Same as Rx
Same as Rx
Same as Tx
RLCLKn or
RXLIUn
Table 10-3 identifies the source of the output signal TLCLKn based on certain variables and register bits.
54
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-3. Source Selection of TLCLK Clock Signal
Signal
TLCLKn
LOOPT
PORT.
CR3
LBM[2:0]
(PORT.CR4)
LLB or
PLB
LIUEN
CLADC
(PORT.
CR3)
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XXX
XXX
010
110
010
110
011
011
000
001
100
10X
111
000
001
100
10X
111
NA
NA
LLB
LLB
LLB
LLB
PLB
PLB
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
Source
RX LIU
RLCLKn
RX LIU
RX LIU
RLCLKn
RLCLKn
RX LIU
RLCLKn
CLAD
CLAD
CLAD
CLAD
CLAD
TCLKIn
TCLKIn
TCLKIn
TCLKIn
TCLKIn
Figure 10-2 shows the source of the TCLKOn signals.
Figure 10-2. Internal TX Clock
PORT.CR3.
CLADC
CLAD
PAYLOAD
LOOPBACK
0
0
TCLKI
TCLKO
1
1
RCLKO
Table 10-4 identifies the source of the output signal TCLKOn based on certain variables and register bits.
55
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-4. Source Selection of TCLKOn (internal TX clock)
Signal
TCLKOn
LOOPT
PORT.CR3
LBM[2:0] (PORT.CR4)
LIUEN
1
1
0
0
0
0
XXX
XXX
PLB (011)
PLB (011)
PLB disabled
PLB disabled
1
0
1
0
X
X
CLADC
(PORT.
CR3)
X
X
X
X
0
1
Source
RX LIU
RLCLKn
RX LIU
RLCLKn
CLAD
TCLKIn
Figure 10-3 shows the source of the RCLKOn signals.
Figure 10-3. Internal RX Clock
LIUEN
RLCLK
DIAGNOSTIC
LOOPBACK
0
0
Rx LIU CLOCK
RCLKO
1
1
TCLKO
Table 10-5 identifies the source of the output signal RCLKOn based on certain variables and register bits.
Table 10-5. Source Selection of RCLKO Clock Signal (internal RX clock)
Signal
RCLKOn
LOOPT
PORT.CR3
LBM[2:0]
(PORT.CR4)
LIUEN
1
1
0
0
XXX
XXX
DLB disabled
DLB disabled & ALB
disabled
DLB (1XX)
DLB (1XX) or ALB
(001)
DLB (1XX)
0
0
0
Source
1
0
1
0
CLADC
(PORT.
CR3)
X
X
X
X
RX LIU
RLCLKn
RX LIU
RLCLKn
X
0
0
1
CLAD
TCLKIn
1
1
TCLKIn
56
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.2.3 Line IO Pin Timing Source Selection
The line IO pins can use any input clock pin (RLCLKn or TCLKIn) or output clock pin (TLCLKn, RCLKOn, or
TCLKOn) for its clock pin and meet the AC timing specifications as long as the clock signal is valid for the mode the
part is in. The clock select bit for the transmit line IO signal group PORT.CR3.TLTS selects the correct input or
output clock timing.
10.2.3.1 Transmit Line Interface Pins Timing Source Selection
(TPOSn/TDATn, TNEGn)
The transmit line interface signal pin group has the same functional timing clock source as the TLCLKn pin
described in Table 10-3. Other clock pins can be used for the external timing. The TLCLKn transmit line clock
output pin is always a valid output clock for external logic to use for these signals when PORT.CR3.TLTS=0.
The transmit line timing select bit (TLTS) is used to select input or output clock pin timing. When TLTS=0, output
clock timing is selected. When TLTS=1, input clock timing is selected. If TLTS is set for input clock timing and an
output clock pin is used, or if TLTS is set for output clock timing and an input clock pin is used, then the setup, hold
and delay timings, as specified in Section 18.1 will not be valid. There are some combinations of TLTS=1 and other
modes in which there is no input clock pin available for external timing since the clock source is derived internally
from the RX LIU or the CLAD.
0
0
0
TLTS
0
XXX
XXX
XXX
DLB (100)
LLB (010) or PLB (011)
DLB&LLB (110)
not DLB (100),
not LLB (010), not PLB (011)
and not LLB&DLB (110)
not LLB (010) and not PLB (011)
and not LLB&DLB (110)
not LLB (010) and not PLB (011)
and not LLB&DLB (110)
LLB (010) or PLB (011)
or DLB&LLB (110)
LLB (010) or PLB (011)
or DLB&LLB (110)
CLADC
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
LBM[2:0]
LIUEN
LOOPT
Table 10-6. Transmit Line Interface Signal Pin Valid Timing Source Select
Valid Timing to These Clock Pins
X
0
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn
RLCLKn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn
TLCLKn, RCLKOn
TLCLKn
TLCLKn, TCLKOn (default)
X
0
1
No valid timing to any input clock pin
X
1
1
TCLKIn
0
X
1
RLCLKn
1
X
1
No valid timing to any input clock pin
10.2.3.2 Transmit Framer Pin Timing Source Selection
(TSERn, TSOFIn, TSOFOn/TDENn)
The transmit framer signal pin group has the same functional timing clock source as the TCLKO pin described in
Table 10-4. Other clock pins can be used for the external timing. The TCLKO transmit clock output pin is always a
valid output clock for external logic to use for these signals when TFTS=0.
The transmit framer select bit (TFTS) is used to select input or output clock pin timing. When TFTS=0, output clock
timing is selected. When TFTS=1, input clock timing is selected. If TFTS is set for input clock timing and an output
clock pin is used, or If TFTS is set for output clock timing and an input clock pin is used, then the setup, hold and
delay timings, as specified in Section 18.1 will not be valid. There are some combinations of TFTS=1 and other
modes in which there is no input clock pin available for external timing since the clock source is derived internally
from the RX LIU or the CLAD.
57
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
TFTS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XXX
XXX
XXX
PLB (011) or DLB (100) or
ALB(001)
PLB (011) or DLB (100)
DLB&LLB (110)
LLB (010)
not LLB, DLB or PLB (00X)
not PLB (011)
not PLB (011)
PLB (011)
PLB (011)
CLADC
1
1
1
0
LBM[2:0]
LIUEN
LOOPT
Table 10-7. Transmit Framer Pin Signal Timing Source Select
Valid Timing to These Clock Pins
X
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
TCLKOn, TLCLKn, RCLKOn
RLCLKn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
TCLKOn, TLCLKn, RCLKOn
1
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
X
X
X
X
0
1
X
X
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
TCLKOn, TLCLKn, RCLKOn
TCLKOn, RCLKOn
TCLKOn
TCLKOn, TLCLKn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
TCLKIn
RLCLKn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
10.2.3.3 Receive Line Interface Pin Timing Source Selection
(RPOSn/RDATn, RNEGn/RLCVn)
The receive line interface signal pin group must clocked in with the RLCLK clock input pin. When the LIU is
enabled, the receive line interface pins are not used so there is no valid clock reference.
LOOPT
LBM[2:0]
LIUEN
CLADC
Table 10-8. Receive Line Interface Pin Signal Timing Source Select
X
X
XXX
XXX
0
1
X
X
Valid Timing to These Clock Pins
RLCLKn
No valid timing to any clock pin
10.2.3.4 Receiver Framer Pin Timing Source Selection
(RSERn, RSOFOn/RDENn)
The receive framer signal pin group has the same functional timing clock source as the RCLKOn pin described in
Table 10-5.
Other clock pins can be used for the external timing. The RCLKOn receive clock output pin is always a valid output
clock for external logic to use for these signals when PORT.CR3.RFTS=0.
The receive framer timing select bit (RFTS) is used to select input or output clock pin timing. When RFTS=0, output
clock timing is selected. When RFTS=1, input clock timing is selected. If RFTS is set for input clock timing and an
output clock pin is used, or If RFTS is set for output clock timing and an input clock pin is used, then the setup, hold
and delay timings, as specified in Section 18.1 will not be valid. There are some combinations of RFTS=1 and
other modes in which there is no input clock pin available for external timing since the clock source is derived
internally from the RX LIU or the CLAD.
58
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
0
RFTS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XXX
XXX
XXX
PLB (011) or DLB (100) or
ALB(001)
PLB (011) or DLB (100)
DLB&LLB (110)
LLB (010)
not LLB, DLB or PLB (00X)
DLB (100) or LLB&DLB(110)
DLB (100) or LLB&DLB(110)
not DLB (100) and
not LLB&DLB(110)
not DLB (100) and
not LLB&DLB(110)
CLADC
1
1
1
0
LBM[2:0]
LIUEN
LOOPT
Table 10-9. Receive Framer Pin Signal Timing Source Select
Valid Timing to These Clock Pins
X
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
RCLKOn, TLCLKn, TCLKOn
RLCLKn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
RCLKOn, TLCLKn, TCLKOn
1
X
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
X
0
1
X
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
RCLKOn, TLCLKn, TCLKOn
RCLKOn, TCLKOn
RCLKOn, TLCLKn
RCLKOn
No valid timing to any input clock pin
TCLKIn
RLCLKn
1
X
1
No valid timing to any input clock pin
10.2.4 Clock Structures On Signal IO Pins
The signals on the input pins (TSOFIn, TSERn) can be used with any of the clock pins for setup/hold timing on
clock input and output pins. There will be a flop at each input whose clock is connected to the signal from the input
or output clock source pins with as little delay as possible from the signal on the clock IO pins. This means using
the input clock signal before the delays of the internal clock tree to clock the input signals, and using the output
clock signals used to drive the output clock pins to clock the input signals.
The signals on the output pins (TPOSn/TDATn, TNEGn, TSOFOn/TDENn, RSERn, RSOFOn/RDENn) can be with
any of the clock sources for delay timing. There will be a flop at each output whose clock is connected to the signal
from the input or output clock source pins with as little delay as possible from the signal on the clock IO pins. This
means using the input clock signal before the delays of the internal clock tree to clock the input signals, and using
the output clock signals used to drive the output clock pins to clock the input signals.
59
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-4. Example IO Pin Clock Muxing
TSER
D
PIN INVERT
SET
D
Q
Q
DELAY
0
1
TFTS
CLR
Q
CLR
INTERNAL
SIGNAL
D
SET
CLR
CLOCK TREE
TCLKI
SET
INTERNAL
SIGNAL
Q
D
Q
Q
SET
DELAY
0
CLR
TDEN
Q
Q
PIN INVERT
1
TFTS
TCLKO
PIN INVERT
PIN INVERT
INTERNAL
SIGNAL
RLCLK
PIN INVERT
D
SET
CLR
CLOCK TREE
D
Q
Q
SET
DELAY
0
CLR
TPOS
Q
Q
PIN INVERT
1
TLTS
TLCLK
RX LIU CLK
PIN INVERT
CLAD CLOCKS
DS3 CLK
E3 CLK
STS-1 CLK
INTERNAL
SIGNAL
D
CLOCK TREE
SET
CLR
D
Q
Q
SET
DELAY
0
CLR
RSER
Q
Q
PIN INVERT
1
RFTS
RCLKO
PIN INVERT
10.2.5 Gapped Clocks
The transmit and receive output clocks can be gapped in certain configurations. See Table 10-22 and Table 10-24
for the configuration settings. The gapped clocks are active during DS3 or E3 framed payload bits overhead bits
depending on which mode the device is configured for.
In the internal DS3 or E3 frame modes, the transmit gapped clock is created by the logical OR of the TCLKOn and
TDENn signals creating a positive or negative clock edge for each payload bit, the receive gapped clock is created
by the logical OR of the RCLKOn and RDENn signals.
When the output clock is disabled, the gapped output signal is high during clock periods if the pin is not inverted,
otherwise it will be low.
The gapped clocks are very useful when the data being clocked does not need to be aligned with any frame
structure. The data is simply clocked one bit at a time as a continuous data stream.
10.3 Reset and Power-Down
The device can be reset at a global level via the GL.CR1.RST bit or the RST pin and at the port level via the
PORT.CR1.RST bit and each port can be explicitly powered down via the PORT.CR1.PD bit. The JTAG logic is
reset using the power on reset signal from one of the LIUs as well as from the JTRST pin.
60
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The external RST pin and the global reset bit in the global configuration register (GL.CR1.RST) are combined to
create an internal global reset signal. The global reset signal resets all the status and control registers on the chip,
except the GL.CR1.RST bit, to their default values and resets all the other flops in the global logic and ports to their
reset values. The processor bus output signals are also forced to be HIZ when the RST pin is active (low). The
global reset bit (GL.CR1.RST) stays set after a one is written to it, but is reset to zero when the external RST pin is
active or when a zero is written to it.
At the port level, the global reset signal combines with the port-reset bit in the port control register
(PORT.CR1.RST) to create a port-reset signal. The port reset signal resets all the status and control registers on
the port to their default values and resets all the other flops, except PORT.CR1.RST, to their reset values. The port
reset bit (PORT.CR1.RST) stays set after a one is written to it, but is reset to zero when the global reset signal is
active or when a zero is written to it.
The data path reset function is a little different from the “general” reset function. The data path reset signal does not
reset the control register bits, but it does reset all of the status registers, counters and flops, the “general” reset
signal resets everything including the control register bits, excluding the reset bit. All clocks are functional, being
controlled by configuration bits, while data path reset is active. The LIU and CLAD circuits will be operating
normally during data path reset, which allows the internal phase locked loops to settle as quickly as possible. The
LIU will be sending all zeros (LOS) since data path reset will be forcing the transmit TPOSn and TNEGn to logic
zero. (NOTE: The BERT data path and control registers are reset when the global data path reset or the port data
path reset or the port power-down signal is active.)
The global data path reset bit (GL.CR1.RSTDP) gets set to one when the global reset signal is active. The port
data path reset bit (PORT.CR1.RSTDP) and the port power-down bit (PORT.CR1.PD) bit get set to one when the
global reset signal is active or the port reset signal is active. These control bits will be cleared when a zero is
written to them if the global reset signal or the port-reset signal is not active. The global data path reset signal is
active when the global data path reset bit is set. The port data path reset signal is active when either the global
data path reset bit or the port data path reset bit is set. The port power-down signal is active when the port powerdown bit is set.
Figure 10-5. Reset Sources
Global Reset
RST pin
NOTE: Assumes
active high signals
Port Reset
D
SET
CLR
Q
D
GL.CR1. RST
Q
SET
CLR
Q
Q
PORT.CR1.
RST
Global Data Path Reset
D
SET
D
Q
SET
Q
Port Data Path Reset
GL.CR1. RSTDP
CLR
Q
CLR
Q
PORT.CR1.
RSTDP
D
SET
CLR
Q
Q
PORT.CR1. PD
61
Port Power Down
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-10. Reset and Power-Down Sources
Port power
dn
P:PD
F1
F0
F1
F1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F1
F0
F1
F1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
F1
F1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
X
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
X
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
F1
F1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Port dp
reset
P:RSTDP
Port reset
P:RST
F0
Global
reset
G:RSTDP
0
RST
G:RST
Global dp
reset
Register bit states - F0: Forced to 0, F1: Forced to 1, 0: Set to 0, 1: Set to 1, X: Don’t care
Forced: Internally controlled
Set: User controlled
PIN
REGISTER BITS
INTERNAL SIGNALS
The reset signals in the device are asynchronous so they no not require a clock to put the logic into the reset state.
Clock signals may be needed to make the logic come out of the reset state.
The power-down function disables the appropriate clocks to cause the logic to generate a minimum of power. It
also puts the LIU circuits into the power-down mode. The 8KREF and ONESEC circuits can be powered down by
disabling the 8KREF source. The CLAD can also be powered down by disabling it.
After a global reset, all of the control and status registers in all ports are set to their default values and all the other
flops are reset to their reset values. The global register GL.CR1.RSTDP, and the port register PORT.CR1.RSTDP
and PORT.CR1.PD bits in all ports, are set after the global reset. A valid initialization sequence would be to clear
the PORT.CR1.PD bits in the ports that are to be active, write to all of the configuration registers to set them in the
desired modes, then clear the GL.CR1.RSTDP and PORT.CR1.RSTDP bits. This would cause the logic in the
ports to start up in a repeatable sequence. The device can also be initialized by clearing the GL.CR1.RSTDP,
PORT.CR1.RSTDP and PORT.CR1.PD them writing to all of the configuration registers to set them in the desired
modes, and clearing all of the latched status bits. The second initialization scheme could cause the device to
temporarily go into modes of operation that were not requested, but will quickly go into the requested modes of
operation.
Some of the IO pins are put in a known state at reset. The transmit LIU outputs TXPn and TXNn are quiet and will
not drive positive or negative pulses. The global IO pins (GPIO[7:0]) are set as inputs at global reset. The port
output pins (TLCLKn, TPOSn/TDATn, TNEGn, TOHCLKn, TOHSOFn, TSOFOn/TDENn, TCLKOn/TGCLKn,
ROHn, ROHCLKn, ROHSOFn, RSERn, RSOFOn/RDENn, RCLKOn/RGCLKn) are driven low at global or port
reset and should stay low until after the port power-down PORT.CR1.PD and port data path reset
PORT.CR1.RSTDP bits are cleared. The CLAD clock pins CLKA, CLKB and CLKC are the LIU reference clock
inputs at global reset. The processor port tri-state output pins (D[15:0], RDY, INT) are forced into the high
impedance state when the RST pin is active, but not when the GL.CR1.RST bit is active.
After reset, the device will be in the default configuration:: The latched status bits are enabled to be cleared on
write. The CLAD is disabled. The global 8KREF and one-second timers are disabled. The line interface is in B3ZS
mode and the LIU is disabled and the transmit line pins are also disabled. The frame mode is DS3 C-bit with
automatic downstream AIS on LOS or OOF is enabled and automatic RDI on LOF, LOS, SEF or AIS is enabled
62
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
and automatic FEBE is enabled. Transmit clock comes from the CLAD CLKA pin. The pin inversion on all pins is
disabled.
Individual blocks are reset and powered down when not used determined by the settings in the line mode bits
PORT.CR2.LM[2:0] and framer mode bits PORT.CR2.FM[2:0].
10.4 Global Resources
10.4.1 Clock Rate Adapter (CLAD)
The clock rate adapter is used to create multiple clocks for LIU reference clocks or transmit clocks from a single
clock reference input on the CLKA pin. The clock frequency applied to this pin must be at the DS3 (44.736 MHz),
E3 (34.368 MHz) and STS-1 (51.84 MHz) clock rates. Given one of these clocks the other two clocks will be
generated. The internally generated signals can be driven on output pins (CLKB and CLKC) for external use.
The receive LIU is supplied a reference clock from the CLAD. The receive LIU selects the clock frequency based
upon the mode the user selects via the FM bits. The CLAD output is also available as a transmit clock source if
selected via the PORT.CR2.CLADC register bit.
The user must supply at least one of the three rates (DS3, E3, STS-1) to the CLKA pin. The CLAD[3:0] bits inform
the PLL of the frequency applied to the pins. Selection of the output clock of the CLAD applied to the LIU and
optionally the transmitter is controlled by the FM bits (located in PORT.CR2). The CLAD allows maximum flexibility
to the user. The user may supply any of the three clock rates and use the CLAD to convert the rate to the particular
clock rate needed for his application.
Figure 10-6. CLAD Block
DS3 clock
CLKA
CLKB
CLAD
E3 clock
CC52 clock
CLKC
CLAD MODE
The clock rate adapter can also be disabled and all three clocks supplied externally using the CLKA, CLKB and
CLKC pins as clock inputs. When the CLAD is disabled, the three reference clocks DS3, E3 and STS-1 will need to
be applied to the CLKA, CLKB and CLKC pins, respectively. If any of the three frequencies is not required, it does
not need to be applied to the CLAD CLK pins.
63
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The CLAD MODE inputs to the clock rate adapter are composed of CLAD[3:0] control bits (located in the GL.CR2
Register) which determines which pins are input and output and which clock rate is on which pin. When
CLAD[3:0]=00XX, the PLL circuits are disabled and the signals on the input clock pins are used as the internal LIU
reference clocks. When CLAD[3:0]=(01XX or 10XX or 11XX), none, one or two PLL circuits are enabled to
generate the required clocks as determined by the CLAD[3:0] bits and the framing mode (FM[2:0]) and the line
mode (LM[2:0]) control bits. If a clock rate is not required on the CLAD output clock pins or for a reference clock for
any of the LIU, then the PLL used to generate that clock is disabled and powered down.
For example, in a design that only has the ports running at DS3 rates, then CLAD[3:0] can be set = 0100 and the
DS3 clock signal on the CLKA pin will be used as the DS3 LIU reference clock and no PLL circuit will be disabled.
Table 10-11. CLAD IO Pin Decode
GL.CR2.
CLAD[3:0]
00 XX
CLKA PIN
CLKB PIN
CLKC PIN
DS3 clock input
E3 clock input
STS-1 clock input
01 00
DS3 clock input
Low output
Low output
01 01
DS3 clock input
E3 clock output
Low output
01 10
DS3 clock input
Low output
STS-1 clock output
01 11
DS3 clock input
STS-1 clock output
E3 clock output
10 00
E3 clock input
Low output
Low output
10 01
E3 clock input
DS3 clock output
Low output
10 10
E3 clock input
Low output
STS-1 clock output
10 11
E3 clock input
STS-1 clock output
DS3 clock output
11 00
STS-1 clock input
Low output
Low output
11 01
STS-1 clock input
E3 output
Low output
11 10
STS-1 clock input
Low output
DS3 clock output
11 11
STS-1 clock input
DS3 clock output
E3 clock output
10.4.2 8 kHz Reference Generation
The global 8KREF signal is used to generate the one-second-reference signal by dividing it by 8000. This signal
can be derived from almost any clock source on the chip as well as the general-purpose IO pin GPIO4. The port
8KREF signal can be sourced from either the global 8KREF signal or from the transmit or receive port clock or from
the receive 8KREF signal. The minimum input frequency stability of the 8KREF input pin is +/- 500 ppm.
The global 8KREF signal can come from an external 8000 Hz reference connected to the GPIO4 general-purpose
IO pin by setting the GL.CR2.G8KIS bit. The global 8KREF signal can be output on the GPIO2 general-purpose IO
pin when the GL.CR2.G8KOS bit is set.
The global 8KREF signal can be derived from the CLAD PLL or pins or come from any of the port 8KREF signals
by clearing GL.CR2.G8KIS bit and selecting the source using the GL.CR2.G8KRS[2:0] bits.
The port 8KREF signal can be derived from the transmit clock input pin or from the receive LIU or input clock pin.
The PORT.CR3.P8KRS[1:0] bits are used to select which source.
The 8KREF 8.000 kHz signal is a simple divisor of 44736 kHz (DS3 divided by 5592) or 33368 kHz (E3 divided by
4296). The correct divisor for the port 8KREF source is selected by the mode the port is configured for. The CLAD
clock chosen for the clock source selects the correct divisor for the global 8KREF. The 8KREF signal is only as
accurate as the clock source chosen to generate it.
Table 10-12 lists the selectable sources for global 8 kHz reference sources.
64
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-12. Global 8 kHz Reference Source Table
GL.CR2.
G8KIS
0
0
Source
GL.CR2.
G8KRS[2:0]
000
001
0
010
0
011
0
0
0
0
1
100
101
110
111
XXX
None, the 8KHZ divider is disabled.
Derived from CLAD DS3 clock output or CLKA pin if CLAD
is disabled. (Note: CLAD is disabled after reset)
Derived from CLAD E3 clock output or CLKB pin if CLAD is
disabled
Derived from CLAD STS-1 clock output or CLKC pin if CLAD
is disabled
Port 1 8KREF source selected by P8KRS[1:0]
Port 2 8KREF source selected by P8KRS[1:0]
Port 3 8KREF source selected by P8KRS[1:0]
Port 4 8KREF source selected by P8KRS[1:0]
GPIO4 pin
Table 10-13 lists the selectable sources for port 8 kHz reference sources.
Table 10-13. Port 8 kHz Reference Source Table
PORT.CR3.P8KRS[1:0]
0X
10
11
Source
Undefined
Internal receive framer clock
Internal transmit framer clock
The 8 kHz reference logic tree is shown below.
Figure 10-7. 8KREF Logic
G8KRS[1:0]
FROM CLAD
DS3 CLK
E3 CLK
CC52 CLK
1
2
3
CLOCK DIVIDER
G8KRS[2]
0
1
G8KRS[1:0]
OTHER
PORT
8KREF
G8KREF
0
1
2
3
0
1
GLOBAL 8KREF
GPIO4
P8KRS
RX CLOCK
TX CLOCK
0
CLOCK DIVIDER
PORT 8KREF
1
FRAME MODE
65
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.4.3 One Second Reference Generation
The one-second-reference signal is used as an option to update the performance registers on a precise onesecond interval. The generated internal signal should be about 50% duty cycle and it is derived from the Global 8
kHz reference signal by dividing it by 8000. The low to high edge on this signal will set the GL.SRL.ONESL latched
one second detect bit which can generate an interrupt when the GL.SRIE.ONESIE interrupt enable bit is set. The
low to high edge can also be used to generate performance monitor updates when GL.CR1.GPM[1:0]=1X.
10.4.4 General-Purpose IO Pins
There are eight general-purpose IO pins that can be used for general IO, global signals and per port alarm signals.
Each pin is independently configurable to be a general-purpose input, general-purpose output, global signal or port
alarm. Two of the GPIO pins are assigned to each port and can be programmed to output one or two alarm
statuses using one or two GPIO pins. One of the two pins assigned to each port can be programmed as global
input or output signals. When the device is bonded out (or has ports powered down) to have 1, 2 or 3 ports active,
the GPIO pins associated with the disabled ports will still operate as either general-purpose inputs, generalpurpose outputs or global signals. When the ports are disabled and GL.GIOCR.GPIOx[1:0] = 01, the GPIO pin will
be an output driving low. The 8KREFI, TMEI, and PMU signals that can be sourced by the GPIO pin will be driven
low into the core logic when the GPIO pin is not selected for the source of the signal.
Table 10-14 lists the purpose and control thereof of the General-Purpose IO Pins.
Table 10-14. GPIO Global Signals
Pin
Global signal
Control bit
GPIO2
8KREFO output
GL.CR2.G8KOS
GPIO4
8KREFI input
GL.CR2.G8KIS
GPIO6
TMEI input
GL.CR1.MEIMS
GPIO8
PMU input
GL.CR1.GPM[1:0]
Table 10-15 describes the selection of mode for the GPIO Pins.
Table 10-15. GPIO Pin Global Mode Select Bits
n = port 1 to 4, x = A or B, valid when a GPIO pin is not selected for a global signal
GL.GIOCR.GPIOnSx
GPIO pin mode
00
Input
01
Port alarm status selected by port
GPIO
10
Output logic 0
11
Output logic 1
Table 10-16 lists the various port alarm monitors that can be output on the GPIO pins. The GPIO(A/B)[3:0] bits are
located in the PORT.CR4 Register.
66
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
DS3 IDLE
DS3/E3 RAI
DS3/E3 AIS
DS3/E3 LOF
DS3/E3 OOF
PORT.CR4
GPIO(A/B)[3:0]
LINE LOS
Table 10-16. GPIO Port Alarm Monitor Select
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10.4.5 Performance Monitor Counter Update Details
The performance monitor counters are designed to count at least one second of events before saturating to the
maximum count. There is a status bit associated with some of the performance monitor counters that is set when
the its counter is greater than zero, and a latched status bit that gets set when the counter changes from zero to
one. There is also a latched status bit that gets set on every event that causes the error counter to increment.
There is a read register for each performance monitor counter. The count value of the counter gets loaded into this
register and the counter is cleared when the update-clear operation is performed. If there is an event to be counted
at the exact moment (clock cycle) that the counter is to be cleared then the counter will be set to a value of one so
that that event will be counted.
The Performance Monitor Update signal affects the counter registers of the following blocks: the BERT, the DS3/E3
framer, the Line Encoder/Decoder.
The update-clear operation is controlled by the Performance Monitor Update signal (PMU). The update-clear
operation will update the error counter registers with the value of the error counter and also reset each counter.
The PMU signal can be created in hardware or software. The hardware sources can come from the one-second
counter or one of the general-purpose IO pins, which can be programmed to source this signal. The software
sources can come from one of the per-port control register bits or one of the global control register bits. When
using the software update method, the PMU control bit should be set to initiate the process and when the PMS
status bit gets set, the PMU control bit should be cleared making it ready for the next update. When using the
hardware update method, the PMS bit will be set shortly after the hardware signal goes high, and cleared shortly
after the hardware signal goes low. The latched PMS signal can be used to generate an interrupt for reading the
count registers. If the port is not configured for global PMU signals, the PMS signal from that port should be
blocked from affecting the global PMS status.
67
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-8. Performance Monitor Update Logic
PORT.CR1.PMUM
other port counters
PORT.CR1.PMU
GL.CR1.GPMU
GPIO8(GPMU) PIN
ONE SEC
0
PMU
00
01
1X
1
PMS
PERF
COUNTER
other ports
GL.SR.GPMS
PORT.SR.PMS
GTZ
GL.CR1.GPM
10.4.6 Transmit Manual Error Insertion
Transmit errors can be inserted in some of the functional blocks. These errors can be inserted using register bits in
the functional blocks, using the global GL.CR1.TMEI bit, using the port PORT.CR1.TMEI bit, or by using the GPIO6
pin configured for TMEI mode.
There is a transmit error insertion register in the functional blocks that allow error insertion. The MEIMS bit controls
whether the error is inserted using the bits in the error insertion register or using error insertion signals external to
that block. When bit MEIMS=0, errors are inserted using other bits in the transmit error insertion register. When bit
MEIMS=1, errors are inserted using a signal generated in the port or global control registers or using the external
GPIO6 pin configured for TMEI operation.
68
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-9. Transmit Error Insert Logic
BERT.TEICR.MEIMS
BERT.TEICR error
insertion bit
0
PORT.CR.MEIMS
PORT.CR.TMEI
1
0
BERT ERROR
INSERT
T3.TEIR.MEIMS
GL.CR1.MEIMS
1
GL.CR1.TMEI
0
GPIO6 PIN
(TMEI)
1
T3.TEIR error
insertion bit
0
1
T3 ERROR
INSERT
0
1
10.5 Per Port Resources
10.5.1 Loopbacks
There are several loop back paths available. The following table lists the loopback modes available for analog
loopback (ALB), line loopback (LLB), payload loopback (PLB) and diagnostic loopback (DLB). The LBM bits are
located in PORT.CR4.
Table 10-17. Loopback Mode Selections
LBM[2:0]
000
001
010
011
10X
110
111
ALB
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
LLB
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
PLB
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
DLB
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
69
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-10 highlights where each loopback mode is located and gives an overall view of the various loopback
paths available.
Figure 10-10. Loopback Modes
TAIS
TUA1
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
LLB
ALB
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
UA1
GEN
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
Clock Rate
Adapter
Microprocessor
Interface
10.5.1.1 Analog Loopback (ALB)
Analog loopback is enabled by setting PORT.CR4.LBM[2:0] = 001. Analog loopback mode will not be enabled
when the port is configured for loop-timed mode (set via the PORT.CR3.LOOPT bit).
The analog loopback is a loopback as close to the pins as possible. When both the TX and RX LIU are enabled, it
loops back TXPn and TXNn to RXPn and RXNn, respectively. If the transmit signals on TXPn and TXNn are not
terminated properly, this loopback path may have data errors or loss of signal. When the LIU is not enabled, it
loops back TLCLKn,TPOSn / TDATn,TNEGn to RLCLKn, RPOSn / RDATn , RNEGn.
Figure 10-11. ALB Mux
TXP
TXN
RXP
RXN
TX
LIU
RX
LIU
70
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.5.1.2 Line Loopback (LLB)
Line loopback is enabled by setting PORT.CR4.LBM[2:0] = X10. DLB and LLB are enabled at the same time when
LBM[2:0] = 110, and only LLB is enabled when LBM[2:0] = 010.
The clock from the receive LIU or the RLCLKn pin will be output to the transmit LIU or TCLKOn pin. The POS and
NEG data from the receive LIU or the RPOSn and RNEGn pin will be sampled with the receive clock to time it to
the LIU or pin interface.
When LLB is enabled, unframed all ones AIS can optionally be automatically enabled on the receive data path.
This AIS signal will be output on the RSERn pin in SCT modes. When DLB and LLB are enabled, the AIS signal
will not be transmitted.
Refer to Figure 10-10.
10.5.1.3 Payload Loopback (PLB)
Payload loopback is enabled by setting PORT.CR4.LBM[2:0] = 011.
The payload loopback copies the payload data from the receive framer to the transmit framer which then re-frames
the payload before transmission. Payload loopback is operational in all framing modes.
When PLB is enabled, unframed all ones AIS transmission can optionally be automatically enabled on the receive
data path. This AIS signal will be output on the RSER. In all PLB modes, the TSOFIn input pin is ignored.
The external transmit output pins TDENn and TSOFOn/TDENn can optionally be disabled by forcing a zero when
PLB is enabled.
Refer to Figure 10-10.
10.5.1.4 Diagnostic Loopback (DLB)
Diagnostic loopback is enabled by setting PORT.CR4.LBM[2:0] = 1XX. DLB and LLB are enabled at the same time
when LBM[2:0] = 110, only DLB is enabled when LBM[2:0] = 10X or 111.
The Diagnostic loopback sends the transmit data, before line encoding, back to the receive side.
Transmit AIS can still be enabled using PORT.CR1.LAIS[2:0] even when DLB is enabled.
Refer to Figure 10-10.
10.5.2 Loss Of Signal Propagation
The Loss Of Signal (LOS) is detected in the line decoder logic. In unipolar (UNI) line interface modes LOS is never
detected. The LOS signal from the line decoder is sent to the DS3/E3 framer and the top-level payload AIS logic
except when DLB is activated. When DLB is activated the LOS signal to the framer and AIS logic is never active.
The LOS status in the line decoder status register is valid in all frame and loop back modes, though it is always off
in the line interface is in the UNI mode.
10.5.3 AIS Logic
There is AIS logic in both the framers and at the top-level logic of the ports. The framer AIS is enabled by setting
the TAIS bit in the appropriate framer transmit control register (T3, E3-G.751, E3-G.832, or Clear Channel). The
top level AIS is enabled by setting the PORT.CR1.LAIS[2:0] bits (see Table 10-18). The AIS signal is an unframed
all ones pattern or a DS3 framed 101010… pattern depending on the FM[2:0] mode bits. The DS3 Framed Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS) is a DS3 signal with valid F-bits, M-bits, and P-bits (P1 and P2). The X-bits (X1 and X2) are
set to one, all C-bits (CXY) are set to zero, and the payload bits are set to a 1010 pattern starting with a one
immediately after each overhead bit. The DS3 framed AIS pattern is only available in DS3 modes. The unframed all
ones pattern is available in all framing modes including the DS3 modes. The transmit line interface can send both
unframed all ones AIS and DS3 framed AIS patterns from either the AIS generator in the framer or the AIS
generator at the top level.
The AIS signal generated in the framer can be initiated and terminated without introducing any errors in the signal.
When the unframed AIS signal is initiated or terminated, there will be no BPV or CV errors introduced, but there will
71
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
be framing errors if a framed mode is enabled. When the DS3 framed AIS signal is initiated or terminated, in
addition to no BPV or CV errors, there should be no framing or P-bit (parity) or CP-bit errors introduced.
The AIS signal generated at the top level will not generate BPV errors but may generate P-bit and CP-bit errors
when the signal is initiated and terminated. The framed DS3 AIS signal will not cause the far end receiver to resync when the signal is initiated, but it may cause a re-sync when terminated if the DS3 frame position in the
framer is changed while the DS3 AIS signal is being generated. A sequence of events can be executed which will
enable the initiation and termination of DS3 AIS or unframed all ones at the top level without any errors introduced.
The sequence will only work when the automatic AIS generation is not enabled. CV and P-bit errors can occur
when AIS is automatically generated and cannot be avoided. This sequence to generate an error free DS# AIS at
the top level is to have the DS3 AIS or unframed all ones signal initiate in the DS3 framer, and a few frames sent
before initiating or terminating the DS3 AIS or unframed all ones at the top level. After the top level AIS signal is
activated, the AIS signal in the framer can be terminated, DLB activated and diagnostic patterns generated. The
DS3 AIS signal generated at the top level will not change frame alignment after starting even if the DS3 frame
position in the framer is changed.
The transmit line AIS generator at the top level can generate AIS signals even when the framer is looped back
using DLB, but not when the line is looped back using LLB. The AIS signal generated in the framer will be looped
back to the receive side when DLB is activated.
The receive framer can detect both unframed all ones AIS and DS3 framed AIS patterns. When in DS3 framing
modes, both framed DS3 AIS and unframed all ones can be detected. In E3 framing modes E3 AIS, which is
unframed all ones, is detected.
The receive payload interface going to the RSERn pin or the BERT logic can have an unframed all ones AIS signal
replacing the receive signal, this is called Payload AIS. The all ones AIS signal is generated from either the DS3/E3
framer or the downstream top level unframed all ones AIS generator. The unframed all ones AIS signal generated
in the framer will be looped back to the transmit side when PLB is activated. The unframed all ones AIS signal
generated at the top level will be sent to the RSERn pin and other receive logic, but not to the transmit side while
PLB is activated. The top level AIS generator is used when a downstream AIS signal is desired while payload loop
back is activated and is enabled by default after rest and must be cleared during configuration. Note that the
downstream AIS circuit in the framer, when a DS3 mode is selected, enforces the OOF to be active for 2.5 ms
before activating when automatic AIS in the framer is enabled. The top level downstream AIS will be generated
with no delay when OOF is detected when automatic AIS at the top level is enabled.
There is no detection of any AIS signal on the transmit payload signal from the TSERn pin or anywhere on the
transmit data path.
The transmit AIS generator at the top level can also be activated with a software bit or automatically when DLB is
activated. The receive AIS generator in the framer can be activated with a software bit, and automatically when
AIS, LOS or OOF are detected. The receive payload AIS generator at the top level can be activated with a software
bit or automatically when LOS, DS3/E3 OOF, LLB or PLB is activated.
72
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-12 shows the AIS signal flow through the device.
Figure 10-12. AIS Signal Flow
FRAMER
0
TRANSMIT
LINE
1
optional
B3ZS/
HDB3
encoder
TRANSMIT
PAYLOAD
0
0
0
1
1
1
TAIS
TAIS
DS3/
UA1
AIS
LLB
LINE/TRIBUTARY
SIDE
PLB
DS3/
UA1
AIS
SYSTEM/
TRUNK SIDE
DS3/UA1
AIS
detector
TSOFO
1
optional
B3ZS/
HDB3
decoder
RECEIVE
LINE
0
0
0
1
DLB
UA1
AIS
1
DAIS
UA1
AIS
DAIS
Table 10-18 lists the LAIS decodes for various line AIS enable modes.
Table 10-18. Line AIS Enable Modes
LAIS[1:0]
PORT.CR1
Frame Mode
Description
AIS Code
00
DS3
00
E3
Automatic AIS when DLB is enabled
UA1
01
Any
Send UA1
UA1
10
DS3
Send AIS
DS3AIS
10
E3
Send AIS
UA1
11
Any
Disable
none
Automatic AIS when DLB is enabled
(PORT.CR4.LBM = 1XX)
73
DS3AIS
RECEIVE
PAYLOAD
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-19 lists the PAIS decodes for various payload AIS enable modes.
Table 10-19. Payload (Downstream) AIS Enable Modes
PAIS[2:0]
PORT.CR1
When AIS is sent
AIS Code
000
Always
UA1
001
When LLB (no DLB) active
UA1
010
When PLB active
UA1
011
When LLB(no DLB) or PLB active
UA1
100
When LOS (no DLB) active
UA1
101
When OOF active
UA1
110
When OOF, LOS. LLB (no DLB), or
PLB active
UA1
111
Never
none
10.5.4 Loop Timing Mode
Loop timing mode is enabled by setting the PORT.CR3.LOOPT bit. This mode replaces the clock from the TCLKIn
pin with the internal receive clock from either the RLCLKn pin if the RX LIU is disabled, or the recovered clock from
the RX LIU if it is enabled. The loop-timing mode can be activated in any framing or line interface mode.
10.5.5 HDLC Overhead Controller
The data signal to the receive HDLC controller will be forced to a one while still being clocked when the framer
(DS3, E3), to which the HDLC is connected, detects LOF or AIS. Forcing the data signal to all ones will cause an
HDLC packet abort if the data started to look like a packet instead of allowing a bad, and possibly very long, HDLC
packet.
10.5.6 Trail Trace
There is a single Trail Trace controller for use in line maintenance protocols. The E3-G.832 framer has access to
the trail trace controller.
10.5.7 BERT
There is a Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) circuit for each port for use in generating and detecting test signals in the
payload bits. The BERT can generate and detect PRBS patterns up to 2^32-1 bits as well as repeating patterns up
to 32 bits long. The generated BERT signal replaces the data on the TSERn pin in SCT modes when the BERT is
enabled by setting the PORT.CR1.BENA.
When the BERT is enabled The TDENn and RDENn pins will still be active but the data on the TSERn pin will be
discarded.
10.5.8 SCT port pins
The SCT port pins have multiple functions based on the framing mode the device is in as well as other pin mode
select bits.
10.5.8.1 Transmit SCT port pins
The transmit SCT pins are TSOFIn, TSERn, TSOFOn / TDENn, and TCLKOn / TGCLKn. They have different
functions based on the framing mode and other pin mode bits. Unused input pin functions should drive a logic zero
into the device circuits expecting a signal from that pin. The control bits that configure the pins’ modes are
PORT.CR2.FM[2:0], PORT.CR3.TPFPE, PORT.CR3.TSOFOS and PORT.CR3.TCLKS.
74
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-20 to Table 10-22 describe the function selected by the FM bits and other pin mode bits for the
multiplexed pins.
Table 10-20. TSOFIn Input Pin Functions
FM[2:0] PORT.CR2
Pin function
0XX (FSCT)
TSOFIn
1XX (FBM)
Not used
Table 10-21. TSOFOn/TDENn/Output Pin Functions
FM[2:0] PORT.CR2
TSOFOS
PORT.CR3
Pin function
0XX (FSCT)
0
TDENn
0XX (FSCT)
1
TSOFOn
1XX (FBM)
X
Low
Table 10-22. TCLKOn/TGCLKn Output Pin Functions
FM[2:0]
PORT.CR2
TCLKS
PORT.CR3
0XX (FSCT)
Pin function
Gap source
0
TGCLKn
TDENn
0XX (FSCT)
1
TCLKOn
none
1XX (FBM)
X
TCLKOn
none
10.5.8.2 Receive SCT port pins
The receive SCT pins are RSERn, RSOFOn / RDENn and RCLKOn / RGCLKn. They have different functions
based on the framing mode and other pin mode bits. Unused input pin functions should drive a logic zero into the
device circuits expecting a signal from that pin. The control bits that configure these pins are PORT.CR2.FM[2:0],
PORT.CR3.RPFPE, PORT.CR3.RSOFOS and PORT.CR3.RCLKS.
Table 10-23 to Table 10-24 describe the function selected by the FM bits and other pin mode bits for the
multiplexed pins.
Table 10-23. RSOFOn/RDENn Output Pin Functions
FM[2:0]
PORT.CR2
RSOFOS
PORT.CR3
0XX (FSCT)
0
RDENn
0XX (FSCT)
1
RSOFOn
1XX (CLR)
X
Low
1XX (CSCT)
X
High
Pin function
75
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-24. RCLKOn/RGCLKn Output Pin Functions
FM[2:0]
PORT.CR2
RCLKS
PORT.CR3
Pin function
Gap source
0XX (FSCT)
0
RGCLKn
RDENn
0XX (FSCT)
1
RCLKOn
none
1XX (FBM)
X
RCLKOn
none
10.5.9 Framing Modes
The framing modes are selected independently of the line interface modes using the PORT.CR2.FM[2:0] control
bits. Different blocks are used in different framing modes. The bit error test (BERT) function can be enabled in any
mode. The LIU, JA and line encoder/decoder blocks are selected by the line mode (LM[2:0]) code.
Table 10-25. Framing Mode Select Bits FM[2:0]
FM[2:0]
000
001
010
011
100
11X
Description
DS3 C-bit Framed
DS3 M13 Framed
E3 G.751 Framed
E3 G.832 Framed
DS3 Rate Clear Channel
E3 Rate Clear Channel
Line Code
B3ZS/AMI/UNI
B3ZS/AMI/UNI
HDB3/AMI/UNI
HDB3/AMI/UNI
B3ZS/AMI/UNI
HDB3/AMI/UNI
Figure
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-2
10.5.10 Line Interface Modes
The line interface modes can be selected semi-independently of the framing modes using the PORT.CR2.LM[2:0]
control bits. The major blocks controlled are the transmit LIU (TX LIU), receive LIU (RX LIU), jitter attenuator (JA)
and the line encoder/decoder. The line encoder/decoder is used for B3ZS, HDB3 and AMI line interface encoding
modes. The line encoder-decoder block is not used for line encoding or decoding in the UNI mode but the BPV
counter in it can be used to count external pulses on the RNEGn / RCLVn pin. The jitter attenuator (JA) can be off
(OFF) or put in either the transmit (TX) or receive (RX) path with the TX LIU or RX LIU. Both TX LIU and RX LIU
can be enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
The “Analog Loop Back” (ALB) is available when the LIU is enabled or disabled. It is an actual loop back of the
analog positive and negative pulses from the TX LIU to the RX LIU when the LIU is enabled. If the LIU is disabled,
it is a digital loop back of the TLCLK, TPOS, TNEG signals to the RLCLK, RPOS and RNEG signals.
When the line is configured for B3ZS/HDB3/AMI line codes, the line codes are determined by the framing mode
and the TZCDS and RZCDS bits control the AMI line mode selection bits in the line encoder/decoder blocks. The
DS3 modes select the B3ZS line coding, the E3 modes select the HDB3 line codes. Refer to Table 10-26 for
configuration.
76
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-26. Line Mode Select Bits LM[2:0]
LINE.TCR.TZSD &
LINE.RCR.RZSD
LM[2:0]
(PORT.CR2)
Line Code
LIU
JA
0
000
B3ZS/HDB3
OFF
OFF
0
001
B3ZS/HDB3
ON
OFF
0
010
B3ZS/HDB3
ON
TX
0
011
B3ZS/HDB3
ON
RX
1
000
AMI
OFF
OFF
1
001
AMI
ON
OFF
1
010
AMI
ON
TX
1
011
AMI
ON
RX
X
1XX
UNI
OFF
OFF
77
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.6 DS3/E3 Framer / Formatter
10.6.1 General Description
The Receive DS3/E3 Framer receives a unipolar DS3/E3 signal, determines frame alignment and extracts the
DS3/E3 overhead in the receive direction. The Transmit DS3/E3 Formatter receives a DS3/E3 payload, generates
framing, inserts DS3/E3 overhead, and outputs a unipolar DS3/E3 signal in the transmit direction.
The Receive DS3/E3 Framer receives a DS3/E3 signal from the Receive LIU or RDATn (or RPOSn and RNEGn),
determines the frame alignment, extracts the DS3/E3 overhead, and outputs the payload with frame and overhead
The Transmit DS3/E3 Formatter receives a DS3/E3 payload on TSERn, generates a DS3/E3 frame, optionally
inserts DS3/E3 overhead, and transmits the DS3/E3 signal.
Refer to Figure 10-13 for the location of the DS3/E3 Framer/Formatter blocks in the DS3174, 3, 2, 1 devices.
Figure 10-13. Framer Detailed Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
DLB
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
LLB
ALB
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Clock Rate
Adapter
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
UA1
GEN
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
Microprocessor
Interface
10.6.2 Features
10.6.2.1 Transmit Formatter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable DS3 or E3 formatter – Accepts a DS3 (M23 or C-bit) or E3 (G.751 or G.832) signal and
performs DS3/E3 overhead generation.
Arbitrary framing format support – Generates a signal with an arbitrary framing format. The line
overhead/stuff periods are added into the data stream using an overhead mask signal.
Generates alarms and errors – DS3 alarm conditions (AIS, RDI, and Idle) and errors (framing, parity, and
FEBE), or E3 alarm conditions (AIS and RDI/RAI) and errors (framing, parity, and REI) can be inserted into the
outgoing data stream.
Externally controlled serial DS3/E3 overhead insertion port – Can insert all DS3 or E3 overhead via a
serial interface. DS3/E3 overhead insertion is fully controlled via the serial overhead interface.
HDLC overhead insertion – An HDLC channel can be inserted into the DS3 or E3 data stream.
FEAC insertion – A FEAC channel can be inserted into the DS3 or E3 data stream.
Trail Trace insertion – Inputs and inserts the G.832 E3 TR byte.
78
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.6.2.2 Receive Framer
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable DS3 or E3 framer – Accepts a DS3 (M23 or C-bit) or E3 (G.751 or G.832) signal and performs
DS3/E3 overhead termination.
Arbitrary framing format support – Accepts a signal with an arbitrary framing format. The Line overhead/stuff
periods are removed from the data stream using an overhead mask signal.
Detects alarms and errors – Detects DS3 alarm conditions (SEF, OOMF, OOF, LOF, COFA, AIS, AIC, RDI,
and Idle) and errors (framing, parity, and FEBE), or E3 alarm conditions (OOF, LOF, COFA, AIS, and RDI/RAI)
and errors (framing, parity, and REI).
Serial DS3/E3 overhead extraction port – Extracts all DS3 or E3 overhead and outputs it on a serial
interface.
HDLC overhead extraction – An HDLC channel can be extracted from the DS3 or E3 data stream.
FEAC extraction – A FEAC channel can be extracted from the DS3 or E3 data stream.
Trail Trace extraction – Extracts and outputs the G.832 E3 TR byte.
10.6.3 Transmit Formatter
The Transmit Formatter receives a DS3 or E3 data stream and performs framing generation, error insertion,
overhead insertion, and AIS/Idle generation for C-bit DS3, M23 DS3, G.751 E3, or G.832 E3 framing protocols.
The bits in a byte are transmitted MSB first, LSB last. When they are input serially, they are input in the order they
are to be transmitted. The bits in a byte in an outgoing signal are numbered in the order they are transmitted, 1
(MSB) to 8 (LSB). However, when a byte is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the highest numbered bit (7),
and the LSB is stored in the lowest numbered bit (0). This is to differentiate between a byte in a register and the
corresponding byte in a signal.
10.6.4 Receive Framer
The Receive Framer receives the incoming DS3, or E3, line/tributary data stream, performs appropriate framing,
and terminates and extracts the associated overhead bytes.
The Receive Framer processes a C-bit format DS3, M23 format DS3, G.751 format E3, or G.832 format E3 data
stream, performing framing, performance monitoring, overhead extraction, and generates downstream AIS, if
necessary.
The bits in a byte are received MSB first, LSB last. When they are output serially, they are output MSB first, LSB
last. The bits in a byte in an incoming signal are numbered in the order they are received, 1 (MSB) to 8 (LSB).
However, when a byte is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the highest numbered bit (7), and the LSB is
stored in the lowest numbered bit (0). This is to differentiate between a byte in a register and the corresponding
byte in a signal.
Some bits, bit groups, or bytes (data) are integrated before being stored in a register. Integration requires the data
to have the same new data value for five consecutive occurrences before the new data value will be stored in the
data register. Unless stated otherwise, integrated data may have an associated unstable indication. Integrated data
is considered unstable if the received data value does not match the currently stored (integrated) data value or the
previously received data value for eight consecutive occurrences. The unstable condition is terminated when the
same value is received for five consecutive occurrences.
10.6.4.1.1 Receive DS3 Framing
DS3 framing determines the DS3 frame boundary. In order to identify the DS3 frame boundary, first the subframe
boundary must be found. The subframe boundary is found by identifying the subframe alignment bits FX1, FX2, FX3,
and FX4, which have a value of one, zero, zero, and one, respectively. See Figure 10-14. Once the subframe
boundary is found, the multiframe frame boundary can be found. The multiframe boundary is found by identifying
the multiframe alignment bits M1, M2, and M3, which have a value of zero, one, and zero respectively. The DS3
framer is an off-line framer that only updates the data path frame counters when either an out of frame (OOF) or an
out of multiframe (OOMF) condition is present. The use of an off-line framer reduces the average time required to
reframe, and reduces data loss caused by burst error. The DS3 framer has a Maximum Average Reframe Time
(MART) of approximately 1.0 ms.
79
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-14. DS3 Frame Format
X1
F11
C11
F12
C12
F13
C13
F14
X2
F21
C21
F22
C22
F23
C23
F24
P1
F31
C31
F32
C32
F33
C33
F34
P2
F41
C41
F42
C42
F43
C43
F44
M1
F51
C51
F52
C52
F53
C53
F54
M2
F61
C61
F62
C62
F63
C63
F64
M3
F71
C71
F72
C72
F73
C73
F74
7 SubFrames
680 Bits
The subframe framer continually searches four adjacent bit positions for a subframe boundary. A subframe
alignment bit (F-bit) checker checks each bit position. All four bit positions must fail before any other bit positions
are checked for a subframe boundary. There are 170 possible bit positions that must be checked, and four
positions are checked simultaneously. Therefore up to 43 checks may be needed to identify the subframe
boundary. The subframe framer enables the multiframe frame once it has identified a subframe boundary. Refer to
Figure 10-15 for the subframe framer state diagram.
Figure 10-15. DS3 Subframe Framer State Diagram
its
F-b
16
iled
s fa
o si
tio
on
siti
it p
po
3b
bit
ns
l4
Al
fai
led
or
ver
ifie
d
Sync
All 4 bit positions failed
Verify
Load
2 F-bits loaded
80
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The multiframe framer checks for a multiframe boundary. When the multiframe framer identifies a multiframe
boundary, it updates the data path frame counters if either an OOF or OOMF condition is present. The multiframe
framer waits until a subframe boundary has been identified. Then, each bit position is checked for the multiframe
boundary. The multiframe boundary is found by identifying the three multiframe alignment bits (M-bits). Since there
are seven multiframe bits and three bits are required to identify the multiframe boundary, up to 9 checks may be
needed to find the multiframe boundary. Once the multiframe boundary is identified, it is checked in each
subsequent frame. The data path frame counters are updated if the three multiframe alignment bits are error free,
and an OOF or OOMF condition exists. If the multiframe framer checks more than fifteen multiframe bit (X-bits, Pbits, and M-bits) positions without identifying the multiframe boundary, the multiframe framer times out, and forces
the subframe framer back into the load state. Refer to Figure 10-16 for the multiframe framer state diagram.
10.6.4.1.2 Receive DS3 Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring checks the DS3 frame for alarm conditions and errors. The alarm conditions detected are
OOMF, OOF, SEF, LOF, COFA, LOS, AIS, Idle, RUA1, and RDI. The errors accumulated are framing, P-bit parity,
C-bit parity (C-bit format only), and Far-End Block Error (FEBE) (C-bit format only) errors.
An Out Of MultiFrame (OOMF) condition is declared when a multiframe alignment bit (M-bit) error has been
detected in two or more of the last four consecutive DS3 frames, or when a manual resynchronization is requested.
An OOMF condition is terminated when no M-bit errors have been detected in the last four consecutive DS3
frames, or when the DS3 framer updates the data path frame counters. Figure 10-16 shows the multiframe framer
state diagram.
Figure 10-16. DS3 Multiframe Framer State Diagram
bit
Mor
err
eou
Mbit
tim
err
or
and
Mbi t
s id
ent
ifie
d
Sync
t
Timeout
Verify
Load
2 multiframe loaded
If multiframe alignment OOF is disabled, an Out Of Frame (OOF) condition is declared when three or more out of
the last sixteen consecutive subframe alignment bits (F-bits) have been errored, or a manual resynchronization is
requested. If multiframe alignment OOF is enabled, an OOF condition is declared when three or more out of the
last sixteen consecutive F-bits have been errored, when an OOMF condition is declared, or when a manual
resynchronization is requested. If multiframe alignment OOF is disabled, an OOF condition is terminated when
none of the last sixteen consecutive F-bits has been errored, or when the DS3 framer updates the data path frame
counters. If multiframe alignment OOF is enabled, an OOF condition is terminated when an OOMF condition is not
81
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
active and none of the last sixteen consecutive F-bits has been errored, or when the DS3 framer updates the data
path frame counters. Multiframe alignment OOF is programmable (on or off).
A Severely Errored Frame (SEF) condition is declared when three or more out of the last sixteen consecutive F-bits
have been errored, or when a manual resynchronization is requested. An SEF condition is terminated when an
OOF condition is absent.
A Loss Of Frame (LOF) condition is declared by the LOF integration counter when it has been active for a total of T
ms. The LOF integration counter is active (increments count) when an OOF condition is present, it is inactive (holds
count) when an OOF condition is absent, and it is reset when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous ms. T is
programmable (0, 1, 2, or 3). An LOF condition is terminated when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous
ms.
A Change Of Frame Alignment (COFA) is declared when the DS3 framer updates the data path frame counters
with a frame alignment that is different from the current data path DS3 frame alignment.
A Loss Of Signal (LOS) condition is declared when the B3ZS encoder is active, and it declares an LOS condition.
An LOS condition is terminated when the B3ZS encoder is inactive, or it terminates an LOS condition.
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is a DS3 signal with valid F-bits and M-bits. The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set to one,
the P-bits (P1 and P2) are set to zero, all C-bits (CXY) are set to zero, and the payload bits are set to a 1010 pattern
starting with a one immediately after each DS3 overhead bit. An AIS signal is present when a DS3 frame is
received with valid F-bits and M-bits, both X-bits set to one, both P-bits set to zero, all C-bits set to zero, and all but
seven or fewer payload data bits matching the DS3 overhead aligned 1010 pattern. An AIS signal is absent when a
DS3 frame is received that does not meet the aforementioned criteria for an AIS signal being present. The AIS
integration counter declares an AIS condition when it has been active for a total of 10 to 17 DS3 frames. The AIS
integration counter is active (increments count) when an AIS signal is present, it is inactive (holds count) when an
AIS signal is absent, and it is reset when an AIS signal is absent for 10 to 17 consecutive DS3 frames. An AIS
condition is terminated when an AIS signal is absent for 10 to 17 consecutive DS3 frames.
A Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) condition is declared if in each of 4 consecutive 2047 bit windows, five or less
zeros are detected and an OOF condition is continuously present . A RUA1 condition is terminated if in each of 4
consecutive 2047 bit windows, six or more zeros are detected or an OOF condition is continuously absent.
An Idle Signal (Idle) is a DS3 signal with valid F-bits, M-bits, and P-bits (P1 and P2). The X-bits (X1 and X2) are set
to one, C31, C32, and C33 are set to zero, and the payload bits are set to a 1100 pattern starting with 11 immediately
after each overhead bit. In C-bit mode, an Idle signal is present when a DS3 frame is received with valid F-bits, Mbits, and P-bits, both X-bits set to one, C31, C32, and C33 set to zero, and all but seven or fewer payload data bits
matching the T3 overhead aligned 1100 pattern. In M23 mode, an Idle signal is present when a T3 frame is
received with valid F-bits, M-bits, and P-bits, both X-bits set to one, and all but seven or fewer payload data bits
matching the overhead aligned 1100 pattern. An Idle signal is absent when a DS3 frame is received that does not
meet aforementioned criteria for an Idle signal being present. The Idle integration counter declares an Idle
condition when it has been active for a total of 10 to 17 DS3 frames. The Idle integration counter is active
(increments count) when an Idle signal is present, it is inactive (holds count) when an Idle signal is absent, and it is
reset when an Idle signal is absent for 10 to 17 consecutive DS3 frames. An Idle condition is terminated when an
Idle signal is absent for 10 to 17 consecutive DS3 frames.
A Remote Defect Indication (RDI) condition (also called a far-end SEF/AIS defect condition) is declared when four
consecutive DS3 frames are received with the X-bits (X1 and X2) set to zero. An RDI condition is terminated when
four consecutive DS3 frames are received with the X-bits set to one.
A DS3 Framing Format Mismatch (DS3FM) condition is declared when the DS3 format programmed (M13, C-bit)
does not match the incoming DS3 signal framing format. A DS3FM condition is terminated when the incoming DS3
signal framing format is the same format as programmed. Framing errors are determined by comparing F-bits and
M-bits to their expected values. The type of framing errors accumulated is programmable (OOFs, F & M, F, or M).
An OOF error increments the count whenever an OOF condition is first detected . An F & M error increments the
count once for each F-bit or M-bit that does not match its expected value (up to 31 per DS3 frame). An F error
increments the count once for each F-bit that does not match its expected value (up to 28 per DS3 frame). An M
error increments the count once for each M-bit that does not match its expected value (up to 3 per DS3 frame).
82
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
P-bit parity errors are determined by calculating the parity of the current DS3 frame (payload bits only), and
comparing the calculated parity to the P-bits (P1 and P2) in the next DS3 frame. If the calculated parity does not
match P1 or P2, a single P-bit parity error is declared.
C-bit parity errors (C-bit format only) are determined by calculating the parity of the current DS3 frame (payload bits
only), and comparing the calculated parity to the C-bits in subframe three (C31, C32, and C33) in the next DS3 frame.
If the calculated parity does not match C31, C32, or C33, a single C-bit parity error is declared.
FEBE errors (C-bit format only) are determined by the C-bits in subframe four (C41, C42, and C43). A value of 111
indicates no error and any other value indicates an error.
The receive alarm indication (RAI) bit will be set high in the transmitter when one or more of the indicated alarm
conditions is present, and low when all of the indicated alarm conditions are absent. Setting the receive alarm
indication on LOS, SEF, LOF, or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The Application Identification Channel (AIC) is stored in a register bit. It is determined from the C11 bit. The AIC is
set to one (C-bit format) if the C11 bit is set to one in thirty-one consecutive multiframes. The AIC is set to zero (M23
format) if the C11 bit is set to zero in four of the last thirty-one consecutive multiframes. Note: The stored AIC bit
must not change when an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition is present.
A FEBE is transmitted by default upon reception of a DS3 frame in which a C-bit parity error or a framing error is
detected and counted.
10.6.5 C-Bit DS3 Framer/Formatter
10.6.5.1 Transmit C-bit DS3 Frame Processor
The C-bit DS3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-14. Table 10-27 shows the function of each overhead bit in the
DS3 Frame.
Table 10-27. C-Bit DS3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions
Bit
Definition
X1, X2
Remote Defect Indication
(RDI)
P1, P2
Parity Bits
M1, M2, and M3
Multiframe Alignment Bits
FXY
Subframe Alignment Bits
C11
Application Identification
Channel (AIC)
C12
Reserved
C13
Far-End Alarm and Control
(FEAC) signal
C21, C22, and C23
Unused
C31, C32, and C33
C-bit parity bits
C41, C42, and C43
Far-End Block Error (FEBE)
bits
C51, C52, and C53
Path Maintenance Data Link
(or HDLC) bits
C61, C62, and C63
Unused
C71, C72, and C73
Unused
83
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
X1 and X2 are the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) bits (also referred to as the far-end SEF/AIS bits). P1 and P2 are
the parity bits used for line error monitoring. M1, M2, and M3 are the multiframe alignment bits. FXY are the subframe
alignment bits. C11 is the Application Identification Channel (AIC). C12 is reserved for future network use, and has a
value of one. C13 is the Far-End Alarm and Control (FEAC) signal. C21, C22, and C23 are unused, and have a value
of one. C31, C32, and C33 are the C-bit parity bits used for path error monitoring. C41, C42, and C43 are the Far-End
Block Error (FEBE) bits used for remote path error monitoring. C51, C52, and C53 are the path maintenance data link
(or HDLC) bits. C61, C62, and C63 are unused, and have a value of one. C71, C72, and C73 are unused, and have a
value of one. The X-bit, P-bit, M-bit, C-bit, and F-bit positions are overhead bits, and the other bit positions in the
T3 frame are payload bits regardless of how they are marked by TDEN.
10.6.5.2 Transmit C-Bit DS3 Frame Generation
C-bit DS3 frame generation receives the incoming payload data stream, and overwrites all of the overhead bit
locations.
The multiframe alignment bits (M1, M2, and M3) are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010)
respectively.
The subframe alignment bits (FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4) are overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001)
respectively.
The X-bits (X1 and X2) are both overwritten with the Remote Defect Indicator (RDI). The RDI source is
programmable (automatic, 1, or 0). If the RDI is generated automatically, the X-bits are set to zero when one or
more of the indicated alarm conditions is present, and set to one when all of the indicated alarm conditions are
absent. Automatically setting RDI on LOS, SEF, LOF, or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The P-bits (P1 and P2) are both overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous DS3 frame. The
payload parity is calculated by performing modulo 2 addition of all of the payload bits after all frame processing has
been completed. P-bit generation is programmable (on or off). The P-bits will be generated if either P-bit generation
is enabled or frame generation is enabled.
The bits C11, C12, C21, C22, C23, C61, C62, C63, C71, C72, and C73 are all overwritten with a one.
The bit C13 is overwritten with the Far-End Alarm and Control (FEAC) data input from the transmit FEAC controller.
The bits C31, C32, and C33 are all overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous DS3 frame.
The bits C41, C42, and C43 are all overwritten with the Far-End Block Error (FEBE) bit. The FEBE bit can be
generated automatically or inserted from a register bit. The FEBE bit source is programmable (automatic or
register). If the FEBE bit is generated automatically, it is zero when at least one C-bit parity error has been detected
during the previous frame.
The bits C51, C52, and C53 are overwritten with the path maintenance data link input from the HDLC controller.
Once all of the DS3 overhead bits have been overwritten, the data stream is passed on to error insertion. If frame
generation is disabled, the incoming DS3 signal is passed on to error insertion. Frame generation is programmable
(on or off). Note: P-bit generation may still be performed even if frame generation is disabled.
10.6.5.3 Transmit C-bit DS3 Error Insertion
Error insertion inserts various types of errors into the different DS3 overhead bits. The types of errors that can be
inserted are framing errors, P-bit parity errors, C-bit parity errors, and Far-End Block Error (FEBE) errors.
The framing error insertion mode is programmable (F-bit, M-bit, SEF, or OOMF). An F-bit error is a single subframe
alignment bit (FXY) error. An M-bit error is a single multiframe alignment bit (M1, M2, or M3) error. An SEF error is an
error in all the subframe alignment bits in a subframe (FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4). An OOMF error is a single multiframe
alignment bit (M1, M2, or M3) error in two consecutive DS3 frames.
A P-bit parity error is generated by is inverting the value of the P-bits (P1 and P2) in a single DS3 frame. P-bit parity
error(s) can be inserted one error at a time, or continuously. The P-bit parity error insertion mode (single or
continuous) is programmable.
A C-bit parity error is generated by is inverting the value of the C31, C32, and C33 bits in a single DS3 frame. C-bit
parity error(s) can be inserted one error at a time, or continuously. The C-bit parity error insertion mode (single or
continuous) is programmable.
84
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
A FEBE error is generated by forcing the C41, C42, and C43 bits in a single multiframe to zero. FEBE error(s) can be
inserted one error at a time, or continuously. The FEBE error insertion rate (single or continuous) is programmable.
Each error type (framing, P-bit parity, C-bit parity, or FEBE) has a separate enable. Continuous error insertion
mode inserts errors at every opportunity. Single error insertion mode inserts an error at the next opportunity when
requested. the framing multi-error modes (SEF or OOMF) insert the indicated number of error(s) at the next
opportunities when requested; i.e., a single request will cause multiple errors to be inserted. The requests can be
initiated by a register bit(TSEI) or by the manual error insertion input (TMEI). The error insertion initiation type
(register or input) is programmable. The insertion of each particular error type is individually enabled. Once all error
insertion has been performed, the data stream is passed on to overhead insertion.
10.6.5.4 Transmit C-Bit DS3 Overhead Insertion
Overhead insertion can insert any (or all) of the DS3 overhead bits into the DS3 frame. The DS3 overhead bits X1,
X2, P1, P2, MX, FXY, and CXY can be sourced from the transmit overhead interface (TOHCLK, TOH, TOHEN, and
TOHSOF). The P-bits (P1 and P2) and C31, C32, and C33 bits are received as an error mask (modulo 2 addition of
the input bit and the internally generated bit). The DS3 overhead insertion is fully controlled by the transmit
overhead interface. If the transmit overhead data enable signal (TOHEN) is driven high, then the bit on the transmit
overhead signal (TOH) is inserted into the output data stream. Insertion of bits using the TOH signal overwrites
internal overhead insertion.
10.6.5.5 Transmit C-Bit DS3 AIS/Idle Generation
C-bit DS3 AIS/Idle generation overwrites the data stream with AIS or an Idle signal. If transmit Idle is enabled, the
data stream payload is forced to a 1100 pattern with two ones immediately following each DS3 overhead bit. M1,
M2, and M3 bits are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010) respectively. FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4 bits are
overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001) respectively. X1 and X2 are overwritten with 11. And,
P1, P2, C31, C32, and C33 are overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous output DS3 frame.
If transmit AIS is enabled, the data stream payload is forced to a 1010 pattern with a one immediately following
each DS3 overhead bit. M1, M2, and M3 bits are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010) respectively.
FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4 bits are overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001) respectively. X1 and X2
are overwritten with 11. P1, P2, C31, C32, and C33 are overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous
output DS3 frame. And, CX1, CX2, and CX3 (X ≠ 3) are overwritten with 000. AIS will overwrite a transmit Idle signal.
10.6.5.5.1 Receive C-Bit DS3 Frame Format
The DS3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-14. X1 and X2 are the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) bits (also
referred to as the far-end SEF/AIS bits). P1 and P2 are the parity bits used for line error monitoring. M1, M2, and M3
are the multiframe alignment bits that define the multiframe boundary. FXY are the subframe alignment bits that
define the subframe boundary. Note: Both the M-bits and F-bits define the DS3 frame boundary. C11 is the
Application Identification Channel (AIC). C12 is reserved for future network use, and has a value of one. C13 is the
Far-End Alarm and Control (FEAC) signal. C21, C22, and C23 are unused, and have a value of one. C31, C32, and C33
are the C-bit parity bits used for path error monitoring. C41, C42, and C43 are the Far-End Block Error (FEBE) bits
used for remote path error monitoring. C51, C52, and C53 are the path maintenance data link (or HDLC) bits. C61,
C62, and C63 are unused, and have a value of one. C71, C72, and C73 are unused, and have a value of one.
10.6.5.5.2 Receive C-Bit DS3 Overhead Extraction
Overhead extraction extracts all of the DS3 overhead bits from the C-bit DS3 frame. All of the DS3 overhead bits
X1, X2, P1, P2, MX, FXY, and CXY are output on the receive overhead interface (ROH, ROHSOF, and ROHCLK). The
P1, P2, C31, C32, and C33 bits are output as an error indication (modulo 2 addition of the calculated parity and the
bit). The C13 bit is sent over to the receive FEAC controller. The C51, C52, and C53 bits are sent to the receive HDLC
overhead controller.
85
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.6.6 M23 DS3 Framer/Formatter
10.6.6.1 Transmit M23 DS3 Frame Processor
The M23 DS3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-14. Table 10-28 defines the framing bits for M23 DS3. X1 and X2
are the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) bits (also referred to as the far-end SEF/AIS bits). P1 and P2 are the parity
bits used for line error monitoring. M1, M2, and M3 are the multiframe alignment bits. FXY are the subframe
alignment bits. C11 is the Application Identification Channel (AIC). CX1, CX2, and CX3 are the stuff control bits for
tributary #X. The X-bit, P-bit, M-bit, C-bit, and F-bit positions are overhead bits, and the remainder of the bit
positions in the T3 frame are payload bits regardless of how they are marked by TDEN.
Table 10-28. M23 DS3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions
Bit
Definition
X1, X2
Remote Defect Indication
(RDI)
P1, P2
Parity Bits
M1, M2, and M3
Multiframe Alignment Bits
FXY
Subframe Alignment Bits
C11
Application Identification
Channel (AIC)
CX1, CX2, and CX3
Stuff Control Bits for Tributary
#X
10.6.6.2 Transmit M23 DS3 Frame Generation
M23 DS3 frame generation receives the incoming payload data stream, and overwrites all of the DS3 overhead bit
locations.
The multiframe alignment bits (M1, M2, and M3) are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010)
respectively.
The subframe alignment bits (FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4) are overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001)
respectively.
The X-bits (X1 and X2) are both overwritten with the Remote Defect Indicator (RDI). The RDI source is
programmable (automatic, 1, or 0). If the RDI is generated automatically, the X-bits are set to zero when one or
more of the indicated alarm conditions is present, and set to one when all of the indicated alarm conditions are
absent. Automatically setting RDI on LOS, SEF, LOF, or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The P-bits (P1 and P2) are both overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous DS3 frame. The
payload parity is calculated by performing modulo 2 addition of all of the payload bits after all frame processing has
been completed. P-bit generation is programmable (on or off). The P-bits will be generated if either P-bit generation
is enabled or frame generation is enabled.
If C-bit generation is enabled, the bit C11 is overwritten with an alternating one zero pattern, and all of the other Cbits (CXY) are overwritten with zeros. If C-bit generation is disabled, then all of the C-bit timeslots (CXY) will be
treated as payload data, and passed through. C-bit generation is programmable (on or off). Note: Overhead
insertion may still overwrite the C-bit time slots even if C-bit generation is disabled.
Once all of the DS3 overhead bits have been overwritten, the data stream is passed on to error insertion. If frame
generation is disabled, the incoming DS3 signal is passed on directly to error insertion. Frame generation is
programmable (on or off). Note: P-bit generation may still be performed even if frame generation is disabled.
86
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.6.6.3 Transmit M23 DS3 Error Insertion
Error insertion inserts various types of errors into the different DS3 overhead bits. The types of errors that can be
inserted are framing errors and P-bit parity errors.
The framing error insertion mode is programmable (F-bit, M-bit, SEF, or OOMF). An F-bit error is a single subframe
alignment bit (FXY) error. An M-bit error is a single multiframe alignment bit (M1, M2, or M3) error. An SEF error is an
error in all the subframe alignment bits in a subframe (FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4). An OOMF error is a single multiframe
alignment bit (M1, M2, or M3) error in each of two consecutive DS3 frames.
A P-bit parity error is generated by is inverting the value of the P-bits (P1 and P2) in a single DS3 frame. P-bit parity
error(s) can be inserted one error at a time, or continuously. The P-bit parity error insertion mode (single or
continuous) is programmable.
Each error type (framing or P-bit parity) has a separate enable. Continuous error insertion mode inserts errors at
every opportunity. Single error insertion mode inserts an error at the next opportunity when requested. The framing
multi-error insertion modes (SEF or OOMF) insert the indicated number of error(s) at the next opportunities when
requested; i.e., a single request will cause multiple errors to be inserts. The requests can be initiated by a register
bit(TSEI) or by the manual error insertion input (TMEI). The error insertion request source (register or input) is
programmable. The insertion of each particular error type is individually enabled. Once all error insertion has been
performed, the data stream is passed on to overhead insertion.
10.6.6.4 Transmit M23 DS3 Overhead Insertion
Overhead insertion can insert any (or all) of the DS3 overhead bits into the DS3 frame. The DS3 overhead bits X1,
X2, P1, P2, MX, FXY, and CXY can be sourced from the transmit overhead interface (TOHCLK, TOH, TOHEN, and
TOHSOF). The P-bits (P1 and P2) are received as an error mask (modulo 2 addition of the input bit and the
internally generated bit). The DS3 overhead insertion is fully controlled by the transmit overhead interface. If the
transmit overhead data enable signal (TOHEN) is driven high, then the bit on the transmit overhead signal (TOH) is
inserted into the output data stream. Insertion of bits using the TOH signal overwrites internal overhead insertion.
10.6.6.5 Transmit M23 DS3 AIS/Idle Generation
M23 DS3 AIS/Idle generation overwrites the data stream with AIS or an Idle signal. If transmit Idle is enabled, the
data stream payload is forced to a 1100 pattern with two ones immediately following each DS3 overhead bit. M1,
M2, and M3 bits are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010) respectively. FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4 bits are
overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001) respectively. X1 and X2 are overwritten with 11. P1 and
P2 are overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous output DS3 frame. And, C31, C32, and C33
are overwritten with 000.
If transmit AIS is enabled, the data stream payload is forced to a 1010 pattern with a one immediately following
each DS3 overhead bit. M1, M2, and M3 bits are overwritten with the values zero, one, and zero (010) respectively.
FX1, FX2, FX3, and FX4 bits are overwritten with the values one, zero, zero, and one (1001) respectively. X1 and X2
are overwritten with 11. P1 and P2 are overwritten with the calculated payload parity from the previous DS3 frame.
And, CX1, CX2, and CX3 are overwritten with 000. AIS will overwrite a transmit Idle signal.
10.6.6.5.1 Receive M23 DS3 Frame Format
The DS3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-14. The X1 and X2 are the Remote Defect Indication (RDI) bits (also
referred to as the far-end SEF/AIS bits). P1 and P2 are the parity bits used for line error monitoring. M1, M2, and M3
are the multiframe alignment bits that define the multiframe boundary. FXY are the subframe alignment bits that
define the subframe boundary. Note: Both the M-bits and F-bits define the DS3 frame boundary. C11 is the
Application Identification Channel (AIC). CX1, CX2, and CX3 are the stuff control bits for tributary #X.
10.6.6.5.2 Receive M23 DS3 Overhead Extraction
Overhead extraction extracts all of the DS3 overhead bits from the M23 DS3 frame. All of the DS3 overhead bits
X1, X2, P1, P2, MX, FXY, and CXY are output on the receive overhead interface (ROH, ROHSOF, and ROHCLK). The
P1 and P2 bits are output as an error indication (modulo 2 addition of the calculated parity and the bit).
87
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.6.6.5.3 Receive DS3 Downstream AIS Generation
Downstream DS3 AIS (all ‘1’s) can be automatically generated on an OOF, LOS, or AIS condition or manually
inserted. If automatic downstream AIS is enabled, downstream AIS is inserted when an LOS or AIS condition is
declared, or no earlier than 2.25 ms and no later than 2.75 ms after an OOF condition is declared. Automatic
downstream AIS is programmable (on or off). If manual downstream AIS insertion is enabled, downstream AIS is
inserted. Manual downstream AIS insertion is programmable (on or off). Downstream AIS is removed when all
OOF, LOS, and AIS conditions are terminated and manual downstream AIS insertion is disabled.
10.6.7 G.751 E3 Framer/Formatter
10.6.7.1 Transmit G.751 E3 Frame Processor
The G.751 E3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-17. FAS is the Frame Alignment Signal. A is the Alarm indication
bit used to indicate the presence of an alarm to the remote terminal equipment. N is the National use bit reserved
for national use.
Figure 10-17. G.751 E3 Frame Format
FAS
A N
4 Rows
1524 Bit Payload
384 bits
10.6.7.2 Transmit G.751 E3 Frame Generation
G.751 E3 frame generation receives the incoming payload data stream, and overwrites all of the E3 overhead bit
locations.
The first ten bits of the frame are overwritten with the frame alignment signal (FAS), which has a value of
1111010000b.
The eleventh bit of the frame is overwritten with the alarm indication (A) bit. The A bit can be generated
automatically, sourced from the transmit FEAC controller, set to one, or set to zero. The A bit source is
programmable (automatic, FEAC, 1, or 0). If the A bit is generated automatically, it is set to one when one or more
of the indicated alarm conditions is present, and set to zero when all of the indicated alarm conditions are absent.
Automatically setting RDI on LOS, LOF, or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The twelfth bit of the frame is overwritten with the national use (N) bit. The N bit can be sourced from the transmit
FEAC controller, sourced from the transmit HDLC overhead controller, set to one, or set to zero. The N bit source
is programmable (FEAC, HDLC, 1, or 0). Note: The FEAC controller will source one bit per frame regardless of
whether the A bit only, the N bit only, or both are programmed to be sourced from the FEAC controller.
Once all of the E3 overhead bits have been overwritten, the data stream is passed on to error insertion. If frame
generation is disabled, the incoming E3 signal is passed on directly to error insertion. Frame generation is
programmable (on or off).
10.6.7.3 Transmit G.751 E3 Error Insertion
Error insertion inserts framing errors into the frame alignment signal (FAS). The type of error(s) inserted into the
FAS is programmable (errored FAS bit or errored FAS). An errored FAS bit is a single bit error in the FAS. An
errored FAS is an error in all ten bits of the FAS (a value of 0000101111b is inserted in the FAS). Framing error(s)
can be inserted one error at a time, or in four consecutive frames. The framing error insertion number (single or
four) is programmable.
88
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Single error insertion mode inserts an error at the next opportunity when requested. The multi-error insertion mode
inserts the indicated number of errors at the next opportunities when requested, i.e., a single request will cause
multiple errors to be inserted. The requests can be initiated by a register bit(TSEI) or by the manual error insertion
input (TMEI). The error insertion initiation type (register or input) is programmable. The insertion of each particular
error type is individually enabled.
Once all error insertion has been performed, the data stream is passed on to overhead insertion.
10.6.7.4 Transmit G.751 E3 Overhead Insertion
Overhead insertion can insert any (or all) of the E3 overhead bits into the E3 frame. The FAS, A bit, and N bit can
be sourced from the transmit overhead interface (TOHCLK, TOH, TOHEN, and TOHSOF). The E3 overhead
insertion is fully controlled by the transmit overhead interface. If the transmit overhead data enable signal (TOHEN)
is driven high, then the bit on the transmit overhead signal (TOH) is inserted into the output data stream. Insertion
of bits using the TOH signal overwrites internal overhead insertion.
10.6.7.5 Transmit G.751 E3 AIS Generation
G.751 E3 AIS generation overwrites the data stream with AIS. If transmit AIS is enabled, the data stream (payload
and E3 overhead) is forced to all ones.
10.6.7.6 Receive G.751 E3 Frame Processor
The G.751 E3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-17. FAS is the Frame Alignment Signal. A is the Alarm indication
bit used to indicate the presence of an alarm to the remote terminal equipment. N is the National use bit reserved
for national use.
10.6.7.6.1 Receive G.751 E3 Framing
G.751 E3 framing determines the G.751 E3 frame boundary. The frame boundary is found by identifying the frame
alignment signal (FAS), which has a value of 1111010000b. The framer is an off-line framer that updates the data
path frame counters when an out of frame (OOF) condition has been detected. The use of an off-line framer
reduces the average time required to reframe, and reduces data loss caused by burst error. The G.751 E3 framer
checks each bit position for the FAS. The frame boundary is set once the FAS is identified. Since, the FAS check is
performed one bit at a time, up to 1536 checks may be needed to find the frame boundary. The data path frame
counters are updated if an error free FAS is received for two additional frames, and an OOF condition is present, or
if a manual frame resynchronization has been initiated.
10.6.7.6.2 Receive G.751 E3 Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring checks the E3 frame for alarm conditions. The alarm conditions detected are OOF, LOF,
COFA, LOS, AIS, RUA1, and RAI. An Out Of Frame (OOF) condition is declared when four consecutive frame
alignment signals (FAS) contain one or more errors or at the next FAS check when a manual reframe is requested.
An OOF condition is terminated when three consecutive FASs are error free or the G.751 E3 framer updates the
data path frame counters.
A Loss Of Frame (LOF) condition is declared by the LOF integration counter when it has been active for a total of T
ms. The LOF integration counter is active (increments count) when an OOF condition is present, it is inactive (holds
count) when an OOF condition is absent, and it is reset when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous ms. T is
programmable (0, 1, 2, or 3). An LOF condition is terminated when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous
ms.
A Change Of Frame Alignment (COFA) is declared when the G.751 E3 framer updates the data path frame
counters with a frame alignment that is different from the current data path frame alignment.
A Loss Of Signal (LOS) condition is declared when the HDB3 encoder is active, and it declares an LOS condition.
An LOS condition is terminated when the HDB3 encoder is inactive, or it terminates an LOS condition.
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) condition is declared when 4 or less zeros are detected in each of two consecutive
frame periods. An AIS condition is terminated when 5 or more zeros are detected in each of two consecutive frame
periods.
89
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
A Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) condition is declared if in each of 4 consecutive 2047 bit windows, five or less
zeros are detected and an OOF condition is continuously present. A RUA1 condition is terminated if in each of 4
consecutive 2047 bit windows, six or more zeros are detected or an OOF condition is continuously absent.
A Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) condition is declared when four consecutive frames are received with the A bit
(first bit after the FAS) set to one. An RAI condition is terminated when four consecutive frames are received with
the A bit set to zero.
Only framing errors are accumulated. Framing errors are determined by comparing the FAS to its expected value.
The type of framing errors accumulated is programmable (OOFs, bit, or word). An OOF error increments the count
whenever an OOF condition is first detected. A bit error increments the count once for each bit in the FAS that does
not match its expected value (up to 10 per frame. A word error increments the count once for each FAS that does
not match its expected value (up to 1 per frame).
The receive alarm indication (RAI) signal is high when one or more of the indicated alarm conditions is present, and
low when all of the indicated alarm conditions are absent. Setting the receive alarm indication on LOS, OOF, LOF,
or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
10.6.7.6.3 Receive G.751 E3 Overhead Extraction
Overhead extraction extracts all of the E3 overhead bits from the G.751 E3 frame. The FAS, A bit, and N bit are
output on the receive overhead interface (ROH, ROHSOF, and ROHCLK). In addition, the A bit is integrated and
stored in a register along with a change indication, and can be output over the receive FEAC controller. The N bit is
integrated and stored in a register along with a change indication, is sent to the receive HDLC overhead controller,
and can also be sent to the receive FEAC controller. The bit sent to the receive FEAC controller is programmable
(A or N).
10.6.7.6.4 Receive G.751 Downstream AIS Generation
Downstream G.751 E3 AIS can be automatically generated on an OOF, LOS, or AIS condition or manually
inserted. If automatic downstream AIS is enabled, downstream AIS is inserted when an LOS, OOF, or AIS
condition is declared. Automatic downstream AIS is programmable (on or off). If manual downstream AIS insertion
is enabled, downstream AIS is inserted. Manual downstream AIS insertion is programmable (on or off).
Downstream AIS is removed when all OOF, LOS, and AIS conditions are terminated and manual downstream AIS
insertion is disabled. RPDT will be forced to all ones during downstream AIS.
10.6.8 G.832 E3 Framer/Formatter
10.6.8.1 Transmit G.832 E3 Frame Processor
The G.832 E3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-18.
90
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-18. G.832 E3 Frame Format
FA1 FA2
EM
TR
MA
NR
530 Byte Payload
GC
59 Columns
Figure 10-19. MA Byte Format
MSB
1
RDI
LSB
8
REI
SL
SL
SL
MI
MI
TM
RDI - Remote Defect Indicator
REI - Remote Error Indicator
SL - Signal Label
MI - Multi-frame Indicator
TM - Timing Marker
Table 10-29 shows the function of each overhead bit in the DS3 frame.
Table 10-29. G.832 E3 Frame Overhead Bit Definitions
Byte
Definition
FA1, FA2
Frame Alignment bytes
EM
Error Monitoring byte
TR
Trail Trace byte
MA
Maintenance and Adaption
byte
NR
Network Operator byte
GC
General-Purpose
Communication Channel byte
91
9 Rows
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
FA1 and FA2 are the Frame Alignment bytes. EM is the Error Monitoring byte used for path error monitoring. TR is
the Trail Trace byte used for end-to-end connectivity verification. MA is the Maintenance and Adaptation byte used
for far-end path status and performance monitoring.
NR is the Network Operator byte allocated for network operator maintenance purposes. GC is the General-Purpose
Communications Channel byte allocated for user communications purposes.
10.6.8.2 Transmit G.832 E3 Frame Generation
G.832 E3 frame generation receives the incoming payload data stream, and overwrites all of the E3 overhead byte
locations.
The first two bytes of the first row in the frame are overwritten with the frame alignment bytes FA1 and FA2, which
have a value of F6h and 28h respectively.
The first byte in the second row of the frame is overwritten with the EM byte which is a BIP-8 calculated over all of
the bytes of the previous frame after all frame processing (frame generation, error insertion, overhead insertion,
and AIS generation) has been performed. The first byte in the third row of the frame is overwritten with the TR byte
which is input from the transmit trail trace controller.
The first byte in the fourth row of the frame is overwritten with the MA byte (see Figure 10-19), which consists of the
RDI bit, REI bit, payload type, multiframe indicator, and timing source indicator.
The RDI bit can be generated automatically, set to one, or set to zero. The RDI source is programmable
(automatic, 1, or 0). If the RDI is generated automatically, it is set to one when one or more of the indicated alarm
conditions is present, and set to zero when all of the indicated alarm conditions are absent. Automatically setting
RDI on LOS, LOF, or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The REI bit can be generated automatically or inserted from a register bit. The REI source is programmable
(automatic or register). If REI is generated automatically, it is one when at least one parity error has been detected
during the previous frame.
The payload type is sourced from a register. The three register bits are inserted in the third, fourth, and fifth bits of
the MA byte in each frame.
The multiframe indicator and timing marker bits can be directly inserted from a 3-bit register or generated from a 4bit register. The multiframe indicator and timing marker insertion type is programmable (direct or generated). When
the multiframe indicator and timing marker bits are directly inserted, the three register bits are inserted in the last
three bits of the MA byte in each frame. When the multiframe indicator and timing marker bits are generated, the
four timing source indicator bits are transferred in a four-frame multiframe, MSB first. The multiframe indicator bits
(sixth and seventh bits of the MA byte) identify the phase of the multiframe (00, 01, 10, or 11), and the timing
marker bit (eighth bit of the MA byte) contains the corresponding timing source indicator bit (TMABR register bits
TTI3, TTI2, TTI1, or TTI0 respectively). Note: The initial phase of the multiframe is arbitrarily chosen.
The first byte in the fifth row of the frame is overwritten with the NR byte which can be sourced from a register, from
the transmit FEAC controller, or from the transmit HDLC controller. The NR byte source is programmable (register,
FEAC, or HDLC). Note: The HDLC controller will source eight bits per frame period regardless of whether the NR
byte only, GC byte only, or both are programmed to be sourced from the HDLC controller.
The first byte in the sixth row of the frame is overwritten with the GC byte which can be sourced from a register or
from the transmit HDLC controller. The GC byte source is programmable (register or HDLC).
Once all of the E3 overhead bytes have been overwritten, the data stream is passed on to error insertion. If frame
generation is disabled, the incoming E3 signal is passed on directly to error insertion. Frame generation is
programmable (on or off).
10.6.8.3 Transmit G.832 E3 Error Insertion
Error insertion inserts various types of errors into the different E3 overhead bytes. The types of errors that can be
inserted are framing errors, BIP-8 parity errors, and Remote Error Indication (REI) errors.
The type of framing error(s) inserted is programmable (errored frame alignment bit or errored frame alignment
word). A frame alignment bit error is a single bit error in the frame alignment word (FA1 or FA2). A frame alignment
word error is an error in all sixteen bits of the frame alignment word (the values 09h and D7h are inserted in the
92
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
FA1 and FA2 bytes respectively). Framing error(s) can be inserted one error at a time, or four consecutive frames.
The framing error insertion mode (single or four) is programmable.
The type of BIP-8 error(s) inserted is programmable (errored BIP-8 bit, or errored BIP-8 byte). An errored BIP-8 bit
is inverting a single bit error in the EM byte. An errored BIP-8 byte is inverting all eight bits in the EM byte. BIP-8
error(s) can be inserted one error at a time, or continuously. The BIP-8 error insertion mode (single or continuous)
is programmable.
An REI error is generated by forcing the second bit of the MA byte to a one. REI error(s) can be inserted one error
at a time, or continuously. The REI error insertion mode (single or continuous) is programmable.
Each error type (framing, BIP-8, or REI) has a separate enable. Continuous error insertion mode inserts errors at
every opportunity. Single error insertion mode inserts an error at the next opportunity when requested. The framing
multi-error insertion mode inserts the indicated number of errors at the next opportunities when requested. i.e., a
single request will cause multiple errors to be inserted. The requests can be initiated by a register bit(TSEI) or by
the manual error insertion input (TMEI). The error insertion request source (register or input) is programmable. The
insertion of each particular error type is individually enabled. Once all error insertion has been performed, the data
stream is passed on to overhead insertion.
10.6.8.4 Transmit G.832 E3 Overhead Insertion
Overhead insertion can insert any (or all) of the E3 overhead bytes into the E3 frame. The E3 overhead bytes FA1,
FA2, EM, TR, MA, NR, and GC can be sourced from the transmit overhead interface (TOHCLK, TOH, TOHEN, and
TOHSOF). The EM byte is sourced as an error mask (modulo 2 addition of the input EM byte and the generated
EM byte). The E3 overhead insertion is fully controlled by the transmit overhead interface. If the transmit overhead
data enable signal (TOHEN) is driven high, then the bit on the transmit overhead signal (TOH) is inserted into the
output data stream. Insertion of bits using the TOH signal overwrites internal overhead insertion.
10.6.8.5 Transmit G.832 E3 AIS Generation
G.832 E3 AIS generation overwrites the data stream with AIS. If transmit AIS is enabled, the data stream (payload
and E3 overhead) is forced to all ones.
10.6.8.6 Receive G.832 E3 Frame Processor
The G.832 E3 frame format is shown in Figure 10-18. FA1 and FA2 are the Frame Alignment bytes. EM is the Error
Monitoring byte used for path error monitoring. TR is the Trail Trace byte used for end-to-end connectivity
verification. MA is the Maintenance and Adaptation byte used for far-end path status and performance monitoring
(See Figure 10-19). NR is the Network Operator byte allocated for network operator maintenance purposes. GC is
the General-Purpose Communications Channel byte allocated for user communications purposes.
10.6.8.7 Receive G.832 E3 Framing
G.832 E3 framing determines the G.832 E3 frame boundary. The frame boundary is found by identifying the frame
alignment bytes FA1 and FA2, which have a value of F6h and 28h respectively. The framer is an off-line framer
that updates the data path frame counters when an out of frame (OOF) condition has been detected. The use of an
off-line framer reduces the average time required to reframe, and reduces data loss caused by burst error. The
G.832 E3 framer checks each bit position for the frame alignment word (FA1 and FA2). The frame boundary is set
once the frame alignment word is identified. Since, the frame alignment word check is performed one bit at a time,
up to 4296 checks may be needed to find the frame boundary. The data path frame counters are updated if an
error free frame alignment word is received for two additional frames, and an OOF condition is present.
10.6.8.8 Receive G.832 E3 Performance Monitoring
Performance monitoring checks the E3 frame for alarm conditions and errors. The alarm conditions detected are
OOF, LOF, COFA, LOS, AIS, RUA1, and RDI. The errors accumulated are framing, parity, and Remote Error
Indication (REI) errors. An Out Of Frame (OOF) condition is declared when four consecutive frame alignment
words (FA1 and FA2) contain one or more errors, when 986 or more frames out of 1,000 frames has a BIP-8 block
error, or at the next framing word check when a manual reframe is requested. An OOF condition is terminated
when three consecutive frame alignment words (FA1 and FA2) are error free or the G.832 E3 framer updates the
data path frame counters.
93
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
A Loss Of Frame (LOF) condition is declared by the LOF integration counter when it has been active for a total of T
ms. The LOF integration counter is active (increments count) when an OOF condition is present, it is inactive (holds
count) when an OOF condition is absent, and it is reset when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous ms. T is
programmable (0, 1, 2, or 3). An LOF condition is terminated when an OOF condition is absent for T continuous
ms.
A Change Of Frame Alignment (COFA) is declared when the G.832 E3 framer updates the data path frame
counters with a frame alignment that is different from the current data path frame alignment.
A Loss Of Signal (LOS) condition is declared when the HDB3 encoder is active, and it declares an LOS condition.
An LOS condition is terminated when the HDB3 encoder is inactive, or it terminates an LOS condition.
An Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) condition is declared when 7 or less zeros are detected in each of two consecutive
frame periods that do not contain a frame alignment word. An AIS condition is terminated when 8 or more zeros are
detected in each of two consecutive frame periods.
A Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) condition is declared if in each of 4 consecutive 2047 bit windows, five or less
zeros are detected and an OOF condition is continuously present. A RUA1 condition is terminated if in each of 4
consecutive 2047 bit windows, six or more zeros are detected or an OOF condition is continuously absent.
A Remote Defect Indication (RDI) condition is declared when four consecutive frames are received with the RDI bit
(first bit of MA byte) set to one. An RDI condition is terminated when four consecutive frames are received with the
RDI bit set to zero.
Three types of errors are accumulated, framing, parity, and Remote Error Indication (REI) errors. Framing errors
are determined by comparing FA1 and FA2 to their expected values. The type of framing errors accumulated is
programmable (OOFs, bit, byte, or word). An OOF error increments the count whenever an OOF condition is first
detected. A bit error increments the count once for each bit in FA1 and each bit in FA2 that does not match its
expected value (up to 16 per frame). A byte error increments the count once for each FA byte (FA1 or FA2) that
does not match its expected value (up to 2 per frame). A word error increments the count once for each FA word
(both FA1 and FA2) that does not match its expected value (up to 1 per frame).
Parity errors are determined by calculating the BIP-8 (8-Bit Interleaved Parity) of the current E3 frame (overhead
and payload bytes), and comparing the calculated BIP-8 to the EM byte in the next frame. The type of parity errors
accumulated is programmable (bit or block). A bit error increments the count once for each bit in the EM byte that
does not match the corresponding bit in the calculated BIP-8 (up to 8 per frame). A block error increments the
count if any bit in the EM byte does not match the corresponding bit in the calculated BIP-8 (up to 1 per frame).
REI errors are determined by the REI bit (second bit of MA byte). A one indicates an error and a zero indicates no
errors.
The receive alarm indication (RAI) signal is high when one or more of the indicated alarm conditions is present, and
low when all of the indicated alarm conditions are absent. Setting the receive alarm indication on LOS, OOF, LOF,
or AIS is individually programmable (on or off).
The receive error indication (REI) signal will transition from low to high once for each frame in which a parity error is
detected.
10.6.8.9 Receive G.832 E3 Overhead Extraction
Overhead extraction extracts all of the E3 overhead bytes from the G.832 E3 frame. All of the E3 overhead bytes
FA1, FA2, EM, TR, MA, NR, and GC are output on the receive overhead interface (ROH, ROHSOF, and
ROHCLK).
The EM byte is output as an error indication (modulo 2 addition of the calculated BIP-8 and the EM byte.
The TR byte is sent to the receive trail trace controller.
The payload type (third, fourth, and fifth bits of the MA byte) is integrated and stored in a register with change and
unstable indications. The integrated received payload type is also compared against an expected payload type. If
the received and expected payload types do not match (See Table 10-30), a mismatch indication is set.
94
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-30. Payload Label Match Status
EXPECTED
RECEIVED
STATUS
000
000
Match
000
001
Mismatch
000
XXX
Mismatch
001
000
Mismatch
001
001
Match
001
XXX
Match
XXX
000
Mismatch
XXX
001
Match
XXX
XXX
Match
XXX
YYY
Mismatch
XXX and YYY equal any value other than 000 or 001; XXX ≠ YYY
The multiframe indicator and timing marker bits (sixth, seventh, and eighth bits of the MA byte) can be integrated
and stored in three register bits or extracted, integrated, and stored in four register bits. The bits (three or four) are
stored with a change indication. The multiframe indicator and timing marker storage type is programmable
(integrated or extracted). When the multiframe indicator and timing marker bits are integrated, the last three bits of
the MA byte are integrated and stored in three register bits. When the multiframe indicator and timing marker bits
are extracted, four timing source indicator bits are transferred in a four-frame multiframe, MSB first. The multiframe
indicator bits (sixth and seventh bits of the MA byte) identify the phase of the multiframe (00, 01, 10, or 11). The
timing marker bit (eighth bit of the MA byte) contains the timing source indicator bit indicated by the multiframe
indicator bits (first, second, third, or fourth bit respectively). The four timing source indicator bits are extracted from
the multiframe, integrated, and stored in four register bits with unstable and change indications.
The NR byte is integrated and stored in a register along with a change indication, it is sent to the receive FEAC
controller, and it can be sent to the receive HDLC controller. The byte sent to the receive HDLC controller is
programmable (NR or GC).
The GC byte is integrated and stored in a register along with a change indication, and can be sent to the receive
HDLC controller. The byte sent to the receive HDLC controller is programmable (NR or GC).
10.6.8.10 Receive G.832 Downstream AIS Generation
Downstream G.832 E3 AIS can be automatically generated on an OOF, LOS, or AIS condition or manually
inserted. If automatic downstream AIS is enabled, downstream AIS is inserted when an LOS, OOF, or AIS
condition is declared. Automatic downstream AIS is programmable (on or off). If manual downstream AIS insertion
is enabled, downstream AIS is inserted. Manual downstream AIS insertion is programmable (on or off).
Downstream AIS is removed when all OOF, LOS, and AIS conditions are terminated and manual downstream AIS
insertion is disabled. RPDT will be forced to all ones during downstream AIS.
95
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.7 HDLC Overhead Controller
10.7.1 General Description
The DS3174,3,2,1 devices contain built-in HDLC controllers (one per port) with 256 byte FIFOs for
insertion/extraction of DS3 PMDL, G.751 Sn bit and G.832 NR/GC bytes.
The HDLC Overhead Controller demaps HDLC overhead packets from the DS3/E3 data stream in the receive
direction and maps HDLC packets into the DS3/E3 data stream in the transmit direction.
The receive direction performs packet processing and stores the packet data in the FIFO. It removes packet data
from the FIFO and outputs the packet data to the microprocessor via the register interface.
The transmit direction inputs the packet data from the microprocessor via the register interface and stores the
packet data in the FIFO. It removes the packet data from the FIFO and performs packet processing.
The bits in a byte are received MSB first, LSB last. When they are output serially, they are output MSB first, LSB
last. The bits in a byte in an incoming signal are numbered in the order they are received, 1 (MSB) to 8 (LSB).
However, when a byte is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the lowest numbered bit (0), and the LSB is
stored in the highest numbered bit (7). This is to differentiate between a byte in a register and the corresponding
byte in a signal. See Figure 10-20 for the location of HDLC controllers within the DS317x devices.
Figure 10-20. HDLC Controller Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
Clock Rate
Adapter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.7.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable inter-frame fill – The inter-frame fill between packets can be all 1’s or flags.
Programmable FCS generation/monitoring – An FCS-16 can be generated and appended to the end of the
packet, and the FCS can be checked and removed from the end of the packet.
Programmable bit reordering – The packet data can be can be output MSB first or LSB first from the FIFO.
Programmable data inversion – The packet data can be inverted immediately after packet processing on the
transmit, and immediately before packet processing on the receive.
Fully independent transmit and receive paths
Fully independent Line side and register interface timing – The data storage can be read from or written to
via the microprocessor interface while all line side clocks and signals are inactive, and read from or written to
via the line side while all microprocessor interface clocks and signals are inactive.
96
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.7.3 Transmit FIFO
The Transmit FIFO block contains memory for 256 bytes of data with data status information and controller circuitry
for reading and writing the memory. The Transmit FIFO controller functions include filling the memory, tracking the
memory fill level, maintaining the memory read and write pointers, and detecting memory overflow and underflow
conditions. The Transmit FIFO receives data and status from the microprocessor interface, and stores the data
along with the data status information in memory. The Transmit Packet Processor reads the data and data status
information from the Transmit FIFO. The Transmit FIFO also outputs FIFO fill status (empty/data storage
available/full) via the microprocessor interface. All operations are byte based. The Transmit FIFO is considered
empty when its memory does not contain any data. The Transmit FIFO is considered to have data storage
available when its memory has a programmable number of bytes or more available for storage. The Transmit FIFO
is considered full when it does not have any space available for storage. The Transmit FIFO accepts data from the
register interface until full. If the Transmit FIFO is written to while the FIFO is full, the write is ignored, and a FIFO
overflow condition is declared. The Transmit Packet Processor reads the Transmit FIFO. If the Transmit Packet
Processor attempts to read the Transmit FIFO while it is empty, a FIFO underflow condition is declared.
10.7.4 Transmit HDLC Overhead Processor
The Transmit HDLC Overhead Processor accepts data from the Transmit FIFO, performs bit reordering, FCS
processing, stuffing, packet abort sequence insertion, and inter-frame padding.
A byte is read from the Transmit FIFO with a packet end status. When a byte is marked with a packet end
indication, the output data stream will be padded with FFh and marked with a FIFO empty indication if the Transmit
FIFO contains less than two bytes or transmit packet start is disabled. Transmit packet start is programmable (on
or off). When the Transmit Packet Processor reads the Transmit FIFO while it is empty, the output data stream is
marked with an abort indication. Once the Transmit FIFO is empty, the output data stream will be padded with
interframe fill until the Transmit FIFO contains two or more bytes of data and transmit packet start is enabled.
Bit reordering changes the bit order of each byte. If bit reordering is disabled, the outgoing 8-bit data stream
DT[1:8] with DT[1] being the MSB and DT[8] being the LSB is input from the Transmit FIFO with the MSB in TFD[0]
and the LSB in TFD[7] of the transmit FIFO data TFD[7:0]. If bit reordering is enabled, the outgoing 8-bit data
stream DT[1:8] is input from the Transmit FIFO with the MSB in TFD[7] and the LSB in TFD[0] of the transmit FIFO
data TFD[7:0]. DT[1] is the first bit transmitted on the outgoing data stream.
FCS processing calculates an FCS and appends it to the packet. FCS calculation is a CRC-16 calculation over the
entire packet. The polynomial used for the CRC-16 is x16 + x12 + x5 + 1. The CRC-16 is inverted after calculation,
and appended to the packet. For diagnostic purposes, an FCS error can be inserted. This is accomplished by
appending the calculated CRC-16 without inverting it. FCS error insertion is programmable (on or off). When FCS
processing is disabled, the packet is output without appending an FCS. FCS processing is programmable (on or
off).
Stuffing inserts control data into the packet to prevent packet data from mimicking flags. Stuffing is halted during
FIFO empty periods. The 8-bit parallel data stream is multiplexed into a serial data stream, and bit stuffing is
performed. Bit stuffing consists of inserting a '0' directly following any five contiguous '1's. Stuffing is performed
from a packet start until a packet end.
Inter-frame padding inserts inter-frame fill between the packet start and end flags when the FIFO is empty. The
inter-frame fill can be flags or '1's. If the inter-frame fill is flags, flags (minimum two) are inserted until a packet start
is received. If the inter-frame fill is all '1's, an end flag is inserted, ‘1’s are inserted until a packet start is received,
and a start flag is inserted after the ‘1’s. The number of '1's between the end flag and start flag may not be an
integer number of bytes, however, the inter-frame fill will be at least 15 consecutive '1's. If the FIFO is not empty
between a packet end and a packet start, then two flags are inserted between the packet end and packet start. The
inter-frame padding type is programmable (flags or ‘1’s).
Packet abort insertion inserts a packet abort sequences as necessary. If a packet abort indication is detected, a
packet abort sequence is inserted and inter-frame padding is done until a packet start is detected. The abort
sequence is FFh.
Once all packet processing has been completed, the datastream is inserted into the DS3/E3 datastream at the
proper locations. If transmit data inversion is enabled, the outgoing data is inverted after packet processing is
performed. Transmit data inversion is programmable (on or off).
97
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.7.5 Receive HDLC Overhead Processor
The Receive HDLC Overhead Packet Processor accepts data from the DS3/E3 Framer and performs packet
delineation, inter-frame fill filtering, packet abort detection, destuffing, FCS processing, and bit reordering. If receive
data inversion is enabled, the incoming data is inverted before packet processing is performed. Receive data
inversion is programmable (on or off).
Packet delineation determines the packet boundary by identifying a packet start flag. Each time slot is checked for
a flag sequence (7Eh). Once a flag is found, if it is identified as a start or end flag, and the packet boundary is set.
There may be a single flag (both end and start) between packets, there may be an end flag and a start flag with a
shared zero (011111101111110) between packets, there may be an end flag and a start flag (two flags) between
packets, or there may be an end flag, inter-frame fill, and a start flag between packets. The flag check is performed
one bit at a time.
Inter-frame fill filtering removes the inter-frame fill between a start flag and an end flag. All inter-frame fill is
discarded. The inter-frame fill can be flags (01111110) or all '1's. When inter-frame fill is all ‘1’s, the number of '1's
between the end flag and the start flag may not be an integer number of bytes. When inter-frame fill is flags, the
number of bits between the end flag and the start flag will be an integer number of bytes (flags). Any time there is
less than 16 bits between two flags, the data will be discarded.
Packet abort detection searches for a packet abort sequence. Between a packet start flag and a packet end flag, if
an abort sequence is detected, the packet is marked with an abort indication, and all subsequent data is discarded
until a packet start flag is detected. The abort sequence is seven consecutive ones.
Packet abort detection searches for a packet abort sequence. Between a packet start flag and a packet end flag, if
an abort sequence is detected, the packet is marked with an abort indication, and all subsequent data is discarded
until a packet start flag is detected. The abort sequence is seven consecutive ones.
Destuffing removes the extra data inserted to prevent data from mimicking a flag or an abort sequence. After a start
flag is detected, destuffing is performed until an end flag is detected. Destuffing consists of discarding any '0' that
directly follows five contiguous '1's. After destuffing is completed, the serial bit stream is demultiplexed into an 8-bit
parallel data stream and passed on with packet start, packet end, and packet abort indications. If there is less than
eight bits in the last byte, an invalid packet status is set, and the packet is tagged with an abort indication. If a
packet ends with five contiguous '1's, the packet will be processed as a normal packet regardless of whether or not
the five contiguous '1's are followed by a '0'.
FCS processing checks the FCS, discards the FCS bytes, and marks FCS erred packets. The FCS is checked for
errors, and the last two bytes are removed from the end of the packet. If an FCS error is detected, the packet is
marked with an FCS error indication. The HDLC CONTROLLER performs FCS-16 checking. FCS processing is
programmable (on or off). If FCS processing is disabled, FCS checking is not performed, and all of the packet data
is passed on.
Bit reordering changes the bit order of each byte. If bit reordering is disabled, the incoming 8-bit data stream
DT[1:8] with DT[1] being the MSB and DT[8] being the LSB is output to the Receive FIFO with the MSB in RFD[0]
and the LSB in RFD[7] of the receive FIFO data RFD[7:0]. If bit reordering is enabled, the incoming 8-bit data
stream DT[1:8] is output to the Receive FIFO with the MSB in RFD[7] and the LSB in RFD[0] of the receive FIFO
data RFD[7:0]. DT[1] is the first bit received from the incoming data stream.
Once all of the packet processing has been completed, The 8-bit parallel data stream is passed on to the Receive
FIFO with packet start, packet end, and packet error indications.
10.7.6 Receive FIFO
The Receive FIFO block contains memory for 256 bytes of data with data status information and controller circuitry
for reading and writing the memory. The Receive FIFO Controller controls filling the memory, tracking the memory
fill level, maintaining the memory read and write pointers, and detecting memory overflow and underflow
conditions. The Receive FIFO accepts data and data status from the Receive Packet Processor and stores the
data along with data status information in memory. The data is read from the receive FIFO via the microprocessor
interface. The Receive FIFO also outputs FIFO fill status (empty/data available/full) via the microprocessor
interface. All operations are byte based. The Receive FIFO is considered empty when it does not contain any data.
The Receive FIFO is considered to have data available when there is a programmable number of bytes or more
stored in the memory. The Receive FIFO is considered full when it does not have any space available for storage.
98
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The Receive FIFO accepts data from the Receive Packet Processor until full. If a packet start is received while full,
the data is discarded and a FIFO overflow condition is declared. If any other packet data is received while full, the
current packet being transferred is marked with an abort indication, and a FIFO overflow condition is declared.
Once a FIFO overflow condition is declared, the Receive FIFO will discard incoming data until a packet start is
received while the Receive FIFO has sixteen or more bytes available for storage. If the Receive FIFO is read while
the FIFO is empty, the read is ignored, and an invalid data indication given.
10.8 Trail Trace Controller
10.8.1 General Description
Each port has a dedicated Trail Trace Buffer for E3-G.832 link management
The Trail Trace Controller performs extraction and storage of the incoming G.832 trail access point identifier in a
16-byte receive register.
The Trail Trace Controller extracts/inserts E3-G.832 trail access point identifiers using a 16-byte register(one for
transmit, one for receive).
The Trail Trace Controller demaps a 16-byte trail trace identifier from the E3-G.832 TR Byte of the overhead in the
receive direction and maps a trace identifier into the E3-G.832 datastream in the transmit direction.
The receive direction inputs the trace ID data stream, performs trace ID processing, and stores the trace identifier
data in the data storage using line timing. It removes trace identifier data from the data storage and outputs the
trace identifier data to the microprocessor via the microprocessor interface using register timing. The data is forced
to all ones during LOS, LOF and AIS detection to eliminate false messages
The transmit direction inputs the trace identifier data from the microprocessor via the microprocessor interface and
stores the trace identifier data in the data storage using register timing. It removes the trace identifier data from the
data storage, performs trace ID processing, and outputs the trace ID data stream. Refer to Figure 10-21 for the
location of the Trail Trace Controller with the DS317x devices.
Figure 10-21. Trail Trace Controller Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
Clock Rate
Adapter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
RX BERT
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.8.2 Features
•
•
•
Programmable trail trace ID – The trail trace ID controller can be programmed to handle a 16-byte trail trace
identifier (trail trace mode).
Programmable transmit trace ID – All sixteen bytes of the transmit trail trace identifier are programmable.
Programmable receive expected trace ID – A 16-byte expected trail trace identifier can be programmed.
Both a mismatch and unstable indication are provided.
99
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable trace ID multi-frame alignment – The transmit side can be programmed to perform trail trace
multi-frame alignment insertion. The receive side can be programmed to perform trail trace multi-frame
synchronization.
Programmable bit reordering – The trace identifier data can be output MSB first or LSB first from the data
storage.
Programmable data inversion – The trace identifier data can be inverted immediately after trace ID
processing on the transmit side, and immediately before trail ID processing on the receive side.
Fully independent transmit and receive sides
Fully independent Line side and register interface timing – The data storage can be read from or written to
via the microprocessor interface while all line side clocks and signals are inactive, and read from or written to
via the line side while all microprocessor interface clocks and signals are inactive.
10.8.3 Functional Description
The bits in a byte are received most significant bit (MSB) first and least significant bit (LSB) last. When they are
output serially, they are output MSB first and LSB last. The bits in a byte in an incoming signal are numbered in the
order they are received, 1 (MSB) to 8 (LSB). However, when a byte is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the
highest numbered bit (7), and the LSB is stored in the lowest numbered bit (0). This is to differentiate between a
byte in a register and the corresponding byte in a signal.
10.8.4 Transmit Data Storage
The Transmit Data Storage block contains memory for 16 bytes of data and controller circuitry for reading and
writing the memory. The Transmit Data Storage controller functions include filling the memory and maintaining the
memory read and write pointers. The Transmit Data Storage receives data from the microprocessor interface, and
stores the data in memory. The Transmit Trace ID Processor reads the data from the Transmit Data Storage. The
Transmit Data Storage contains the transmit trail trace identifier. Note: The contents of the transmit trail (path) trace
identifier memory will be random data immediately after power-up, and will not change during a reset (RST or DRST
low).
10.8.5 Transmit Trace ID Processor
The Transmit Trace ID Processor accepts data from Transmit Data Storage, processes the data according to the
Transmit Trace ID mode, and outputs the serial trace ID data stream.
10.8.6 Transmit Trail Trace Processing
The Transmit Trail Trace Processing accepts data from the Transmit Data Storage performs bit reordering and
multi-frame alignment insertion.
Bit reordering changes the bit order of each byte. If bit reordering is disabled, the outgoing 8-bit data stream
DT[1:8] with DT[1] being the MSB and DT[8] being the LSB is input from the Transmit Data Storage with the MSB
in TTD[7] and the LSB in TTD[0] of the transmit trace ID data TTD[7:0]. If bit reordering is enabled, the outgoing 8bit data stream DT[1:8] is input from the Transmit Data Storage with the MSB is in TTD[0] and the LSB is in TTD[7]
of the transmit trace ID data TTD[7:0]. DT[1] is the first bit transmitted on the outgoing data stream.
Multi-frame alignment insertion overwrites the MSB of each trail trace byte with the multi-frame alignment signal.
The MSB of the first byte in the trail trace identifier is overwritten with a one, the MSB of the other fifteen bytes in
the trail trace identifier are overwritten with a zero. Multi-frame alignment insertion is programmable (on or off).
If transmit data inversion is enabled, the outgoing data is inverted after trail trace processing is performed. Transmit
data inversion is programmable (on or off). If transmit trail trace identifier idle (Idle) is enabled, the trail trace data is
overwritten with all zeros. Transmit Idle is programmable (on or off).
10.8.7 Receive Trace ID Processor
The Receive Trace ID Processor receives the incoming serial trace ID data stream and processes the incoming
data according to the Receive Trace ID mode, and passes the trace ID data on to Receive Data Storage.
The bits in a byte are received MSB first, LSB last. The bits in a byte in an incoming signal are numbered in the
order they are received, 1 (MSB) to 8 (LSB). However, when a byte is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the
100
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
highest numbered bit (7), and the LSB is stored in the lowest numbered bit (0). This is to differentiate between a
byte in a register and the corresponding byte in a signal.
10.8.8 Receive Trail Trace Processing
The Receive Trail Trace Processing accepts an incoming data line and performs trail trace alignment, trail trace
extraction, expected trail trace comparison, and bit reordering. If receive data inversion is enabled, the incoming
data is inverted before trail trace processing is performed. Receive data inversion is programmable (on or off).
Trail trace alignment determines the trail trace identifier boundary by identifying the multi-frame alignment signal.
The multi-frame alignment signal (MAS) is located in the MSB of each byte (see Figure 10-22). The MAS bits are
each checked for the multi-frame alignment start bit, which is a one. Once a multi-frame alignment start bit is found,
the remaining fifteen bits of the MAS are verified as being zero. The MAS check is performed one byte at a time.
Multi-frame alignment is programmable (on or off). When multi-frame alignment is disabled, the incoming bytes are
sequentially stored starting with a random byte.
Figure 10-22. Trail Trace Byte (DT = Trail Trace Data)
Bit 1
MSB
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
LSB
MAS or
DT[1]
DT[2]
DT[3]
DT[4]
DT[5]
DT[6]
DT[7]
DT[8]
Trail trace extraction extracts the trail trace identifier from the incoming trail trace data stream, generates a trail
trace identifier change indication, detects a trail trace identifier idle (Idle) condition, and detects a trail trace
identifier unstable (TIU) condition. The trail trace identifier bytes are stored sequentially with the first byte (MAS
equals 1 if trail trace alignment is enabled) being stored in the first byte of memory. If the exact same non-zero trail
trace identifier is received five consecutive times and it is different from the receive trail trace identifier, a receive
trail trace identifier update is performed, and the receive trail trace identifier change indication is set.
An Idle condition is declared when an all zeros trail trace identifier is received five consecutive times. An Idle
condition is terminated when a non-zero trail trace identifier is received five consecutive times or a TIU condition is
declared. A TIU condition is declared if eight consecutive trail trace identifiers are received that do not match either
the receive trail trace identifier or the previously stored current trail trace identifier. The TIU condition is terminated
when a non-zero trail trace identifier is received five consecutive times or an Idle condition is declared.
Expected trail trace comparison compares the received and expected trail trace identifiers. The comparison is a 7bit comparison of the seven least significant bits (DT[2:8] (see Figure 10-22) of each trail trace identifier byte (The
multi-frame alignment signal is ignored). If the received and expected trail trace identifiers do not match, a trail
trace identifier mismatch (TIM) condition is declared. If they do match the TIM condition is terminated. The 16-byte
expected trail trace identifier is programmable. Expected trail trace comparison is programmable (on or off). If multiframe alignment is disabled, expected trail trace comparison is disabled. Immediately after a reset, the receive trail
trace identifier is invalid. All comparisons between the receive trail trace identifier and expected trail trace identifier
will match (a TIM condition cannot occur) until after the first receive trail trace identifier update occurs.
Bit reordering changes the bit order of each byte. If bit reordering is disabled, the incoming 8-bit data stream
DT[1:8] with DT[1] being the MSB and DT[8] being the LSB is output to the Receive Data Storage with the MSB in
RTD[7] and the LSB in RTD[0] of the receive trace ID data RTD[7:0]. If bit reordering is enabled, the incoming 8-bit
data stream DT[1:8] is output to the Receive Data Storage with the MSB in RTD[0] and the LSB in RTD[7] of the
receive trace ID data RTD[7:0]. DT[1] is the first bit received from the incoming data stream.
Once all of the trail trace processing has been completed, The 8-bit parallel data stream is passed on to the
Receive Data Storage.
10.8.9 Receive Data Storage
The Receive Data Storage block contains memory for 48 bytes of data, maintains data status information, and has
controller circuitry for reading and writing the memory. The Receive Data Storage controller functions include filling
101
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
the memory and maintaining the memory read and write pointers. The Receive Data Storage accepts data and
data status from the Receive Trace ID Processor, stores the data in memory, and maintains data status
information. The data is read from the Receive Data Storage via the microprocessor interface. The Receive Data
Storage contains the current trail trace identifier, the receive trail trace identifier, and the expected trail trace
identifier.
10.9 FEAC Controller
10.9.1 General Description
The FEAC Controller demaps FEAC codewords from a DS3/E3 data stream in the receive direction and maps
FEAC codewords into a DS3/E3 data stream in the transmit direction. The transmit direction demaps FEAC
codewords from a DS3/E3 data stream.
The receive direction performs FEAC processing, and stores the codewords in the FIFO using line timing. It
removes the codewords from the FIFO and outputs them to the microprocessor via the register interface.
The transmit direction inputs codewords from the microprocessor via the register interface and stores the
codewords. It removes the codewords and performs FEAC processing. See Figure 10-23 for the location of the
FEAC Controller in the block diagram
Figure 10-23. FEAC Controller Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Clock Rate
Adapter
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.9.2 Features
•
•
•
•
Programmable dual codeword output – The transmit side can be programmed to output a single codeword
ten times, one codeword ten times followed by a second codeword ten times, or a single codeword
continuously.
Four codeword receive FIFO
Fully independent transmit and receive paths
Fully independent Line side and register side timing – The FIFO can be read from or written to at the
register interface side while all line side clocks and signals are inactive, and read from or written to at the line
side while all register interface side clocks and signals are inactive.
10.9.3 Functional Description
The bits in a code are received MSB first, LSB last. When they are output serially, they are output MSB first, LSB
last. The bits in a code in an incoming signal are numbered in the order they are received, 1 (MSB) to 6 (LSB).
However, when a code is stored in a register, the MSB is stored in the lowest numbered bit (0), and the LSB is
102
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
stored in the highest numbered bit (5). This is to differentiate between a code in a register and the corresponding
code in a signal.
10.9.3.1 Transmit Data Storage
The Transmit Data Storage block contains the registers for two FEAC codes (C{1:6]) and controller circuitry for
reading and writing the memory. The Transmit Data Storage receives data from the microprocessor interface, and
stores the data in memory. The Transmit FEAC Processor reads the data from the Transmit Data Storage.
10.9.3.2 Transmit FEAC Processor
The Transmit FEAC Processor accepts data from the Transmit Data Storage performs FEAC processing. The
FEAC codes are read from Transmit Data Storage with the MSB (C[1]) in TFCA[0] or TFCB[0], and the LSB (C[6])
in TFCA[5] or TFCB[5].
FEAC processing has four modes of operation (Idle, single code, dual code, and continuous code). In Idle mode, all
ones are output on the outgoing FEAC data stream. In single code mode, the code from TFCA[5:0] is inserted into
a codeword (See Figure 10-24), and sent ten consecutive times. Once the ten codewords have been sent, all ones
are output. In dual code mode, the code from TFCA[5:0] is inserted into a codeword, and sent ten consecutive
times. Then the code from TFCB[5:0] is inserted into a codeword, and sent ten consecutive times. Once both
codewords have both been sent ten times, all ones are output. In continuous mode, the code from TFCA[5:0] is
inserted into a codeword, and sent until the mode is changed
10.9.3.3 Receive FEAC Processor
The Receive FEAC Processor accepts an incoming data line and extracts all overhead and performs FEAC code
extraction , and Idle detection.
Figure 10-24. FEAC Codeword Format
LSB
16
0
MSB
1
Receive/Transmit Order
C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cx - FEAC Code
FEAC code extraction determines the codeword boundary by identifying the codeword sequence and extracts the
FEAC code. A FEAC codeword is a repeating 16-bit pattern (See Figure 10-24). The codeword sequence is the
pattern (0xxxxxx011111111) that contains each FEAC code (C[6:1]). Each time slot is checked for a codeword
sequence. Once a codeword sequence is found, the FEAC code is checked. If the same FEAC code is received in
three consecutive codewords without errors, the FEAC code detection indication is set, and the FEAC code is
stored in the Receive FIFO with the MSB (C[1]) in RFF[0], and the LSB (C[6]) in RFF[5]. The FEAC code detection
indication is cleared if two consecutively received FEAC codewords differ from the current FEAC codeword, or a
FEAC Idle condition is detected.
Idle detection detects a FEAC Idle condition. A FEAC idle condition is declared if sixteen consecutive ones are
received. The FEAC Idle condition is terminated when the FEAC code detection indication is set.
10.9.3.4 Receive FEAC FIFO
The Receive FIFO block contains memory for four FEAC codes (C[1:6]) and controller circuitry for reading and
writing the memory. The Receive FIFO controller functions include filling the memory, tracking the memory fill level,
maintaining the memory read and write pointers, and detecting memory overflow and underflow conditions. The
Receive FIFO accepts data from the Receive FEAC Processor and stores the data in memory. The data is read
from the receive FIFO via the microprocessor interface. The Receive FIFO also outputs FIFO fill status (empty) via
the microprocessor interface. All operations are code based (six bits). The Receive FIFO is considered empty when
it does not contain any data. The Receive FIFO accepts data from the Receive FEAC Processor until full. If a
FEAC code is received while full, the data is discarded and a FIFO overflow condition is declared. If the Receive
FIFO is read while the FIFO is empty, the read is ignored.
103
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.10 Line Encoder/Decoder
10.10.1 General Description
The B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder converts a bipolar signal to a unipolar signal in the receive direction. B3ZS/HDB3
Encoder converts a unipolar signal to a bipolar signal in the transmit direction.
In the transmit direction, the Encoder converts the unipolar signal to a bipolar signal, optionally performing zero
suppression encoding (HDB3/B3ZS), optionally inserting errors, and outputs the bipolar signal.
In the receive direction, the Decoder receives a bipolar signal, monitors it for alarms and errors, optionally
performing zero suppression decoding (HDB3/B3ZS), and converts it to a unipolar signal.
If the port line interface is configured for a Unipolar mode, the BPV detector will count pulses on the RLCVn pin.
See Figure 10-25 for the locations of the Line Encoder/ Decoder block in the DS317x devices.
Figure 10-25. Line Encoder/Decoder Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Clock Rate
Adapter
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.10.2 Features
•
•
•
•
Performs bipolar to unipolar encoding and decoding – Converts a unipolar signal into an AMI bipolar signal
(POS data, and NEG data) and vice versa.
Programmable zero suppression – B3ZS or HDB3 zero suppression encoding and decoding can be
performed, or the bipolar data stream can be left as an AMI encoded data stream.
Programmable receive zero suppression code format – The signature of B3ZS or HDB3 is selectable.
Generates and detects alarms and errors – In the receive direction, detects LOS alarm condition BPV
errors, and EXZ errors. In the transmit direction, errors can be inserted into the outgoing data stream.
10.10.3 B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder
B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder performs unipolar to bipolar conversion and zero suppression encoding.
Unipolar to bipolar conversion converts the unipolar data stream into an AMI bipolar data stream (POS and NEG).
In an AMI bipolar data stream a zero is represented by a zero on both the POS and NEG signals, and a one is
represented by a one on a bipolar signal (POS or NEG), and a zero on the other bipolar signal (NEG or POS).
Successive ones are represented by ones that are alternately output on the POS and NEG signals. i.e., if a one is
represented by a one on POS and a zero on NEG, the next one will be represented by a one on NEG and a zero
on POS.
Zero suppression encoding converts an AMI bipolar data stream into a B3ZS or HDB3 encoded bipolar data
stream. A B3ZS encoded bipolar signal is generated by inserting a B3ZS signature into the bipolar data stream if
both the POS and NEG signals are zero for three consecutive clock periods. An HDB3 encoded bipolar signal is
104
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
generated by inserting an HDB3 signature into the bipolar data stream if both the POS and NEG signals are zero
for four consecutive clock periods. Zero suppression encoding can be disabled which will result in AMI-coded data.
Error insertion is also performed. Error insertion inserts bipolar violation (BPV) or excessive zero (EXZ) errors onto
the bipolar signal. A BPV error will be inserted when three consecutive ones occur. An EXZ error will be inserted
when three (or four) consecutive zeros on the bipolar signal occur by inhibiting the insertion of a B3ZS (HDB3)
signature. There will be at least one intervening pulse between consecutive BPV or EXZ errors. A single BPV or
EXZ error inserted will be detected as a single BPV/EXZ error at the far-end, and will not cause any other type of
error to be detected. For example, if a BPV error is inserted, the far-end should not also detect a data error.
10.10.4 Transmit Line Interface
The Transmit Line Interface accepts a bipolar data stream from the B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder, performs error insertion,
and transmits the bipolar data stream.
Error insertion inserts BPV or EXZ errors into the bipolar signal. When a BPV error is to be inserted, the Transmit
Line Interface waits for the next occurrence of three consecutive ones. The first bipolar one is generated according
to the normal AMI rules. The second bipolar one is generated by transmitting the same values on TPOS and TNEG
as the values for the first one. The third bipolar one is generated according to the normal AMI rules. When an EXZ
error is to be inserted, the Transmit Line Interface waits for the next occurrence of three (four) consecutive zeros on
the bipolar signal, and inhibits the insertion of a B3ZS (HDB3) signature. There must be at least one intervening
one between consecutive BPV or EXZ errors. A single BPV or EXZ error inserted must be detected as a single
BPV/EXZ error at the far-end, and not cause any other type of error to be detected. For example, if a BPV error is
inserted, the far-end should not also detect a data error. If a second error insertion request of a given type (BPV or
EXZ) is initiated before a previous request has been completed, the second request will be ignored.
The outgoing bipolar data stream consists of positive pulse data (TPOSn) and negative pulse data (TNEGn).
TPOSn and TNEGn are updated on the rising edge of TLCLKn.
10.10.5 Receive Line Interface
The Receive Line Interface receives a bipolar signal. The incoming bipolar data line consists of positive pulse data
(RPOSn), negative pulse data (RNEGn), and clock (RLCLKn) signals. RPOSn and RNEGn are sampled on the
rising edge of RLCLKn. The incoming bipolar signal is checked for a Loss Of Signal (LOS) condition, and passed
on to B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder. An LOS condition is declared if both RPOSn and RNEGn do not have any transitions
for 192 clock cycles. The LOS condition is terminated after 192 clock cycles without any EXZ errors. Note: When
zero suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) decoding is disabled, the LOS condition is cleared, and cannot be detected.
10.10.6 B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder
The B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder receives a bipolar signal from the LIU (or the RPOS/RNEG pins). The incoming bipolar
signal is checked for a Loss of Signal (LOS) condition. An LOS condition is declared if both the positive pulse data
and negative pulse data signals do not have any transitions for 192 clock cycles. The LOS condition is terminated
after 192 clock cycles without any EXZ errors.
B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder performs EXZ detection, zero suppression decoding, BPV detection, and bipolar to unipolar
conversion.
EXZ detection checks the bipolar data stream for excessive zeros (EXZ) errors. In B3ZS mode, an EXZ error is
declared whenever there is an occurrence of 3 or more zeros. In HDB3 mode, an EXZ error is declared whenever
there is an occurrence of 4 or more zeros. EXZ errors are accumulated in the EXZ counter (LINE.REXZCR
register).
Zero suppression decoding converts B3ZS or HDB3 encoded bipolar data into an AMI bipolar signal. In B3ZS
mode, the encoded bipolar signal is checked for a B3ZS signature. If a B3ZS signature is found, it is replaced with
three zeros. In HDB3 mode, the encoded bipolar signal is checked for an HDB3 signature. If an HDB3 signature is
found, it is replaced with four zeros. The format of both an HDB3 signature and a B3ZS signature is programmable.
When LINE.RCR.REZSF = 0, the decoder will search for a zero followed by a BPV in B3ZS mode, and in HDB3
mode it will search for two zeros followed by a BPV. If LINE.RCR.REZSF = 1, the same criteria is applied with an
additional requirement that the BPV must be the opposite polarity of the previous BPV. See Figure 10-26 and
Figure 10-27. Zero suppression decoding is also programmable (on or off). Note: Immediately after a reset or a
105
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
LOS condition, the first B3ZS/HDB3 signature to be detected will not depend upon the polarity of any BPV
contained within the signature.
Figure 10-26. B3ZS Signatures
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
RNEG
V
B3ZS SIGNATURE WHEN
LINE.RCR.REZSF = 0
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
V
RNEG
V
B3ZS SIGNATURE WHEN
LINE.RCR.REZSF = 1
Figure 10-27. HDB3 Signatures
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
RNEG
V
HDB3 SIGNATURE WHEN
LINE.RCR.REZSF = 0
RLCLK
(RX DATA)
RPOS
RNEG
V
V
HDB3 SIGNATURE WHEN
LINE.RCR.REZSF = 1
BPV detection checks the bipolar signal for bipolar violation (BPV) errors and E3 code violation (CV) errors. A BPV
error is declared if two 1’s are detected on RXP or RXN without an intervening 1 on RXN or RXP, and the 1’s are
not part of a B3ZS/HDB3 signature, or when both RXP and RXN are a one. An E3 coding violation is declared if
consecutive BPVs of the same polarity are detected (ITU O.161 definition). E3 CVs are accumulated in the BPV
counter (LINE.RBPVCR register) if E3 CV detection has been enabled (applicable only in HDB3 mode), otherwise,
BPVs are accumulated in the BPV counter. If zero code suppression is disabled, the BPV counter will count all
bipolar violations. The BPV counter will count pulses on the RLCVn pin when the device is configured for unipolar
mode.
106
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Immediately after a reset (or datapath reset) or a LOS condition, a BPV will not be declared when the first valid one
(RPOS high and RNEG low, or RPOS low and RNEG high) is received. Bipolar to unipolar conversion converts the
AMI bipolar data into a unipolar signal by ORing together the RXP and RXN signals.
10.11 BERT
10.11.1 General Description
The BERT is a software programmable test pattern generator and monitor capable of meeting most error
performance requirements for digital transmission equipment. It will generate and synchronize to pseudo-random
patterns with a generation polynomial of the form xn + xy + 1, where n and y can take on values from 1 to 32 and to
repetitive patterns of any length up to 32 bits.
The transmit direction generates the programmable test pattern, and inserts the test pattern payload into the data
stream.
The receive direction extracts the test pattern payload from the receive data stream, and monitors the test pattern
payload for the programmable test pattern. See Figure 10-28 for the location of the BERT Block within the
DS3174x devices.
Figure 10-28. BERT Block Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
Clock Rate
Adapter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.11.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
Programmable PRBS pattern – The Pseudo Random Bit Sequence (PRBS) polynomial (xn + xy + 1) and seed
are programmable (length n = 1 to 32, tap y = 1 to n - 1, and seed = 0 to 2n - 1).
Programmable repetitive pattern – The repetitive pattern length and pattern are programmable (the length n
= 1 to 32 and pattern = 0 to 2n - 1).
24-bit error count and 32-bit bit count registers
Programmable bit error insertion – Errors can be inserted individually, on a pin transition, or at a specific
rate. The rate 1/10n is programmable (n = 1 to 7).
Pattern synchronization at a 10-3 BER – Pattern synchronization will be achieved even in the presence of a
random Bit Error Rate (BER) of 10-3.
10.11.3 Configuration and Monitoring
Set PORT.CR1.BENA = 1 to enable the BERT. The BERT must be enabled before the pattern is loaded for the
pattern load operation to take affect.
The following tables show how to configure the on-board BERT to send and receive common patterns.
107
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-31. Pseudorandom Pattern Generation
PATTERN TYPE
29-1 O.153 (511 type)
211-1 O.152 and O.153
(2047 type)
215-1 O.151
BERT.CR
BERT.PCR Register
PTF[4:0]
PLF[4:0]
PTS
(hex)
(hex)
04
08
0
BERT.
PCR
0x0408
QRSS
0
08
0A
0
0
0x080A
BERT.
SPR2
0xFFFF
BERT.
SPR1
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
TPIC,
RPIC
0
0
0D
0E
0
0
0x0D0E
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
1
20
10
13
0
0
0x1013
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
0
20
02
13
0
1
0x0253
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
0
23
11
16
0
0
0x1116
0xFFFF
0xFFFF
1
2 -1 O.153
2 -1 O.151 QRSS
2 -1 O.151
Table 10-32. Repetitive Pattern Generation
PATTERN TYPE
all 1s
all 0s
alternating 1s and 0s
BERT.PCR Register
PTF[4:0] PLF[4:0]
QRSS
(hex)
(hex)
PTS
NA
00
1
0
NA
00
1
0
NA
01
1
0
BERT.
PCR
0x0020
BERT.
SPR2
0xFFFF
BERT.
SPR1
0xFFFF
0x0020
0xFFFF
0xFFFE
0x0021
0xFFFF
0xFFFE
double alternating and 0s
NA
03
1
0
0x0023
0xFFFF
0xFFFC
3 in 24
NA
17
1
0
0x0037
0xFF20
0x0022
1 in 16
NA
0F
1
0
0x002F
0xFFFF
0x0001
1 in 8
NA
07
1
0
0x0027
0xFFFF
0xFF01
1 in 4
NA
03
1
0
0x0023
0xFFFF
0xFFF1
After configuring these bits, the pattern must be loaded into the BERT. This is accomplished via a zero-to-one
transition on BERT.CR.TNPL and BERT.CR.RNPL
Monitoring the BERT requires reading the BERT.SR Register which contains the Bit Error Count (BEC) bit and the
Out of Synchronization (OOS) bit. The BEC bit will be one when the bit error counter is one or more. The OOS will
be one when the receive pattern generator is not synchronized to the incoming pattern, which will occur when it
receives a minimum 6 bit errors within a 64 bit window. The Receive BERT Bit Count Register (BERT.RBCR1) and
the Receive BERT Bit Error Count Register (BERT.RBECR1) will be updated upon the reception of a Performance
Monitor Update signal (e.g. BERT.CR.LPMU). This signal will update the registers with the values of the counter
since the last update and will reset the counters. See Section 10.4.5 for more details of the PMU.
10.11.4 Receive Pattern Detection
When the Receive BERT is enabled it can be used as an off-line monitor. The incoming datastream flows to the
receive BERT as well as the DS3/E3 backplane.
The Receive BERT receives only the payload data and synchronizes the receive pattern generator to the incoming
pattern. The receive pattern generator is a 32-bit shift register that shifts data from the least significant bit (LSB) or
bit 1 to the most significant bit (MSB) or bit 32. The input to bit 1 is the feedback. For a PRBS pattern (generating
polynomial xn + xy + 1), the feedback is an XOR of bit n and bit y. For a repetitive pattern (length n), the feedback is
bit n. The values for n and y are individually programmable (1 to 32). The output of the receive pattern generator is
the feedback. If QRSS is enabled, the feedback is an XOR of bits 17 and 20, and the output will be forced to one if
the next 14 bits are all zeros. QRSS is programmable (on or off). For PRBS and QRSS patterns, the feedback will
be forced to one if bits 1 through 31 are all zeros. Depending on the type of pattern programmed, pattern detection
performs either PRBS synchronization or repetitive pattern synchronization.
108
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.11.4.1 Receive PRBS Synchronization
PRBS synchronization synchronizes the receive pattern generator to the incoming PRBS or QRSS pattern. The
receive pattern generator is synchronized by loading 32 data stream bits into the receive pattern generator, and
then checking the next 32 data stream bits. Synchronization is achieved if all 32 bits match the incoming pattern. If
at least six incoming bits in the current 64-bit window do not match the receive pattern generator, automatic pattern
resynchronization is initiated. Automatic pattern resynchronization can be disabled.
Refer to Figure 10-29 for the PRBS synchronization diagram.
Figure 10-29. PRBS Synchronization State Diagram
Sync
th
wi
its
wit
ho
its
ut
4b
err
ors
f6
6o
32
b
ors
err
1 bit error
Verify
Load
32 bits loaded
10.11.4.2 Receive Repetitive Pattern Synchronization
Repetitive pattern synchronization synchronizes the receive pattern generator to the incoming repetitive pattern.
The receive pattern generator is synchronized by searching each incoming data stream bit position for the
repetitive pattern, and then checking the next 32 data stream bits. Synchronization is achieved if all 32 bits match
the incoming pattern. If at least six incoming bits in the current 64-bit window do not match the receive PRBS
pattern generator, automatic pattern resynchronization is initiated. Automatic pattern resynchronization can be
disabled.
See Figure 10-30 for the repetitive pattern synchronization state diagram.
109
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 10-30. Repetitive Pattern Synchronization State Diagram
Sync
th
wi
its
wi
tho
its
ut
4b
err
ors
f6
6o
32
b
ors
err
1 bit error
Verify
Match
Pattern Matches
10.11.4.3 Receive Pattern Monitoring
Receive pattern monitoring monitors the incoming data stream for both an OOS condition and bit errors and counts
the incoming bits. An Out Of Synchronization (OOS) condition is declared when the synchronization state machine
is not in the “Sync” state. An OOS condition is terminated when the synchronization state machine is in the “Sync”
state.
Bit errors are determined by comparing the incoming data stream bit to the receive pattern generator output. If they
do not match, a bit error is declared, and the bit error and bit counts are incremented. If they match, only the bit
count is incremented. The bit count and bit error count are not incremented when an OOS condition exists.
10.11.5 Transmit Pattern Generation
Pattern Generation generates the outgoing test pattern, and passes it onto Error Insertion. The transmit pattern
generator is a 32-bit shift register that shifts data from the least significant bit (LSB) or bit 1 to the most significant
bit (MSB) or bit 32. The input to bit 1 is the feedback. For a PRBS pattern (generating polynomial xn + xy + 1), the
feedback is an XOR of bit n and bit y. For a repetitive pattern (length n), the feedback is bit n. The values for n and
y are individually programmable (1 to 32). The output of the receive pattern generator is the feedback. If QRSS is
enabled, the feedback is an XOR of bits 17 and 20, and the output will be forced to one if the next 14 bits are all
zeros. QRSS is programmable (on or off). For PRBS and QRSS patterns, the feedback will be forced to one if bits
1 through 31 are all zeros. When a new pattern is loaded, the pattern generator is loaded with a seed/pattern value
before pattern generation starts. The seed/pattern value is programmable (0 – 2n - 1).
10.11.5.1 Transmit Error Insertion
Error insertion inserts errors into the outgoing pattern data stream. Errors are inserted one at a time or at a rate of
one out of every 10n bits. The value of n is programmable (1 to 7 or off). Single bit error insertion can be initiated
from the microprocessor interface, or by the manual error insertion input (TMEI). The method of single error
insertion is programmable (register or input). If pattern inversion is enabled, the data stream is inverted before the
overhead/stuff bits are inserted. Pattern inversion is programmable (on or off).
110
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.12 LIU—Line Interface Unit
10.12.1 General Description
The line interface units (LIUs) perform the functions necessary for interfacing at the physical layer to DS3 or E3
lines. Each LIU has independent receive and transmit paths and a built-in jitter attenuator. See Figure 10-31 for the
location within the DS317x device of the LIU.
Figure 10-31. LIU Functional Diagram
TAIS
TUA1
DS3/E3
Receive
LIU
B3ZS/
HDB3
Decoder
Clock Rate
Adapter
Trail
FEAC Trace
Buffer
TX BERT
HDLC
PLB
DLB
LLB
ALB
DS3 / E3
Transmit
Formatter
B3ZS/
HDB3
Encoder
DS3/E3
Transmit
LIU
RX BERT
DS3 / E3
Receive
Framer
IEEE P1149.1
JTAG Test
Access Port
UA1
GEN
Microprocessor
Interface
10.12.2 Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Each Port Independently Configurable
Perform Receive Clock/Data Recovery and Transmit Waveshaping
Jitter Attenuators can be Placed in Either the Receive or Transmit Paths
Interface to 75Ω Coaxial Cable at Lengths Up to 380 meters (DS3), 440 meters (E3)
Use 1:2 Transformers on TX and RX
Require Minimal External Components
Local and Remote Loopbacks
10.12.2.1 Transmitter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gapped clock capable up to 52MHz
Wide 50 ±20% transmit clock duty cycle
Clock inversion for glueless interfacing
Unframed all-ones generator (E3 AIS)
Line build-out (LBO) control
Tri-state line driver outputs support protection switching applications
Per-channel power-down control
Output driver monitor
10.12.2.2 Receiver
•
•
•
•
•
•
AGC/equalizer block handles from 0 to 15dB of cable loss
Loss-of-lock (LOL) PLL status indication
Interfaces directly to a DSX monitor signal (~20dB flat loss) using built-in preamp
Digital and analog loss-of-signal (LOS) detectors (ANSI T1.231 and ITU G.775)
Clock inversion for glueless interfacing
Per-channel power-down control
111
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
10.12.3 Detailed Description
The receiver performs clock and data recovery from an alternate mark inversion (AMI) coded signal or a B3ZS- or
HDB3-coded AMI signal and monitors for loss of the incoming signal. The transmitter drives standard pulse-shape
waveforms onto 75Ω coaxial cable. See Figure 10-32 for a detailed functional block diagram of the DS3/E3 LIU.
The jitter attenuator can be mapped into the receiver data path, mapped into the transmitter data path, or be
disabled. The DS3/E3 LIU conforms to the telecommunications standards listed in Table 4-1. Figure 1-1 shows the
external components required for proper operation.
Figure 10-32. DS3/E3 LIU Block Diagram
CLKA CLKB CLKC
VSS
Clock Rate
Adapter
Automatic
Gain
Control
+
Adaptive
Equalizer
RXPn
RXNn
Preamp
FROM DS3/E3
LINE
Power
Supply
Jitter Attenuator
(can be placed in either the receive path or the transmit path)
VDD
Clock &
Data
Recovery
ALOS
squelch
Analog
Local
Loopback
TXNn
Line Driver
TXPn
TO DS3/E3 LINE
Waveshaping
Driver
Monitor
TO B3ZS/HDB3
DECODER
FROM B3ZS/HDB3
ENCODER
10.12.4 Transmitter
10.12.4.1 Transmit Clock
The clock used in the LIU Transmitter is typically based on either the CLAD clock or TCLKI, selected by the
CLADC bit in PORT.CR3.
10.12.4.2 Waveshaping, Line Build-Out, Line Driver
The waveshaping block converts the transmit clock, positive data, and negative data signals into a single AMI
signal with the waveshape required for interfacing to DS3/E3 lines. Table 18-6 through Table 18-8 and Figure 18-9
(AC Timing section) show the waveform template specifications and test parameters.
Because DS3 signals must meet the waveform templates at the cross-connect through any cable length from 0 to
450ft, the waveshaping circuitry includes a selectable LBO feature. For cable lengths of 225ft or greater, the TLBO
configuration bit (PORT.CR2.TLBO) should be low. When TLBO is low, output pulses are driven onto the coaxial
cable without any preattenuation. For cable lengths less than 225ft, TLBO should be high to enable the LBO
circuitry. When TLBO is high, pulses are preattenuated by the LBO circuitry before being driven onto the coaxial
cable. The LBO circuitry provides attenuation that mimics the attenuation of 225ft of coaxial cable.
112
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
The transmitter line driver can be disabled and the TXPn and TXNn outputs tri-stated by asserting the LTS
configuration bit (PORT.CR2.LTS). Powering down the transmitter through the TPD configuration bit (CPU bus
mode) also tri-states the TXPn and TXNn outputs.
10.12.4.3 Interfacing to the Line
The transmitter interfaces to the outgoing DS3/E3 coaxial cable (75Ω) through a 2:1 step-down transformer
connected to the TXPn and TXNn pins. Figure 1-1 shows the arrangement of the transformer and other
recommended interface components. Table 10-33 specifies the required characteristics of the transformer.
10.12.4.4 Transmit Driver Monitor
If the transmit driver monitor detects a faulty transmitter, it sets the PORT.SR.TDM status bit. When the transmitter
is tri-stated, the transmit driver monitor is also disabled. The transmitter is declared to be faulty when the
transmitter outputs see a load of less than ~25Ω.
10.12.4.5 Transmitter Power-Down
To minimize power consumption when the transmitter is not being used, assert the PORT.CR1.PD configuration
bit. When the transmitter is powered down, the TXPn and TXNn pins are put in a high-impedance state and the
transmit amplifiers are powered down.
10.12.4.6 Transmitter Jitter Generation (Intrinsic)
The transmitter meets the jitter generation requirements of all applicable standards, with or without the jitter
attenuator enabled.
10.12.4.7 Transmitter Jitter Transfer
Without the jitter attenuator enabled in the transmit side, the transmitter passes jitter through unchanged. With the
jitter attenuator enabled in the transmit side, the transmitter meets the jitter transfer requirements of all applicable
telecommunication standards. See Table 4-1.
10.12.5 Receiver
10.12.5.1 Interfacing to the Line
The receiver can be transformer-coupled or capacitor-coupled to the line. Typically, the receiver interfaces to the
incoming coaxial cable (75Ω) through a 1:2 step-up transformer. Figure 1-1 shows the arrangement of the
transformer and other recommended interface components. Table 10-33 specifies the required characteristics of
the transformer. Figure 10-32 shows a general overview of the LIU block. The receiver expects the incoming signal
to be in B3ZS- or HDB3-coded AMI format.
Table 10-33. Transformer Characteristics
PARAMETER
Turns Ratio
Bandwidth 75Ω
VALUE
1:2ct ±2%
0.250MHz to 500MHz (typ)
Primary Inductance
19µH (min)
Leakage Inductance
0.12µH (max)
Interwinding Capacitance
Isolation Voltage
10pF (max)
1500VRMS (min)
113
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 10-34. Recommended Transformers
PART
TEMP
RANGE
Pulse Engineering
PE-65968
0°C to +70°C
Pulse Engineering
PE-65969
0°C to +70°C
MANUFACTURER
Halo Electronics
Halo Electronics
TG070206NS
TD070206NE
0°C to +70°C
0°C to +70°C
PIN-PACKAGE/
SCHEMATIC
6 SMT
LS-1/C
6 Thru-Hole
LC-1/C
6 SMT
SMD/B
6 DIP
DIP/B
OCL
PRIMARY
(µH) (min)
LL
(µH)
(max)
BANDWIDTH
75Ω (MHz)
19
0.06
0.250 to 500
19
0.06
0.250 to 500
19
0.06
0.250 to 500
19
0.06
0.250 to 500
Note: Table subject to change. Industrial temperature range and multiport transformers are also available. Contact the manufacturers for details
at www.pulseeng.com and www.haloelectronics.com.
10.12.5.2 Optional Preamp
The receiver can be used in monitoring applications, which typically have series resistors with a resistive loss of
approximately 20dB. When the PORT.CR2.RMON bit is high, the receiver compensates for this resistive loss by
applying flat gain to the incoming signal before sending the signal to the AGC/equalizer block.
10.12.5.3 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) and Adaptive Equalizer
The AGC circuitry applies flat (frequency independent) gain to the incoming signal to compensate for flat losses in
the transmission channel and variations in transmission power. Since the incoming signal also experiences
frequency-dependent losses as it passes through the coaxial cable, the adaptive equalizer circuitry applies
frequency-dependent gain to offset line losses and restore the signal. The AGC/equalizer circuitry automatically
adapts to coaxial cable losses from 0 to 15dB, which translates into 0 to 380 meters (DS3) or 0 to 440 meters (E3)
of coaxial cable (AT&T 734A or equivalent). The AGC and the equalizer work simultaneously but independently to
supply a signal of nominal amplitude and pulse shape to the clock and data recovery block. The AGC/equalizer
block automatically handles direct (0 meters) monitoring of the transmitter output signal.
10.12.5.4 Clock and Data Recovery (CDR)
The CDR block takes the amplified, equalized signal from the AGC/equalizer block and produces a separate clock,
positive data, and negative data signals. The CDR requires a master clock. This clock is derived from CLKA,
CLKB, or CLKC depending on the CLAD configuration (DS3, E3). If, however, there is no clock source on CLKA,
CLKB, or CLKC the CDR block will automatically switch to TCLKIn to use as its master clock.
The receive clock is locked using a clock recovery PLL. The status of the PLL lock is indicated in the RLOL
(PORT.SR) status bit. The receive loss-of-lock status bit (RLOL) is set when the difference between the recovered
clock frequency and the master clock frequency is greater than 7900ppm and cleared when the difference is less
than 7700ppm. A change of state of the PORT.SR.RLOL status bit can cause an interrupt on the INT pin if enabled
to do so by the PORT.SRIE.RLOLIE interrupt-enable bit. Note that if the master clock is not present, or the master
clock is high and TCLK is not present, RLOL is not set.
10.12.5.5 Loss-of-Signal (LOS) Detector
The receiver contains analog and digital LOS detectors. The analog LOS detector resides in the AGC/equalizer
block. If the incoming signal level is less than a signal level approximately 24dB below nominal, analog LOS
(ALOS) is declared. The ALOS signal cannot be directly examined, but when ALOS occurs the AGC/equalizer
mutes the recovered data, forcing all zeros out of the data recovery circuitry and causing digital LOS (DLOS).
DLOS is determined by the Line Decoder block (see 10.10.6) and indicated by the LOS status bit (LINE.RSR.LOS).
ALOS clears when the incoming signal level is greater than or equal to a signal level approximately 18dB below
nominal.
114
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
For E3 LOS Assertion:
The ALOS detector in the AGC/equalizer block detects that the incoming signal is less than or equal to a signal
level approximately 24dB below nominal, and mutes the data coming out of the clock and data recovery block.
(24dB below nominal in the “tolerance range” of G.775, where LOS may or may not be declared.)
For E3 LOS Clear:
The ALOS detector in the AGC/equalizer block detects that the incoming signal is greater than or equal to a signal
level approximately 18dB below nominal, and enables data to come out of the CDR block. (18dB is in the
“tolerance range” of G.775, where LOS may or may not be declared.)
10.12.5.6 Receiver Power-Down
To minimize power consumption when the receiver is not being used, write a one to the PORT.CR1.PD bit. When
the receiver is powered down, the RCLKOn pin is tri-stated. In addition, the RXPn and RXNn pins become high
impedance.
10.12.5.7 Receiver Jitter Tolerance.
The receiver exceeds the input jitter tolerance requirements of all applicable telecommunication standards in Table
4-1. See Figure 10-33.
Figure 10-33. Receiver Jitter Tolerance
JITTER TOLERANCE (UIP-P)
15
10
STS-1 GR253
DS3 GR-499 Cat II
10
DS3 GR-499 Cat I
5
DS317x JITTER TOLERANCE
1.5
E3 G.823
1.0
0.3
0.15
0.1
0.1
30
10
300
100
669
2.3k
1k
FREQUENCY (Hz)
115
22.3k
10k
60k
300k
100k
800k
1M
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
11 OVERALL REGISTER MAP
The register addresses of the global, test, and all four ports are concatenated to cover the address range of 000 to
7FF. The address map requires 11 bits of address, ADR[10:0]. The upper address bit A[10] is decoded for the
DS3174 and DS3173 devices. The upper address bit A[10] it is not used by the DS3172 and DS3171 devices and
must be tied low at the pin.
The register banks that are not marked with an “X” are not writeable and read back all zeros. Bits that are
underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.
After Global Reset, all Registers will be reset to their default values.
When writing to registers with unused bits marked with “—”, always write a zero to these unused bits and
ignore the value read back from these bits.
Configuration registers can be written to and read from during a data path reset (DRST low, and RST high).
However, all changes to these registers will be ignored during the data path reset. As a result, all initiating action
requiring a “0 to 1” transition must be re-initiated after the data path reset is released.
All counters saturate at their maximum count. A counter register is updated by asserting (low to high transition) the
performance monitoring update signal (RPMU). During the counter register update process, the performance
monitoring status signal (RPMS) will be deasserted. The counter register update process consists of loading the
counter register with the current count, resetting the counter, forcing the zero count status indication low for one
clock period, and then asserting RPMS. No events shall be missed during an update procedure.
A latched bit is set when the associated event occurs, and remains set until it is cleared. Once cleared, a latched
bit will not be set again until the associated event reoccurs (goes away and comes back). A latched on change bit
is a latched bit that is set when the event occurs, and when it goes away. A latched status bit can be cleared using
clear on read or clear on write techniques, selectable by the GL.CR1.LSBCRE bit. When clear on read is selected,
the latched bits in a latched status register will be cleared after the register is read from. If the device is configured
for 16-bit mode, all 16 latched status bits will be cleared. If the device is configured for 8-bit mode, only the 8 bits
being accessed will be cleared. When clear on write is selected, the latched bits in a latched status register will be
cleared when a logic 1 is written to that bit position. For example, writing a FFFFh to a 16-bit latched status register
will clear any latched status bit, whereas writing a 0001h will only clear latched bit 0 of the latched status register.
Reserved bits and registers are implemented in a different mode. Reserved configuration bits and registers can be
written and read, however they will not effect the operation of the current mode. Reserved status bits will be zero.
Reserved latched status bits cannot be set, however, they may remain set or get set during a mode change.
Reserved interrupt enable bits can be written and read, and can cause an interrupt if the associated latched status
bit is set. Reserved counter registers and the associated counter will retain the values held before a mode change,
however, the associated counter cannot be incremented. A performance monitor update will operate normally. If
the data path reset is set during or after a mode change, the latched status bits and counter registers (with the
associated counters) will be automatically cleared. If the data path reset is not used, then the latched status bits
must be cleared via the register interface in the normal manner. And, the counter registers must be cleared by
performing two performance monitor updates. The first to clear the associated counter, and load the current count
into the counter register, and the second to clear the counter register.
116
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 11-1. Global and Test Register Address Map
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
000–01F
Global registers, Section 12.1
020–02F
Unused
030–03F
Reserved
040–1FF
Port 1 Register Map
200–23F
Test Registers
240–3FF
Port 2 Register Map
400–43F
Test Registers
440–5FF
Port 3 Register Map
600–63F
Unused
640–6FF
Port 4 Register Map
Each port has a relative address range of 040h to 1FFh. The lower 000h to 03Fh address range is used for global,
test and reserved registers. The following table is a map of the registers for each port. The address offset is from
the start of each port range of 000h, 200h, 400h, and 600h. In a DS3183, writes to registers in port 4 will be
ignored and reads from port 4 registers will read back zero values. Similarly, in a DS3181, writes to registers in port
2 will be ignored and reads from port 2 will read back zero values.
Note: The RDY signal will not go active if the user attempts to read or write unused ports or unused registers not
assigned to any design blocks. The RDY signal will go active if the user writes or reads reserved registers or
unused registers within design blocks.
117
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 11-2. Per Port Register Address Map
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
040 to 1FF
240 to 3FF
440 to 5FF
640 to 7FF
ADDRESS
OFFSET
DESCRIPTION
040–05F
Port common registers
060–07F
BERT
080–08B
Reserved
08C–08F
B3ZS/HDB3 transmit line encoder
090–09F
B3ZS/HDB3 receive line decoder
0A0–0AF
HDLC Transmit
0B0–0BF
HDLC Receive
0C0–0CF
FEAC Transmit
0D0–0DF
FEAC Receive
0E0–0E7
Reserved
0E8–0EF
Trail Trace Transmit
0F0–0FF
Trail Trace Receive
100–117
Reserved
118–11F
DS3/E3 Framer Transmit
120–13F
DS3/E3 Framer Receive
140–1FF
Reserved
118
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12 REGISTER MAPS AND DESCRIPTIONS
12.1 Registers Bit Maps
Note: In 8-bit mode, register bits[15:8] correspond to the upper byte, and register bits[7:0] correspond to the lower
byte. For example, address 001h is the upper byte (bits [15:8]) and address 000h is the lower byte (bits [7:0]) for
register GL.IDR in 8-bit mode.
All registers listed, including those designated Unused and Reserved, will cause the RDY signal to go low when
written to or read from.
The “—“ designation indicates that the bit is not assigned.
12.1.1 Global Register Bit Map
Table 12-1. Global Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
000
000
001
002
002
003
004
004
005
006- 006008 009
00A
00A
00B
00C
00C
00D
010
010
011
012
012
013
014
014
015
016
016
017
018
018
019
01A
01A
01B
01C
01C
01D
01E
01E
01F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
GL.IDR
R
GL.CR1
RW
GL.CR2
RW
UNUSED
GL.GIOCR
RW
UNUSED
GL.ISR
R
GL.ISRIE
RW
GL.SR
R
GL.SRL
RL
GL.SRIE
R
UNUSED
GL.GIORR
UNUSED
R
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 5
Bit 13
ID7
ID15
TMEI
GWRM
--
ID6
ID14
MEIMS
INTM
--
ID5
ID13
GPM1
RES
--
--
--
--
Bit 4
Bit 12
ID4
ID12
GPM0
---
Bit 3
Bit 11
ID3
ID11
PMU
RES
CLAD3
Bit 2
Bit 10
ID2
ID10
LSBCRE
RES
CLAD2
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
ID1
ID9
RSTDP
RES
CLAD1
ID0
ID8
RST
RES
CLAD0
G8KRS2 G8KRS1 G8KRS0 G8K0S
G8KIS
--------------GPIO4S1 GPIO4S0 GPIO3S1 GPIO3S0 GPIO2S1 GPIO2S0 GPIO1S1
GPIO8S1 GPIO8S0 GPIO7S1 GPIO7S0 GPIO6S1 GPIO6S0 GPIO5S1
--------------PISR4
PISR3
PISR2
PISR1
--RES
-------PISRIE4 PISRIE3 PISRIE2 PISRIE1
--RES
-------------CLOL
----------8KREFL CLADL
ONESL
CLOLL
------------ONESIE CLOLIE
----------------------
--GPIO1S0
GPIO5S0
--GSR
-GSRIE
-GPMS
-GPMSL
-GPMSIE
----
GPIO8
GPIO7
GPIO6
GPIO5
GPIO4
GPIO3
GPIO2
GPIO1
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
119
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 12-2. Port Register Bit Map
Note: J and K are variable dependent upon port.
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
J
0
2
4
6
K
1
3
5
7
Address
16-bit 8-bit
J40
J40
J41
J42
J42
J43
J44
J44
J45
J46
J46
J47
J48
J48
J49
J4A
J4A
J4B
J4C
J4C
J4D
J4E
J4E
J4F
J50
J50
J51
J52
J52
J53
J54
J54
J55
J56
J56
J57
J58- J58J5E J5F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
PORT.CR1
RW
PORT.CR2
RW
PORT.CR3
RW
PORT.CR4
RW
UNUSED
PORT.INV1
RW
PORT.INV2
RW
UNUSED
PORT.ISR
R
PORT.SR
R
PORT.SRL
RL
PORT.SRIE
RW
UNUSED
TMEI
RES
RES
TLEN
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 5
Bit 13
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
MEIM
PAIS2
RES
TTS
-PMUM
PMU
PAIS1
PAIS0
LAIS1
FM2
FM1
FM0
RMON
TLBO
RES
P8KRS1 P8KRS0 P8KREF LOOPT CLADC
--RCLKS RSOFOS
RES
GPIOB3 GPIOB2 GPIOB1 GPIOB0 GPIOA3
RES
--------------TOHI
TOHCKI TSOFII
TNEGI
TDATI
RES
RES
-TSOFOI
RES
ROHI
ROHCKI
-RNEGI
RPOSI
-RES
RES
RSOFOI
-----------TTSR
FSR
HSR
BSR
RES
---------------RLCLKA TCLKIA
-----------------------------
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
PD
LAIS0
RES
LM2
RFTS
TCLKS
GPIOA2
RSTDP
BENA
RES
LM1
TFTS
TSOFOS
GPIOA1
RST
RES
RES
LM0
TLTS
RES
GPIOA0
LBM2
LBM1
LBM0
--TLCKI
TSERI
RLCKI
RSERI
--RES
-TDM
-TDML
-TDMIE
----
--TCKOI
TOHSI
RCLKOI
ROHSI
--RES
PSR
RLOL
-RLOLL
-RLOLIE
----
--TCKII
TOHEI
----FMSR
LCSR
PMS
-PMSL
-PMSIE
----
Table 12-3. BERT Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
J60
J60
J61
J62
J62
J63
J64
J64
J65
J66
J66
J67
J68
J68
J69
J6A
J6A
J6B
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
BERT.CR
RW
BERT.PCR
RW
BERT.SPR1
RW
BERT.SPR2
RW
BERT.TEICR
RW
UNUSED
PMUM
---BSP7
BSP15
BSP23
BSP31
-----
Bit 6
Bit 14
LPMU
-QRSS
-BSP6
BSP14
BSP22
BSP30
-----
Bit 5
Bit 13
RNPL
-PTS
-BSP5
BSP13
BSP21
BSP29
TEIR2
----
120
Bit 4
Bit 12
RPIC
-PLF4
PTF4
BSP4
BSP12
BSP20
BSP28
TEIR1
----
Bit 3
Bit 11
MPR
-PLF3
PTF3
BSP3
BSP11
BSP19
BSP27
TEIR0
----
Bit 2
Bit 10
APRD
-PLF2
PTF2
BSP2
BSP10
BSP18
BSP26
BEI
----
Bit 1
Bit 9
TNPL
-PLF1
PTF1
BSP1
BSP9
BSP17
BSP25
TSEI
----
Bit 0
Bit 8
TPIC
-PLF0
PTF0
BSP0
BSP8
BSP16
BSP24
MEIMS
----
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Address
16-bit 8-bit
J6C
J6C
J6D
J6E
J6E
J6F
J70
J70
J71
J72
J72
J73
J74
J74
J75
J76
J76
J77
J78
J78
J79
J7A
J7A
J7B
J7C- J7C
J7E J7F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
BERT.SR
R
BERT.SRL
RL
BERT.SRIE
RW
UNUSED
BERT.RBECR1
R
BERT.RBECR2
R
BERT.RBCR1
R
BERT.RBCR2
R
UNUSED
--------BEC7
BEC15
BEC23
-BC7
BC15
BC23
BC31
---
Bit 6
Bit 14
--------BEC6
BEC14
BEC22
-BC6
BC14
BC22
BC30
---
Bit 5
Bit 13
--------BEC5
BEC13
BEC21
-BC5
BC13
BC21
BC29
---
Bit 4
Bit 12
--------BEC4
BEC12
BEC20
-BC4
BC12
BC20
BC28
---
Bit 3
Bit 11
PMS
-PMSL
-PMSIE
---BEC3
BEC11
BEC19
-BC3
BC11
BC19
BC27
---
Bit 2
Bit 10
--BEL
-BEIE
---BEC2
BEC10
BEC18
-BC2
BC10
BC18
BC26
---
Bit 1
Bit 9
BEC
-BECL
-BECIE
---BEC1
BEC9
BEC17
-BC1
BC9
BC17
BC25
---
Bit 0
Bit 8
OOS
-OOSL
-OOSIE
---BEC0
BEC8
BEC16
-BC0
BC8
BC16
BC24
---
Table 12-4. Line Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
J8C
J8C
J8D
J8E
J8E
J8F
J90
J90
J91
J92
J92
J93
J94
J94
J95
J96
J96
J97
J98
J98
J99
J9A
J9A
J9B
J9C
J9C
J9D
J9E
J9E
J9F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
LINE.TCR
RW
UNUSED
LINE.RCR
RW
UNUSED
LINE.RSR
R
LINE.RSRL
RL
LINE.RSRIE
RW
UNUSED
LINE.RBPVCR
R
LINE.REXZCR
R
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 5
Bit 13
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
--------------
--------------
----------ZSCDL
-ZSCDIE
TZSD
---------EXZL
-EXZIE
EXZI
---E3CVE
---EXZC
-EXZCL
-EXZCIE
BPVI
---REZSF
-----BPVL
-BPVIE
TSEI
---RDZSF
---BPVC
-BPVCL
-BPVCIE
MEIMS
---RZSD
---LOS
-LOSL
-LOSIE
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
BPV7
BPV15
EXZ7
EXZ15
BPV6
BPV14
EXZ6
EXZ14
BPV5
BPV13
EXZ5
EXZ13
BPV4
BPV12
EXZ4
EXZ12
BPV3
BPV11
EXZ3
EXZ11
BPV2
BPV10
EXZ2
EXZ10
BPV1
BPV9
EXZ1
EXZ9
BPV0
BPV8
EXZ0
EXZ8
121
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.1.2 HDLC Register Bit Map
Table 12-5. HDLC Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
JA0
JA0
JA1
JA2
JA2
JA3
JA4
JA4
JA5
JA6
JA6
JA7
JA8
JA8
JA9
JAA- JAA
JAE JAF
JB0
JB0
JB1
JB2
JB2
JB3
JB4
JB4
JB5
JB6
JB6
JB7
JB8
JB8
JB9
JBA
JBA
JBB
JBC
JBC
JBD
JBE
JBE
JBF
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
HDLC.TCR
RW
HDLC.TFDR
RW
HDLC.TSR
R
HDLC.TSRL
RL
HDLC.TSRIE
RW
UNUSED
HDLC.RCR
RW
UNUSED
HDLC.RSR
R
HDLC.RSRL
RL
HDLC.RSRIE
RW
UNUSED
HDLC.RFDR
UNUSED
R
---TFD7
--------------RFOL
-RFOIE
----RFD7
---
Bit 6
Bit 14
TPSD
--TFD6
---------------------RFD6
---
Bit 5
Bit 13
TFEI
--TFD5
-TFFL5
TFOL
-TFOIE
----------------RFD5
---
Bit 4
Bit 12
TIFV
TDAL4
-TFD4
-TFFL4
TFUL
-TFUIE
----RDAL4
----RPEL
-RPEIE
----RFD4
---
Bit 3
Bit 11
TBRE
TDAL3
-TFD3
-TFFL3
TPEL
-TPEIE
---RBRE
RDAL3
----RPSL
-RPSIE
---RPS2
RFD3
---
Bit 2
Bit 10
TDIE
TDAL2
-TFD2
TFF
TFFL2
------RDIE
RDAL2
--RFF
-RFFL
-RFFIE
---RPS1
RFD2
---
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
TFPD
TFRST
TDAL1
TDAL0
-TDPE
TFD1
TFD0
TFE
THDA
TFFL1
TFFL0
TFEL
THDAL
--TFEIE
THDAIE
------RFPD
RFRST
RDAL1
RDAL0
----RFE
RHDA
---RHDAL
---RHDAIE
------RPS0
RFDV
RFD1
RFD0
-----
Table 12-6. FEAC Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
JC0
JC0
JC1
JC2
JC2
JC3
JC4
JC4
JC5
JC6
JC6
JC7
JC8
JC8
JC9
JCA- JCA
JCE JCF
Register
FEAC.TCR
FEAC.TFDR
FEAC.TSR
FEAC.TSRL
FEAC.TSRIE
UNUSED
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
-RW
--RW
--R
--RL
--RW
----
Bit 6
Bit 14
-------------
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
---TFCL
TFS1
TFS0
------TFCA5 TFCA4 TFCA3 TFCA2 TFCA1 TFCA0
TFCB5 TFCB4 TFCB3 TFCB2 TFCB1 TFCB0
-----TFI
-----------TFIL
-----------TFIIE
-------------------
122
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Address
16-bit 8-bit
JD0
JD0
JD1
JD2
JD2
JD3
JD4
JD4
JD5
JD6
JD6
JD7
JD8
JD8
JD9
JDA
JDA
JDB
JDC
JDC
JDD
JDE
JDE
JDF
Register
FEAC.RCR
UNUSED
FEAC.RSR
FEAC.RSRL
FEAC.RSRIE
UNUSED
FEAC.RFDR
UNUSED
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
-RW
----R
--RL
--RW
---RFFI
R
----
Bit 6
Bit 14
-----------------
Bit 5
Bit 13
------------RFF5
----
Bit 4
Bit 12
------------RFF4
----
Bit 3
Bit 11
----RFFE
-------RFF3
----
Bit 2
Bit 10
------RFFOL
-RFFOIE
---RFF2
----
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 9
Bit 8
-RFR
------RFCD
RFI
--RFCDL
RFIL
--RFCDIE RFIIE
------RFF1
RFF0
-------
Bit 5
Bit 13
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
--Reserved
-TTD5
---Reserved
-Reserved
Reserved
--------RTD5
-ETD5
----
Reserved
-Reserved
-TTD4
---Reserved
-Reserved
Reserved
--------RTD4
-ETD4
----
Table 12-7. Trail Trace Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
JE8
JE8
JE9
JEA
JEA
JEB
JEC
JEC
JED
JEE
JEE
JEF
JF0
JF0
JF1
JF2
JF2
JF3
JF4
JF4
JF5
JF6
JF6
JF7
JF8
JF8
JF9
JFA
JFA
JFB
JFC
JFC
JFD
JFE
JFE
JFF
K00- K00K16 K117
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
TT.TCR
RW
TT.TTIAR
R
TT.TIR
R
UNUSED
TT.RCR
RW
TT.RTIAR
R
TT.RSR
R
TT.RSRL
RL
TT.RSRIE
RW
UNUSED
TT.RIR
R
TT.EIR
R
RESERVED
----TTD7
---------------RTD7
-ETD7
----
Bit 6
Bit 14
----TTD6
---------------RTD6
-ETD6
----
123
TMAD
-TTIA3
-TTD3
---RMAD
-RTIA3
ETIA3
--RTICL
-RTICIE
---RTD3
-ETD3
----
TIDLE
-TTIA2
-TTD2
---RETCD
-RTIA2
ETIA2
RTIM
-RTIML
-RTIMIE
---RTD2
-ETD2
----
TDIE
-TTIA1
-TTD1
---RDIE
-RTIA1
ETIA1
RTIU
-RTIUL
-RTIUIE
---RTD1
-ETD1
----
Bit 0
Bit 8
TBRE
-TTIA0
-TTD0
---RBRE
-RTIA0
ETIA0
RIDL
-RIDLL
-RIDLIE
---RTD0
-ETD0
----
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.1.3 T3 Register Bit Map
Table 12-8. T3 Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
K18
K18
K19
K1A
K1A
K1B
K1C- K1C
K1E K1F
K20
K20
K21
K22
K22
K23
K24
K24
K25
K26
K26
K27
K28
K28
K29
K2A
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2E
K2F
K30- K30
K32 K33
K34
K34
K35
K36
K36
K37
K38
K38
K39
K3A
K3A
K3B
K3C- K3C
K3E K3F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
T3.TCR
RW
T3.TEIR
RW
RESERVED
T3.RCR
RW
RESERVED
T3.RSR1
R
T3.RSR2
R
T3.RSRL1
RL
T3.RSRL2
RL
T3.RSRIE1
RW
T3.RSRIE2
RW
RESERVED
T3.RFECR
R
T3.RPECR
R
T3.RFBECR
R
T3.RCPECR
R
UNUSED
--Reserved
---RAILE
Reserved
--OOMF
Reserved
--OOMFL
Reserved
--OOMFIE
Reserved
----FE7
FE15
PE7
PE15
FBE7
FBE15
CPE7
CPE15
---
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 5
Bit 13
Bit 4
Bit 12
--CPEIE
---RAILD
COVHD
--SEF
Reserved
--SEFL
Reserved
--SEFIE
Reserved
----FE6
FE14
PE6
PE14
FBE6
FBE14
CPE6
CPE14
---
TFEBE
-PEI
---RAIOD
MAOD
------COFAL
Reserved
--COFAIE
Reserved
----FE5
FE13
PE5
PE13
FBE5
FBE13
CPE5
CPE13
---
AFEBED
PBGE
FEIC1
---RAIAD
MDAISI
--LOF
Reserved
--LOFL
Reserved
--LOFIE
Reserved
----FE4
FE12
PE4
PE12
FBE4
FBE12
CPE4
CPE12
---
Bit 5
Bit 13
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
TRDI
TIDLE
FEIC0
CCPEIE
--ROMD
AAISD
--RAI
T3FM
CPEC
-RAIL
T3FML
CPECL
CPEL
RAIIE
T3FMIE
CPECIE
CPEIE
--FE3
FE11
PE3
PE11
FBE3
FBE11
CPE3
CPE11
---
Bit 2
Bit 10
ARDID
CBGD
FEI
CPEI
--LIP1
ECC
--AIS
AIC
FBEC
-AISL
AICL
FBECL
FBEL
AISIE
AICIE
FBECIE
FBEIE
--FE2
FE10
PE2
PE10
FBE2
FBE10
CPE2
CPE10
---
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
TFGD
TAIS
--TSEI
MEIMS
CFBEIE
FBEI
----LIP0
FRSYNC
FECC1
FECC0
----OOF
LOS
IDLE
RUA1
PEC
FEC
--OOFL
LOSL
IDLEL
RUA1L
PECL
FECL
PEL
FEL
OOFIE
LOSIE
IDLEIE RUA1IE
PECIE
FECIE
PEIE
FEIE
----FE1
FE0
FE9
FE8
PE1
PE0
PE9
PE8
FBE1
FBE0
FBE9
FBE8
CPE1
CPE0
CPE9
CPE8
-----
12.1.4 E3 G.751 Register Bit Map
Table 12-9. E3 G.751 Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
K18
K18
K19
K1A
K1A
K1B
K1C- K1C
K1E K1F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
E3G751.TCR
RW
E3G751.TEIR
RW
RESERVED
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
--Reserved Reserved TABC1
TABC0
TFGD
TAIS
Reserved
--Reserved Reserved Reserved TNBC1
TNBC0
Reserved Reserved Reserved FEIC1
FEIC0
FEI
TSEI
MEIMS
----Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
-----------------
124
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Address
16-bit 8-bit
K20
K20
K21
K22
K22
K23
K24
K24
K25
K26
K26
K27
K28
K28
K29
K2A
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2E
K2F
K30- K30
K32 K33
K34
K34
K35
K36- K36K3A K3B
K3C- K3CK3E K3F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
E3G751.RCR
RW
RESERVED
E3G751.RSR1
R
E3G751.RSR2
R
E3G751.RSRL1
RL
E3G751.RSRL2
RL
E3G751.RSRIE1
RW
E3G751.RSRIE2 RW
RESERVED
E3G751.RFECR
R
RESERVED
UNUSED
Bit 6
Bit 14
RAILE
RAILD
Reserved Reserved
----RAB
RNB
Reserved Reserved
---
--
Bit 5
Bit 13
RAIOD
DLS
------
--
--
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
RAIAD
ROMD
LIP1
LIP0
FRSYNC
MDAISI
AAISD
ECC
FECC1
FECC0
----------LOF
RAI
AIS
OOF
LOS
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved RUA1
-Reserved Reserved Reserved
FEC
--
--
--
ACL
NCL
COFAL
LOFL
RAIL
AISL
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
----Reserved Reserved
----Reserved Reserved
ACIE
NCIE
COFAIE
LOFIE
RAIIE
AISIE
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
----Reserved Reserved
----Reserved Reserved
------------FE7
FE6
FE5
FE4
FE3
FE2
FE15
FE14
FE13
FE12
FE11
FE10
-------------------------
--
--
OOFL
LOSL
Reserved RUA1L
Reserved FECL
Reserved
FEL
OOFIE
LOSIE
Reserved RUA1IE
Reserved FECIE
Reserved
FEIE
----FE1
FE0
FE9
FE8
---------
12.1.5 E3 G.832 Register Bit Map
Table 12-10. E3 G.832 Register Bit Map
Address
16-bit 8-bit
K18
K18
K19
K1A
K1A
K1B
K1C
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1E
K1F
K20
K20
K21
K22
K22
K23
K24
K24
K25
K26
K26
K27
K28
K28
K29
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
E3G832.TCR
RW
E3G832.TEIR
RW
E3G832.TMABR
RW
E3G832.TNGBR
RW
E3G832.RCR
RW
E3G832.RMACR RW
E3G832.RSR1
R
E3G832.RSR2
R
E3G832.RSRL1
RL
Bit 6
Bit 14
--Reserved
-PBEE
CPEIE
--TPT2
TPT1
--TNR7
TNR6
TGC7
TGC6
RDILE
RDILD
Reserved
PEC
----Reserved Reserved
Reserved
-----GCL
NRL
Reserved
--
Bit 5
Bit 13
TFEBE
-PEI
-TPT0
-TNR5
TGC5
RDIOD
DLS
------COFAL
TIL
125
Bit 4
Bit 12
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
AFEBED
Reserved
FEIC1
-TTIGD
-TNR4
TGC4
RDIAD
MDAISI
--LOF
RPTU
--LOFL
RPTUL
TRDI
ARDID
TFGD
TAIS
Reserved TGCC
TNRC1 TNRC0
FEIC0
FEI
TSEI
MEIMS
Reserved Reserved CFBEIE
FBEI
TTI3
TTI2
TTI1
TTI0
----TNR3
TNR2
TNR1
TNR0
TGC3
TGC2
TGC1
TGC0
ROMD
LIP1
LIP0
FRSYNC
AAISD
ECC
FECC1
FECC0
EPT2
EPT1
EPT0
TIED
----RAI
AIS
OOF
LOS
RPTM Reserved Reserved RUA1
Reserved FBEC
PEC
FEC
----RAIL
AISL
OOFL
LOSL
RPTML
RPTL Reserved RUA1L
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Address
16-bit 8-bit
K2A
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2E
K2F
K30
K30
K31
K32
K32
K33
K34
K34
K35
K36
K36
K37
K38
K38
K39
K3A
K3A
K3B
K3C- K3CK3E K3F
Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 15
E3G832.RSRL2
RL
E3G832.RSRIE1 RW
E3G832.RSRIE2 RW
E3G832.RMABR R
E3G832.RNGBR R
E3G832.RFECR
R
E3G832.RPECR
R
E3G832.RFBER
R
RESERVED
UNUSED
--GCIE
Reserved
----RNR7
RGC7
FE7
FE15
PE7
PE15
FBE7
FBE15
-----
Bit 6
Bit 14
Bit 5
Bit 13
--NRIE
---RPT2
-RNR6
RGC6
FE6
FE14
PE6
PE14
FBE6
FBE14
-----
--COFAIE
TIIE
--RPT1
-RNR5
RGC5
FE5
FE13
PE5
PE13
FBE5
FBE13
-----
Bit 4
Bit 12
--LOFIE
RPTUIE
--RPT0
-RNR4
RGC4
FE4
FE12
PE4
PE12
FBE4
FBE12
-----
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
Reserved FBECL
PECL
FECL
Reserved FBEL
PEL
FEL
RAIIE
AISIE
OOFIE
LOSIE
RPTMIE RPTIE Reserved RUA1IE
Reserved FBECIE
PECIE
FECIE
Reserved FBEIE
PEIE
FEIE
TI3
TI2
TI1
TI0
----RNR3
RNR2
RNR1
RNR0
RGC3
RGC2
RGC1
RGC0
FE3
FE2
FE1
FE0
FE11
FE10
FE9
FE8
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
PE11
PE10
PE9
PE8
FBE3
FBE2
FBE1
FBE0
FBE11
FBE10
FBE9
FBE8
-----------------
12.1.6 Clear Channel Register Bit Map
Table 12-11. Clear Channel Register Bit Map
Address Register
Type Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
16-bit 8-bit
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
--Reserved Reserved
K18
K18
CC.TCR
RW
Reserved
--Reserved
K19
----K1A- K1A
RESERVED
K1E K1F
----Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
K20
K20
CC.RCR
RW
Reserved Reserved Reserved MDAISI
K21
----K22
K22
RESERVED
----K23
Reserved Reserved
-Reserved
K24
K24
CC.RSR1
R
Reserved Reserved
-Reserved
K25
----K26
K26
RESERVED
----K27
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
K28
K28
CC.RSRL1
RL
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
K29
----K2A
K2A
RESERVED
----K2B
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
K2C
K2C
CC.RSRIE1
RW
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
K2D
----K2E- K2ERESERVED
K3A K3B
--------K3C- K3CUNUSED
K3E K3F
----Bits that are underlined are read-only; all other bits are read-write.
126
Bit 3
Bit 11
Bit 2
Bit 10
Bit 1
Bit 9
Bit 0
Bit 8
Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
AAISD
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
-----
Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
-----
Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
-----
TAIS
Reserved
--Reserved
Reserved
--LOS
RUA1
--LOSL
RUA1L
--LOSIE
RUA1IE
-----
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.2 Global Registers
Table 12-12. Global Register Map
Address
000h
002h
004h
006h
008h
00Ah
00Ch
00Eh
010h
012h
014h
016h
018h
01Ah
01Ch
01Eh
Register
GL.IDR
GL.CR1
GL.CR2
--GL.GIOCR
--GL.ISR
GL.ISRIE
GL.SR
GL.SRL
GL.SRIE
-GL.GIORR
--
Register Description
Global ID Register
Global Control Register 1
Global Control Register 2
Unused
Unused
Global General-Purpose IO Control Register
Unused
Unused
Global Interrupt Status Register
Global Interrupt Enable Register
Global Status Register
Global Status Register Latched
Global Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Global General-Purpose IO read register
Unused
12.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.IDR
Global ID Register
000h
Bit #
Name
15
ID15
14
ID14
13
ID13
12
ID12
11
ID11
10
ID10
9
ID9
8
ID8
Bit #
Name
7
ID7
6
ID6
5
ID5
4
ID4
3
ID3
2
ID2
1
ID1
0
ID0
Bits 15 to 12: Device REV ID Bits 15 to 12 (ID15 to ID12). These bits of the device ID register has same
information as the four bits of JTAG REV ID portion of the JTAG ID register. JTAG ID[31:28].
Bits 11 to 0: Device CODE ID Bits 11 to 0 (ID11 to ID0). These bits of the device code ID register has same
information as the lower 12 bits of JTAG CODE ID portion of the JTAG ID register. JTAG ID[23:12].
127
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.CR1
Global Control Register 1
002h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
GWRM
0
14
INTM
0
RESERVED
13
11
10
9
8
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
0
12
-0
0
0
0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
TMEI
0
6
MEIMS
0
5
GPM1
0
4
GPM0
0
3
PMU
0
2
LSBCRE
0
1
RSTDP
1
0
RST
0
Bit 15: Global Write Mode (GWRM) This bit enables the global write mode. When this bit is set, a write to the
register of any port will write to the same register in all the ports. Reading the registers of any port is not supported
and will read back undefined data.
0 = Normal write mode
1 = Global write mode
Bit 14: INT pin mode (INTM) This bit determines the inactive mode of the INT pin. The INT pin always drives low
when active.
0 = Pin is high impedance when not active
1 = Pin drives high when not active
Bit 7: Transmit Manual Error Insert (TMEI) This bit is used insert an error in all ports configured for global error
insertion. An error(s) is inserted at the next opportunity when this bit transitions from low to high. The
GL.CR1.MEIMS bit must be clear for this bit to operate.
Bit 6: Transmit Manual Error Insert Select (MEIMS) This bit is used to select the source of the global manual
error insertion signal
0 = Global error insertion using TMEI bit
1 = Global error insertion using the GPIO6 pin
Bits 5 and 4: Global Performance Monitor Update Mode (GPM[1:0]) These bits select the global performance
monitor register update mode.
00 = Global PM update using the PMU bit
01 = Global PM update using the GPIO8 pin
1x = One second PM update using the internal one second counter
Bit 3: Global Performance Monitor Update Register (PMU) This bit is used to update all of the performance
monitor registers configured to use this bit. When this bit is toggled from low to high the performance registers
configured to use this signal will be updated with the latest count value from the counters, and the counters will be
reset. The bit should remain high until the performance register update status bit (GL.SR.PMS) goes high, then it
should be brought back low which clears the PMS status bit.
Bit 2: Latched Status Bit Clear on Read Enable (LSBCRE). This signal determines when latched status register
bits are cleared.
0 = Latched status register bits are cleared on a write
1 = Latched status register bits are cleared on a read
Bit 1: Reset Data Path (RSTDP). When this bit is set, it will force all of the internal data path registers in all ports
to their default state. This bit must be set high for a minimum of 100ns. See the Reset and Power-Down section in
Section 10.3. Note: The default state is a 1 (after a general reset, this bit will be set to one).
0 = Normal operation
1 = Force all data path registers to their default values
128
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 0: Reset (RST). When this bit is set, all of the internal data path and status and control registers (except this
RST bit), on all of the ports, will be reset to their default state. This bit must be set high for a minimum of 100ns.
See the Reset and Power-Down section in Section 10.3.
0 = Normal operation
1 = Force all internal registers to their default values
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.CR2
Global Control Register 2
004h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
G8KRS2
0
11
G8KRS1
0
10
G8KRS0
0
9
G8K0S
0
8
G8KIS
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
CLAD3
0
2
CLAD2
0
1
CLAD1
0
0
CLAD0
0
Bits 12 to 10: Global 8KHz Reference Source [2:0] (G8KRS[2:0]). These bits determine the source for the
internally generated 8 kHz reference as well as the internal one second reference, which is derived from the Global
8 kHz reference. The source is selected from one of the CLAD clocks or from one of the port 8KREF clock sources.
These bits are ignored when the G8KIS bit = 1. See Table 10-12.
Bit 9: Global 8KHz Reference Output Select (G8KOS). This bit determines whether GPIO2 pin is used for the
global 8KREFO output signal, or is used as specified by GL.GIOCR.GPIO2S[1:0].
0 = GPIO2 pin mode selected by GL.GIOCR.GPIO2S[1:0]
1 = GPIO2 is the global 8KREFO output signal selected by GL.CR2.8KRS[2:0]
Bit 8: Global 8KHz Reference Input Select (G8KIS). This bit determines whether GPIO4 pin is used for the global
8KREFI input signal, or is used as specified by GL.GIOCR.GPIO4S[1:0]. G8KREFI signal will be low if not
selected. Global 8KREF pin signal will be low if not selected.
0 = GPIO4 pin mode selected by GL.GIOCR.GPIO4S[1:0]
1 = GPIO4 is the global 8KREFI input signal for one second timer and ports to use
Bits 3 to 0: CLAD IO Mode [3:0] (CLAD[3:0]). These bits control the CLAD clock IO pins CLKA, CLKB and CLKC.
Note: These bits control which clock is used to recover the RX Clock from the line in the LIU. See Table 10-11.
129
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.GIOCR
Global General-Purpose IO Control Register
00Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
GPIO8S1
0
14
GPIO8S0
0
13
GPIO7S1
0
12
GPIO7S0
0
11
GPIO6S1
0
10
GPIO6S0
0
9
GPIO5S1
0
8
GPIO5S0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
GPIO4S1
0
6
GPIO4S0
0
5
GPIO3S1
0
4
GPIO3S0
0
3
GPIO2S1
0
2
GPIO2S0
0
1
GPIO1S1
0
0
GPIO1S0
0
Bits 15 to 14: General-Purpose IO 8 Select [1:0] (GPIO8S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO8
pin. These selections are only valid if GL.CR1.GPM[1:0] is not set to 01.
00 = Input
01 = Port 4 B status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOB[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 13 to 12: General-Purpose IO 7 Select [1:0] (GPIO7S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO7
pin.
00 = Input
01 = Port 4 A status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOA[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 11 to 10: General-Purpose IO 6 Select [1:0] (GPIO6S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO6
pin. These selections are only valid if GL.CR1.MEIMS=0.
00 = Input
01 = Port 3 B status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOB[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 9 to 8: General-Purpose IO 5 Select [1:0] (GPIO5S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO5
pin.
00 = Input
01 = Port 3 A status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOA[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 7 to 6: General-Purpose IO 4 Select [1:0] (GPIO4S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO4
pin. These selections are only valid if GL.CR2 .G8KRIS=0.
00 = Input
01 = Port 2 B status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOB[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 5 to 4: General-Purpose IO 3 Select [1:0] (GPIO3S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO3
pin.
00 = Input
01 = Port 2 A status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOA[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 3 to 2: General-Purpose IO 2 Select [1:0] (GPIO2S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO2
pin. These selections are only valid if GL.CR2.GKROS=0.
00 = Input
01 = Port 1 B status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOB[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
130
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
11 = Output logic 1
Bits 1 to 0: General-Purpose IO 1 Select [1:0] (GPIO1S[1:0]). These bits determine the function of the GPIO1
pin.
00 = Input
01 = Port 1 A status output selected by PORT.CR4:GPIOA[3:0] in port control registers
10 = Output logic 0
11 = Output logic 1
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.ISR
Global Interrupt Status Register
010h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
PISR4
6
PISR3
5
PISR2
4
PISR1
3
--
2
--
1
RESERVED
0
GSR
Bits 7 to 4: Port Interrupt Status Register [4:1] (PISR[4:1] ) The corresponding bit is set when any of the bits in
the port interrupt status registers (PORT.ISR) are set. The INT interrupt pin will be driven low when any bit is set
and the corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] interrupt enable bit is enabled.
Bit 0: Global Status Register Interrupt Status (GSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits in
the global latched status register (GL.SRL) are set and enabled for interrupt. The INT interrupt pin will be driven low
when this bit is set and the GL.ISRIE.GSRIE interrupt enable bit is enabled.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.ISRIE
Global Interrupt Status Register Interrupt Enable
012h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
PISRIE4
0
6
PISRIE3
0
5
PISRIE2
0
4
PISRIE1
0
3
-0
2
-0
1
RESERVED
0
GSRIE
0
0
Bits 7 to 4: Port Interrupt Status Register Interrupt Enable [4:1] (PISRIE[4:1]) When any interrupt enable bit in
this group is enabled corresponding to a status bit set in the GL.ISR.PISR[4:1] status bit group, the INT pin will be
driven low.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Global Status Register Interrupt Status Interrupt Enable (GSRIE) When this interrupt enable bit is
enabled, and the GL.ISR.GSR status bit is set, the INT pin will be driven low.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
131
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.SR
Global Status Register
014h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
--
1
CLOL
0
GPMS
Bit 1 : CLAD Loss of Lock (CLOL) – This bit is set when any of the PLLs in the CLAD are not locked to the
reference frequency.
Bit 0: Global Performance Monitoring Update Status (GPMS) This bit is set when all of the port performance
register update status bits (PORT.SR.PMS), that are enabled for global update control (PORT.CR1.PMUM=1), are
set. It is an “AND” of all the globally enabled port PMU status bits. In global software update mode, the global
update request bit (GL.CR1.GPMU) should be held high until this status bit goes high.
0 = The associated update request signal is low or not all register updates are completed
1 = The requested performance register updates are all completed
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.SRL
Global Status Register Latched
016h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
8KREFL
3
CLADL
2
ONESL
1
CLOLL
0
GPMSL
Bit 4: 8K Reference Activity Status Latched (8KREFL) This bit will be set when the 8 kHz reference signal on
the GPIO4 pin is active. The GL.CR2.G8KIS bit must be set for the activity to be monitored.
Bit 3: CLAD Reference Clock Activity Status Latched (CLADL) This bit will be set when the CLAD PLL
reference clock signal on the CLKA pin is active.
Bit 2: One Second Status Latched (ONESL) This bit will be set once a second. The GL.ISR.GSR status bit will
be set when this bit is set and the GL.SRIE.ONESIE bit is enabled. The INT pin will be driven low if this bit is set
and the GL.SRIE.ONESIE bit and the GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit are enabled.
Bit 1: CLAD Loss Of Lock Latched (CLOLL) This bit will be set when the GL.SR.CLOL status bit changes from
low to high. The GL.ISR.GSR bit will be set when this bit is set and the GL.SRIE.CLOLIE bit is set and the INT pin
will be driven low if the GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit is also enabled.
Bit 0: Global Performance Monitoring Update Status Latched (GPMSL) This bit will be set when the
GL.SR.GPMS status bit changes from low to high. This bit will set the GL.ISR.GSR status bit if the
GL.SRIE.GPMSIE is enabled. This bit will drive the interrupt pin low if the GL.SRIE.GPMSIE bit and the
GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit are enabled.
132
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.SRIE
Global Status Register Interrupt Enable
018h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
ONESIE
0
1
CLOLIE
0
0
GPMSIE
0
Bit 2: One Second Interrupt Enable (ONESIE) This bit will drive the interrupt pin low when this bit is enabled the
GL.SRL.ONESL bit is set, and the GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit is enabled.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: CLAD Loss Of Lock Interrupt Enable (CLOLIE) The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is enabled, the
GL.SRL.CLOLL is set, and GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit is enabled.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Global Performance Monitoring Update Status Interrupt Enable (GPMSIE) The interrupt pin will be
driven when this bit is enabled and the GL.SRL.GPMSL bit is set and the GL.ISRIE.GSRIE bit is enabled.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
GL.GIORR
Global General-Purpose IO Read Register
01Ch
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
GPIO8
6
GPIO7
5
GPIO6
4
GPIO5
3
GPIO4
2
GPIO3
1
GPIO2
0
GPIO1
Bits 7 to 0: General-Purpose IO Status [8:1]] (GPIO[8:1] ) These bits reflect the input or output signal on the 8
general-purpose IO pins.
133
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.3 Per Port Common
12.3.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Table 12-13. Per Port Common Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)40h
(0,2,4,6)42h
(0,2,4,6)44h
(0,2,4,6)46h
(0,2,4,6)48h
(0,2,4,6)4Ah
(0,2,4,6)4Ch
(0,2,4,6)4Eh
(0,2,4,6)50h
(0,2,4,6)52h
(0,2,4,6)54h
(0,2,4,6)56h
(0,2,4,6)58h
(0,2,4,6)5Ah
(0,2,4,6)5Ch
(0,2,4,6)5Eh
Register
PORT.CR1
PORT.CR2
PORT.CR3
PORT.CR4
-PORT.INV1
PORT.INV2
-PORT.ISR
PORT.SR
PORT.SRL
PORT.SRIE
-----
Register Description
Port Control Register 1
Port Control Register 2
Port Control Register 3
Port Control Register 4
Unused
Port IO Invert Control Register 1
Port IO Invert Control Register 2
Unused
Port Interrupt Status Register
Port Status Register
Port Status Register Latched
Port Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
134
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
Bit #
Name
Default
RESERVED
15
Bit #
Name
Default
PORT.CR1
Port Control Register 1
(0,2,4,6)40h
13
PAIS1
0
12
PAIS0
0
11
LAIS1
0
10
LAIS0
0
9
BENA
0
RESERVED
0
14
PAIS2
0
8
7
TMEI
0
6
MEIM
0
5
---
4
PMUM
0
3
PMU
0
2
PD
1
1
RSTDP
1
0
RST
0
0
Bits 14 to 12: Payload AIS Select [2:0] (PAIS[2:0]). This bit controls when an unframed all ones signal is forced
on the receive data path after the receive framer and payload loopback mux. Default: Payload AIS always sent.
See Table 10-19.
Bits 11 to 10: Line AIS Select [1:0] (LAIS[1:0). These bits control when a DS3 framed AIS or an unframed all
ones signal is to be transmitted on TPOSn/TNEGn and/or TXPn/TXNn. The signal on TPOSn/TNEGn can be AMI
or unipolar. This signal is sent even when in diagnostic loopback and always over-rides signals from the framers.
Default: AIS sent if DLB is enabled. See Table 10-18.
Bit 9: BERT Enable (BENA). This bit is used to enable the BERT logic. The BERT pattern will be the payload data
replacing the data from the TSERn pin.
0 = BERT logic disabled and powered down
1 = BERT logic enabled
Bit 7: Transmit Manual Error Insert (TMEI) This bit is used to insert errors in all error insertion logic configured to
use this bit when PORT.CR1.MEIM=0. The error(s) will be inserted when this bit is toggled low to high.
Bit 6: Transmit Manual Error Insert Mode (MEIM). These bits select the method transmit manual error insertion
for this port for error generators configured to use the external TMEI signal. The global updates are controlled by
the GL.CR1.MEIMS bit.
0 = Port software update via PORT.CR1.TMEI
1 = Global update source
Bit 4: Performance Monitor Update Mode (PMUM). These bits select the method of updating the performance
monitor registers. The global updates are controlled by the GL.CR1.GPM[1:0] bits.
0 = Port software update
1 = Global update
Bit 3: Performance Monitor Register Update (PMU) This bit is used to update all of the performance monitor
registers configured to use this bit when PORT.CR1.PMUM=0. The performance registers configured to use this
signal will be updated with the latest count value and the counters reset when this bit is toggled low to high. The bit
should remain high until the performance register update status bit (PORT.SR.PMS) goes high, then it should be
brought back low which clears the PMS status bit.
Bit 2: Power-Down (PD). When this bit is set, the LIU and digital logic for this port are powered down and
considered “out of service.” The logic is powered down by stopping the clocks. See the Reset and Power-Down
section in Section 10.3.
0 = Normal operation
1 = Power-down port circuits (default state)
Bit 1: Reset Data Path (RSTDP). When this bit is set, it will force all of the internal data path registers in this port
to their default state. This bit must be set high for a minimum of 100ns and then set back low. See the Reset and
Power-Down section in Section 10.3. Note: The Default State of this bit is 1 (after a general reset (port or global),
this bit will be set to one).
0 = Normal operation
1 = Force all data path registers to their default values
Bit 0: Reset (RST). When this bit is set, it will force all the internal data path and status and control registers
(except this RST bit) of this port to their default state. See the Reset and Power-Down section in Section 10.3. This
135
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
bit must be set high for a minimum of 100ns and then set back low. This software bit is logically ORed with the
inverted hardware signal RST and the GL.CR1.RST bit.
0 = Normal operation
1 = Force all internal registers to their default values
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.CR2
Port Control Register 2
(0,2,4,6)42h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
TLEN
0
14
TTS
0
13
RMON
0
12
TLBO
0
RESERVED
Bit #
Name
Default
0
0
11
7
6
RESERVED
RESERVED
5
FM2
0
4
FM1
0
3
FM0
0
0
10
LM2
0
9
LM1
0
8
LM0
0
2
1
0
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
0
0
0
Bit 15: Transmit Line IO Signal Enable (TLEN). This bit is used to enable to transmit line interface output pins
TLCLKn, TPOSn/TDATn and TNEGn.
0 = Disable, force outputs low
1 = Enable normal operation
Bit 14: Transmit LIU Tri-State (TTS) This bit is used to tri-state the transmit TXPn and TXNn pins. The LIU is still
powered up when the pins are tri-stated. It has no effect when the LIU is disabled and powered down.
0 = TXPn and TXNn driven
1 = TXPn and TXNn tri-stated
Bit 13: Receive LIU Monitor Mode (RMON) This bit is used to enable the receive LIU monitor mode pre-amplifier.
Enabling the pre-amplifier adds about 20 dB of linear amplification for use in monitor applications where the signal
has been reduced 20 dB using resistive attenuator circuits.
0 = Disable the 20 dB pre-amp
1 = Enable the 20 dB pre-amp
Bit 12: Transmit LIU LBO (TLBO) This bit is used enable the transmit LBO circuit which causes the transmit
signal to have a wave shape that approximates about 225 feet of cable. This is used to reduce near end crosstalk
when the cable lengths are short. This signal is only valid in DS3 LIU mode.
0 = TXPn and TXNn have full amplitude signals
1 = TXPn and TXNn signals approximate 225 feet of cable
Bits 10 to 8: Port Interface Mode (LM[2:0]). The LM[2:0] bits select main port interface operational modes. The
default state disables the LIU and the JA. See Table 10-26.
Bits 5 to 3: Framing Mode (FM[2:0]). The FM[2:0] bits select main framing operational modes. Default: DS3 C-bit.
See Table 10-25.
136
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.CR3
Port Control Register 3
(0,2,4,6)44h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
RCLKS
0
12
RSOFOS
0
RESERVED
11
9
TSOFOS
0
RESERVED
0
10
TCLKS
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
P8KRS1
0
6
P8KRS0
0
5
P8KREF
0
4
LOOPT
0
8
3
CLADC
0
2
RFTS
0
1
TFTS
0
0
TLTS
0
0
Bit 13: Receive Clock Output Select (RCLKS). This bit is used to select the function of the RGCLKn / RCLKOn
pins. See Table 10-24.
0 = Selects the RGCLKn signal, or the drive low pin function.
1 = Selects RCLKOn signal.
Bit 12: Receive Start Of Frame Output Select (RSOFOS). This bit is to select the function of the RSOFOn /
RDENn pins. See Table 10-23.
0 = Selects RDENn signal.
1 = Selects RSOFOn signal.
Bit 10: Transmit Clock Output Select (TCLKS). This bit is used to select the function of the TGCLKn / TCLKOn
pins. See Table 10-22.
0 = Selects TGCLKn signal.
1 = Selects TCLKOn signal.
Bit 9: Transmit Start Of Frame Output Select (TSOFOS). This bit is used to select the function of the TSOFOn /
TDENn pins. See Table 10-21.
0 = Selects TDENn signal.
1 = Selects TSOFOn signal.
Bits 7 to 6: Port 8 kHz Reference Source Select (P8KRS[1:0]). This bit selects the source of the 8 kHz reference
from the port sources. The 8K reference for this port can be used as the global 8K reference source. See Table
10-13.
Bit 6: Port 8 kHz Reference Source Select (P8KRS). This bit selects the source of the 8 kHz reference from the
port sources. The 8K reference for this port can also be used as the global 8K reference source.
0 = Selects the receive internal framer clock (based on RLCLKn or RX LIU recovered clock
1 = Selects the transmit internal framer clock (based on TCLKIn or the CLAD clock)
Bit 5: PORT 8 kHz Reference Source (P8KREF). This bit selects the source of the 8 kHz reference for PLCP
trailer operation and one second timer.
0 = 8 kHz reference from global source
1 = 8 kHz reference from this ports selected source
Bit 4: LOOP Time Enable (LOOPT). When this bit is set, the port is in loop time mode. The transmit clock is set to
the receive clock from the RLCLKn pin or the recovered clock from the LIU or the CLAD clock and the TCLKIn pin
is not used. This function of this bit is conditional on other control bits. See Table 10-4 for more details.
0 = Normal transmit clock operation
1 = Transmit using the receive clock
Bit 3: CLAD Transmit Clock Source Control (CLADC). This bit is used to enable the CLAD clocks as the source
of the internal transmit clock. This function of this bit is conditional on other control bits. See Table 10-4 for more
details.
0 = Use CLAD clocks for the transmit clock as appropriate
1 = Do not use CLAD clocks for the transmit clock – (if no loopback is enabled, TCLKIn is the source)
Bit 2: Receive Framer IO Signal Timing Select (RFTS). This bit controls the timing reference for the signals on
the receive framer interface IO pins. The pins controlled are RSERn, RSOFOn / RDENn. See Table 10-8 for more
details.
137
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
0 = Use output clocks for timing reference
1 = Use input clocks for timing reference
Bit 1: Transmit Framer IO Signal Timing Select (TFTS). This bit controls the timing reference for the signals on
the transmit framer interface IO pins. The pins controlled are TSOFIn, TSERn, and TSOFOn / TDENn. See Table
10-7 for more details.
0 = Use output clocks for timing reference
1 = Use input clocks for timing reference
Bit 0: Transmit Line IO Signal Timing Select (TLTS). This bit controls the timing reference for the signals on the
transmit line interface IO pins. The pins controlled are TPOSn / TDATn and TNEGn. See Table 10-6 for more
details.
0 = Use output clocks for timing reference
1 = Use input clocks for timing reference
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.CR4
Port Control Register 4
(0,2,4,6)46h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
RESERVED
11
0
10
LBM2
0
9
LBM1
0
8
LBM0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
GPIOB3
0
6
GPIOB2
0
5
GPIOB1
0
4
GPIOB0
0
3
GPIOA3
0
2
GPIOA2
0
1
GPIOA1
0
0
GPIOA0
0
Bits 10 to 8: Loopback Mode [2:0] (LBM[2:0]). These bits select the loopback modes for analog loopback (ALB),
line loopback (LLB), payload loopback (PLB) and diagnostic loopback (DLB). See Table 10-17 for the loopback
select codes. Default: No Loopback.
Bits 7 to 4: General-Purpose IO B Output Select[3:0] (GPIOB[3:0]) These bits determine which alarm status
signal to output on the GPIO2(port 1), GPIO4(port 2), GPIO6(port 3) or GPIO8(port 4) pins. The GPIO pin must be
enabled by setting the bits in the GL.GIOCR and either GL.CR1 or GL.CR2 registers to output the selected alarm
signal. See Table 10-15. See Table 10-16 for the alarm select codes.
Bits 3 to 0: General-Purpose IO A Output Select[3:0] (GPIOA[3:0]) These bits determine which alarm status
signal to output on the GPIO1(port 1), GPIO3(port 2), GPIO5(port 3) or GPIO7(port 4) pins. The GPIO pin must be
enabled for output by setting the bits in the GL.GIOCR register. See Table 10-15 for configuration settings. See
Table 10-16 for the alarm select codes.
138
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.INV1
Port IO Invert Control Register 1
(0,2,4,6)4Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
14
RESERVED
RESERVED
12
TSOFOI
0
RESERVED
0
13
-0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
TOHI
0
11
0
10
TSERI
0
9
TOHSI
0
8
TOHEI
0
6
TOHCKI
0
5
TSOFII
0
4
TNEGI
0
3
TDATI
0
2
TLCKI
0
1
TCKOI
0
0
TCKII
0
Bit 12 : TSOFOn/TDENn/Invert (TSOFOI). This bit inverts the TSOFOn / TDENn pin when set.
Bit 10 : TSERn Invert (TSERI). This bit inverts the TSERn pin when set.
Bit 9 : TOHSOFn Invert (TOHSI). This bit inverts the TOHSOFn pin when set.
Bit 8 : TOHENn Invert (TOHEI). This bit inverts the TOHENn pin when set.
Bit 7 : TOHn Invert (TOHI). This bit inverts the TOHn pin when set.
Bit 6 : TOHCLKn Invert (TOHCKI). This bit inverts the TOHCLKn pin when set.
Bit 5 : TSOFIn Invert (TSOFII). This bit inverts the TSOFIn pin when set.
Bit 4 : TNEGn Invert (TNEGI). This bit inverts the TNEGn pin when set.
Bit 3 : TDATn Invert (TDATI). This bit inverts the TDATn pin when set.
Bit 2 : TLCLKn Invert (TLCKI). This bit inverts the TLCLKn pin when set.
Bit 1 : TCLKOn/TGCLKn Invert (TCKOI). This bit inverts the TCLKOn / TGCLKn pin when set.
Bit 0 : TCLKIn Invert (TCKII). This bit inverts the TCLKIn pin when set.
139
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
PORT.INV2
Port IO Invert Control Register 2
(0,2,4,6)4Ch
14
13
RESERVED
RESERVED
0
0
12
RSOFOI
0
11
-0
10
RSERI
0
9
ROHSI
0
8
-0
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Name
ROHI
ROHCKI
-RNEGI
RPOSI
RLCKI
RCLKOI
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 12 : RSOFOn/RDENn Invert (RSOFOI). This bit inverts the RSOFOn / RDENn pin when set.
0
-0
Bit 10 : RSERn Invert (RSERI). This bit inverts the RSERn pin when set.
Bit 9 : ROHSOFn Invert (ROHSI). This bit inverts the ROHSOFn pin when set.
Bit 7 : ROHn Invert (ROHI). This bit inverts the ROHn pin when set.
Bit 6 : ROHCLKn Invert (ROHCKI). This bit inverts the ROHCLKn pin when set.
Bit 4 : RNEGn/RLCVn Invert (RNEGI). This bit inverts the RNEGn / RLCVn when set.
Bit 3 : RPOSn/RDATn Invert (RPOSI). This bit inverts the RPOSn / RDATn pin when set.
Bit 2 : RLCLKn Invert (RLCKI). This bit inverts the RLCLKn pin when set.
Bit 1 : RCLKOn / RGCLKn Invert (RCLKOI). This bit inverts the RCLKOn / RGCLKn pin when set.
140
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.ISR
Port Interrupt Status Register
(0,2,4,6)50h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
Bit #
Name
7
TTSR
6
FSR
5
HSR
4
BSR
3
2
1
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
PSR
8
LCSR
0
FMSR
Bit 9: Port Status Register Interrupt Status (PSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits, that
are enabled for interrupt, in the PORT.SRL register are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set and
the corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 8: Line Code Status Register Interrupt Status (LCSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register
bits, that are enabled for interrupt, in the B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder block are set. The interrupt pin will be
driven when this bit is set and the corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 7: Trail Trace Status Register Interrupt Status (TTSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register
bits, that are enabled for interrupt, in the trail trace block are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set
and the corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 6: FEAC Status Register Interrupt Status (FSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits,
that are enabled for interrupt, in the FEAC block are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set and the
corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 5: HDLC Status Register Interrupt Status (HSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits,
that are enabled for interrupt, in the HDLC block are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set and the
corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 4: BERT Status Register Interrupt Status (BSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits,
that are enabled for interrupt, in the BERT block are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set and the
corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
Bit 0: Framer Status Register Interrupt Status (FMSR) This bit is set when any of the latched status register bits,
that are enabled for interrupt, in the active DS3 or E3 framer block are set. The interrupt pin will be driven when this
bit is set and the corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] is set.
141
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.SR
Port Status Register
(0,2,4,6)52h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
TDM
1
RLOL
0
PMS
Bit 2: Transmit Driver Monitor Status (TDM) This bits indicates the status of the transmit monitor circuit in the
transmit LIU.
0 = Transmit output not over loaded
1 = Transmit signal is overloaded
Bit 1: Receive Loss Of Lock Status (RLOL) This bits indicates the status of the receive LIU clock recovery PLL
circuit.
0 = Locked to the incoming signal
1 = Not locked to the incoming signal
Bit 0: Performance Monitoring Update Status (PMS) This bits indicates the status of all active performance
monitoring register and counter update signals in this port. It is an “AND” of all update status bits and is not set until
all performance registers are updated and the counters reset. In software update modes, the update request bit
PORT.CR1.PMU should be held high until this status bit goes high.
0 = The associated update request signal is low
1 = The requested performance register updates are all completed
142
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.SRL
Port Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)54h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
RLCLKA
6
TCLKIA
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
TDML
1
RLOLL
0
PMSL
Bit 7: Receive Line Clock Activity Status Latched (RLCLKA) This bit will be set when the signal on the RLCLKn
pin or the recovered clock from the LIU for this port is active.
Bit 6: Transmit Input Clock Activity Status Latched (TCLKIA) This bit will be set when the signal on the TCLKIn
pin for this port is active.
Bit 2: Transmit Driver Monitor Status Latched (TDML) This bit will be set when the PORT.SR.TDM status bit
changes from low to high. This bit will also set the PORT.ISR.PSR status bit if the PORT.SRIE.TDMIE bit is
enabled. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set, the PORT.SRIE.TDMIE bit is set, and the
corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] bit is also set.
Bit 1: Receive Loss Of Lock Status Latched (RLOLL) This bit will be set when the PORT.SR.RLOL status bit
changes from low to high. This bit will also set the PORT.ISR.PSR status bit if the PORT.SRIE.RLOLIE bit is
enabled. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set, the PORT.SRIE.RLOLIE bit is set, and the
corresponding GL.ISRIE.PISRIE[4:1] bit is also set.
Bit 0: Performance Monitoring Update Status Latched (PMSL) This bit will be set when the PORT.SR.PMS
status bit changes from low to high. This bit will also set the PORT.ISR.PSR status bit if the PORT.SRIE.PMUIE bit
is enabled. The interrupt pin will be driven when this bit is set, the PORT.SRIE.PMUIE bit is set, and the
PORT.SRIE.PMSIE bit are set.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
PORT.SRIE
Port Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)56h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
TDMIE
0
1
RLOLIE
0
0
PMSIE
0
Bit 2: Transmit Driver Monitor Latched Status Interrupt Enable (TDMIE) The interrupt pin will be driven when
this bit is enabled and the PORT.SRL.TDML bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this
port is enabled.
Bit 1: Receive Loss Of Lock Latched Status Interrupt Enable (RLOLIE) The interrupt pin will be driven when
this bit is enabled and the PORT.SRL.RLOLL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this
port is enabled.
Bit 0: Performance Monitoring Update Latched Status Interrupt Enable (PMSIE) The interrupt pin will be
driven when this bit is enabled and the PORT.SRL.PMSL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that
corresponds to this port is enabled.
143
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.4 BERT
12.4.1 BERT Register Map
The BERT utilizes 12 registers. Note: The BERT tegisters will be cleared when GL.CR1.RSTDP or
PORT.CR1.RSTDP or PORT.CR1.PD is set.
Table 12-14. BERT Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)60h
(0,2,4,6)62h
(0,2,4,6)64h
(0,2,4,6)66h
(0,2,4,6)68h
(0,2,4,6)6Ah
(0,2,4,6)6Ch
(0,2,4,6)6Eh
(0,2,4,6)70h
(0,2,4,6)72h
(0,2,4,6)74h
(0,2,4,6)76h
(0,2,4,6)78h
(0,2,4,6)7Ah
(0,2,4,6)7Ch
(0,2,4,6)7Eh
Register
Register Description
BERT.CR
BERT.PCR
BERT.SPR1
BERT.SPR2
BERT.TEICR
-BERT.SR
BERT.SRL
BERT.SRIE
-BERT.RBECR1
BERT.RBECR2
BERT.RBCR1
BERT.RBCR2
---
BERT Control Register
BERT Pattern Configuration Register
BERT Seed/Pattern Register #1
BERT Seed/Pattern Register #2
BERT Transmit Error Insertion Control Register
Unused
BERT Status Register
BERT Status Register Latched
BERT Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
BERT Receive Bit Error Count Register #1
BERT Receive Bit Error Count Register #2
BERT Receive Bit Count Register #1
BERT Receive Bit Count Register #2
Unused
Unused
12.4.2 BERT Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.CR
BERT Control Register
(0,2,4,6)60h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
PMUM
0
6
LPMU
0
5
RNPL
0
4
RPIC
0
3
MPR
0
2
APRD
0
1
TNPL
0
0
TPIC
0
Bit 7: Performance Monitoring Update Mode (PMUM) – When 0, a performance monitoring update is initiated by
the LPMU register bit. When 1, a performance monitoring update is initiated by the global or port PMU register bit.
Note: If the LPMU bit or the global or port PMU bit is one, changing the state of this bit may cause a performance
monitoring update to occur.
Bit 6: Local Performance Monitoring Update (LPMU) – This bit causes a performance monitoring update to be
initiated if local performance monitoring update is enabled (PMUM = 0). A 0 to 1 transition causes the performance
monitoring registers to be updated with the latest data, and the counters reset (0 or 1). For a second performance
monitoring update to be initiated, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. If LPMU goes low before the PMS bit
goes high, an update might not be performed. This bit has no affect when PMUM=1.
144
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 5: Receive New Pattern Load (RNPL) – A zero to one transition of this bit will cause the programmed test
pattern (QRSS, PTS, PLF[4:0}, PTF[4:0], and BSP[31:0]) to be loaded in to the receive pattern generator. This bit
must be changed to zero and back to one for another pattern to be loaded. Loading a new pattern will forces the
receive pattern generator out of the “Sync” state which causes a resynchronization to be initiated.
Note: QRSS, PTS, PLF[4:0}, PTF[4:0], and BSP[31:0] must not change from the time this bit transitions from 0 to 1
until four receive clock cycles after this bit transitions from 0 to 1. Register bit PORT.CR1.BENA must be set and
the receive clock running in order for the pattern load to take affect.
Bit 4: Receive Pattern Inversion Control (RPIC) – When 0, the receive incoming data stream is not altered.
When 1, the receive incoming data stream is inverted.
Bit 3: Manual Pattern Resynchronization (MPR) – A zero to one transition of this bit will cause the receive
pattern generator to resynchronize to the incoming pattern. This bit must be changed to zero and back to one for
another resynchronization to be initiated. Note: A manual resynchronization forces the receive pattern generator
out of the “Sync” state.
Bit 2: Automatic Pattern Resynchronization Disable (APRD) – When 0, the receive pattern generator will
automatically resynchronize to the incoming pattern if six or more times during the current 64-bit window the
incoming data stream bit and the receive pattern generator output bit did not match. When 1, the receive pattern
generator will not automatically resynchronize to the incoming pattern.
Bit 1: Transmit New Pattern Load (TNPL) – A zero to one transition of this bit will cause the programmed test
pattern (QRSS, PTS, PLF[4:0}, PTF[4:0], and BSP[31:0]) to be loaded in to the transmit pattern generator. This bit
must be changed to zero and back to one for another pattern to be loaded.
Note: QRSS, PTS, PLF[4:0}, PTF[4:0], and BSP[31:0] must not change from the time this bit transitions from 0 to 1
until four transmit clock cycles after this bit transitions from 0 to 1. Register bit PORT.CR1.BENA must be set and
the receive clock running in order for the pattern load to take affect.
Bit 0: Transmit Pattern Inversion Control (TPIC) – When 0, the transmit outgoing data stream is not altered.
When 1, the transmit outgoing data stream is inverted.
145
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.PCR
BERT Pattern Configuration Register
(0,2,4,6)62h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
PTF4
0
11
PTF3
0
10
PTF2
0
9
PTF1
0
8
PTF0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
QRSS
0
5
PTS
0
4
PLF4
0
3
PLF3
0
2
PLF2
0
1
PLF1
0
0
PLF0
0
Bits 12 to 8: Pattern Tap Feedback (PTF[4:0]) – These five bits control the PRBS “tap” feedback of the pattern
generator. The “tap” feedback will be from bit y of the pattern generator (y = PTF[4:0] +1). These bits are ignored
when programmed for a repetitive pattern. For a PRBS signal, the feedback is an XOR of bit n and bit y.
Bit 6: QRSS Enable (QRSS) – When 0, the pattern generator configuration is controlled by PTS, PLF[4:0], and
PTF[4:0], and BSP[31:0]. When 1, the pattern generator configuration is forced to a PRBS pattern with a
generating polynomial of x20 + x17 + 1. The output of the pattern generator will be forced to one if the next fourteen
output bits are all zero.
Bit 5: Pattern Type Select (PTS) – When 0, the pattern is a PRBS pattern. When 1, the pattern is a repetitive
pattern.
Bits 4 to 0: Pattern Length Feedback (PLF[4:0]) – These five bits control the “length” feedback of the pattern
generator. The “length” feedback will be from bit n of the pattern generator (n = PLF[4:0] +1). For a PRBS signal,
the feedback is an XOR of bit n and bit y. For a repetitive pattern the feedback is bit n.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.SPR1
BERT Seed/Pattern Register #1
(0,2,4,6)64h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BSP15
0
14
BSP14
0
13
BSP13
0
12
BSP12
0
11
BSP11
0
10
BSP10
0
9
BSP9
0
8
BSP8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BSP7
0
6
BSP6
0
5
BSP5
0
4
BSP4
0
3
BSP3
0
2
BSP2
0
1
BSP1
0
0
BSP0
0
Bits 15 to 0: BERT Seed/Pattern (BSP[15:0]) – Lower sixteen bits of 32 bits. Register description follows next
register.
146
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.SPR2
BERT Seed/Pattern Register #2
(0,2,4,6)66h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BSP31
0
14
BSP30
0
13
BSP29
0
12
BSP28
0
11
BSP27
0
10
BSP26
0
9
BSP25
0
8
BSP24
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BSP23
0
6
BSP22
0
5
BSP21
0
4
BSP20
0
3
BSP19
0
2
BSP18
0
1
BSP17
0
0
BSP16
0
Bits 15 to 0: BERT Seed/Pattern (BSP[31:16]) - Upper 16 bits of 32 bits.
BERT Seed/Pattern (BSP[31:0]) – These 32 bits are the programmable seed for a transmit PRBS pattern, or the
programmable pattern for a transmit or receive repetitive pattern. BSP(31) will be the first bit output on the transmit
side for a 32-bit repetitive pattern or 32-bit length PRBS. BSP(31) will be the first bit input on the receive side for a
32-bit repetitive pattern.
147
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.TEICR
BERT Transmit Error Insertion Control Register
(0,2,4,6)68h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
TEIR2
0
4
TEIR1
0
3
TEIR0
0
2
BEI
0
1
TSEI
0
0
MEIMS
0
Bits 5 to 3: Transmit Error Insertion Rate (TEIR[2:0]) – These three bits indicate the rate at which errors are
inserted in the output data stream. One out of every 10n bits is inverted. TEIR[2:0] is the value n. A TEIR[2:0] value
of 0 disables error insertion at a specific rate. A TEIR[2:0] value of 1 result in every 10th bit being inverted. A
TEIR[2:0] value of 2 result in every 100th bit being inverted. Error insertion starts when this register is written to with
a TEIR[2:0] value that is non-zero. If this register is written to during the middle of an error insertion process, the
new error rate will be started after the next error is inserted.
TEIR[2:0]
Error Rate
000
Disabled
001
1 x 10-1
010
1 x 10-2
011
1 x 10-3
100
1 x 10-4
101
1 x 10-5
110
1 x 10-6
111
1 x 10-7
Bit 2: Bit Error Insertion Enable (BEI) – When 0, single bit error insertion is disabled. When 1, single bit error
insertion is enabled.
Bit 1: Transmit Single Error Insert (TSEI) – This bit causes a bit error to be inserted in the transmit data stream if
manual error insertion is disabled (MEIMS = 0) and single bit error insertion is enabled. A 0 to 1 transition causes a
single bit error to be inserted. For a second bit error to be inserted, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. Note: If
MEIMS is low, and this bit transitions more than once between error insertion opportunities, only one error will be
inserted.
Bit 0: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS) – When 0, error insertion is initiated by the TSEI register bit.
When 1, error insertion is initiated by the transmit manual error insertion signal (TMEI). Note: If TMEI or TSEI is
one, changing the state of this bit may cause a bit error to be inserted.
148
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.SR
BERT Status Register
(0,2,4,6)6Ch
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
PMS
2
--
1
BEC
0
OOS
Bit 3: Performance Monitoring Update Status (PMS) – This bit indicates the status of the receive performance
monitoring register (counters) update. This bit will transition from low to high when the update is completed. PMS
will be forced low when the LPMU bit (PMUM = 0) or the global or port PMU bit (PMUM=1) goes low.
Bit 1: Bit Error Count (BEC) – When 0, the bit error count is zero. When 1, the bit error count is one or more. This
bit is cleared when the user updates the BERT counters via the PMU bit (BERT.CR).
Bit 0: Out Of Synchronization (OOS) – When 0, the receive pattern generator is synchronized to the incoming
pattern. When 1, the receive pattern generator is not synchronized to the incoming pattern.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
Bit #
Name
15
--
BERT.SRL
BERT Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)6Eh
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
----PMSL
BEL
BECL
OOSL
Bit 3: Performance Monitoring Update Status Latched (PMSL) – This bit is set when the PMS bit transitions
from 0 to 1.
Bit 2: Bit Error Latched (BEL) – This bit is set when a bit error is detected.
Bit 1: Bit Error Count Latched (BECL) – This bit is set when the BEC bit transitions from 0 to 1.
Bit 0: Out Of Synchronization Latched (OOSL) – This bit is set when the OOS bit changes state.
149
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
BERT.SRIE
BERT Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)70h
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
----PMSIE
BEIE
BECIE
OOSIE
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 3: Performance Monitoring Update Status Interrupt Enable (PMSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
PMSL bit is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Bit Error Interrupt Enable (BEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the BEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Bit Error Count Interrupt Enable (BECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the BECL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Out Of Synchronization Interrupt Enable (OOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the OOSL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.RBECR1
BERT Receive Bit Error Count Register #1
(0,2,4,6)74h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BEC15
0
14
BEC14
0
13
BEC13
0
12
BEC12
0
11
BEC11
0
10
BEC10
0
9
BEC9
0
8
BEC8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BEC7
0
6
BEC6
0
5
BEC5
0
4
BEC4
0
3
BEC3
0
2
BEC2
0
1
BEC1
0
0
BEC0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Bit Error Count (BEC[15:0]) – Lower sixteen bits of 24 bits. Register description follows next
register.
150
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.RBECR2
BERT Receive Bit Error Count Register #2
(0,2,4,6)76h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BEC23
0
6
BEC22
0
5
BEC21
0
4
BEC20
0
3
BEC19
0
2
BEC18
0
1
BEC17
0
0
BEC16
0
Bits 7 to 0: Bit Error Count (BEC[23:16]) - Upper 8-bits of Register.
Bit Error Count (BEC[23:0]) – These twenty-four bits indicate the number of bit errors detected in the incoming
data stream. This count stops incrementing when it reaches a count of FF FFFFh. This bit error counter will not
increment when an OOS condition exists. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.RBCR1
Receive Bit Count Register #1
(0,2,4,6)78h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BC15
0
14
BC14
0
13
BC13
0
12
BC12
0
11
BC11
0
10
BC10
0
9
BC9
0
8
BC8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BC7
0
6
BC6
0
5
BC5
0
4
BC4
0
3
BC3
0
2
BC2
0
1
BC1
0
0
BC0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Bit Count (BC[15:0]) – Lower sixteen bits of 32 bits. Register description follows next register.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
BERT.RBCR2
Receive Bit Count Register #2
(0,2,4,6)7Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BC31
0
14
BC30
0
13
BC29
0
12
BC28
0
11
BC27
0
10
BC26
0
9
BC25
0
8
BC24
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BC23
0
6
BC22
0
5
BC21
0
4
BC20
0
3
BC19
0
2
BC18
0
1
BC17
0
0
BC16
0
Bits 15 to 0: Bit Count (BC[31:16]) - Upper 16 bits of 32 bits.
Bit Count (BC[31:0]) – These thirty-two bits indicate the number of bits in the incoming data stream. This count
stops incrementing when it reaches a count of FFFF FFFFh. This bit counter will not increment when an OOS
condition exists. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
151
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.5 B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder
12.5.1 Transmit Side Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map
The transmit side utilizes one register.
Table 12-15. Transmit Side B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)8Ch
(0,2,4,6)8Eh
Register
LINE.TCR
--
Register Description
Line Transmit Control Register
Unused
12.5.1.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.TCR
Line Transmit Control Register
(0,2,4,6)8Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
TZSD
0
3
EXZI
0
2
BPVI
0
1
TSEI
0
0
MEIMS
0
Bit 4: Transmit Zero Suppression Encoding Disable (TZSD) – When 0, the B3ZS/HDB3 Encoder performs zero
suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) and AMI encoding. When 1, zero suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) encoding is disabled,
and only AMI encoding is performed.
Bit 3: Excessive Zero Insert Enable (EXZI) – When 0, excessive zero (EXZ) event insertion is disabled. When 1,
EXZ event insertion is enabled.
Bit 2: Bipolar Violation Insert Enable (BPVI) – When 0, bipolar violation (BPV) insertion is disabled. When 1,
BPV insertion is enabled.
Bit 1: Transmit Single Error Insert (TSEI) – This bit causes an error of the enabled type(s) to be inserted in the
transmit data stream if manual error insertion is disabled (MEIMS = 0). A 0 to 1 transition causes a single error to
be inserted. For a second error to be inserted, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. Note: If MEIMS is low, and
this bit transitions more than once between error insertion opportunities, only one error will be inserted.
Bit 0: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS) – When 0, error insertion is initiated by the TSEI register bit.
When 1, error insertion is initiated by the transmit manual error insertion signal (TMEI). Note: If TMEI or TSEI is
one, changing the state of this bit may cause an error to be inserted.
152
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.5.2 Receive Side Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map
The receive side utilizes six registers.
Table 12-16. Receive Side B3ZS/HDB3 Line Encoder/Decoder Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)90h
(0,2,4,6)92h
(0,2,4,6)94h
(0,2,4,6)96h
(0,2,4,6)98h
(0,2,4,6)9Ah
(0,2,4,6)9Ch
(0,2,4,6)9Eh
Register
LINE.RCR
-LINE.RSR
LINE.RSRL
LINE.RSRIE
-LINE.RBPVCR
LINE.REXZCR
Register Description
Line Receive Control Register
Unused
Line Receive Status Register
Line Receive Status Register Latched
Line Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Line Receive Bipolar Violation Count Register
Line Receive Excessive Zero Count Register
12.5.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.RCR
Line Receive Control Register
(0.2.4.6)90h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
E3CVE
0
2
REZSF
0
1
RDZSF
0
0
RZSD
0
Bit 2: E3 Code Violation Enable (E3CVE) – When 0, the bipolar violation count will be a count of bipolar
violations. When 1, the bipolar violation count will be a count of E3 line coding violations. Note: E3 line coding
violations are defined as consecutive bipolar violations of the same polarity in ITU O.161. This bit is ignored in
B3ZS mode.
Bit 2: Receive BPV Error Detection Zero Suppression Code Format (REZSF) – When 0, BPV error detection
detects a B3ZS signature if a zero is followed by a bipolar violation (BPV), and an HDB3 signature if two zeros are
followed by a BPV. When 1, BPV error detection detects a B3ZS signature if a zero is followed by a BPV that has
the opposite polarity of the BPV in the previous B3ZS signature, and an HDB3 signature if two zeros are followed
by a BPV that has the opposite polarity of the BPV in the previous HDB3 signature. Note: Immediately after a reset,
this bit is ignored. The first B3ZS signature is defined as a zero followed by a BPV, and the first HDB3 signature is
defined as two zeros followed by a BPV. All subsequent B3ZS/HDB3 signatures will be determined by the setting of
this bit.
Note: The default setting (REZSF = 0) conforms to ITU O.162. The default setting may falsely decode actual BPVs
that are not codewords. It is recommended that REZSF be set to one for most applications. This setting is more
robust to accurately detect codewords.
Bit 1: Receive Zero Suppression Decoding Zero Suppression Code Format (RDZSF) – When 0, zero
suppression decoding detects a B3ZS signature if a zero is followed by a bipolar violation (BPV), and an HDB3
signature if two zeros are followed by a BPV. When 1, zero suppression decoding detects a B3ZS signature if a
zero is followed by a BPV that has the opposite polarity of the BPV in the previous B3ZS signature, and an HDB3
signature if two zeros are followed by a BPV that has the opposite polarity of the BPV in the previous HDB3
signature. Note: Immediately after a reset (DRST or RST low), this bit is ignored. The first B3ZS signature is defined
153
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
as a zero followed by a BPV, and the first HDB3 signature is defined as two zeros followed by a BPV. All
subsequent B3ZS/HDB3 signatures will be determined by the setting of this bit.
Bit 0: Receive Zero Suppression Decoding Disable (RZSD) – When 0, the B3ZS/HDB3 Decoder performs zero
suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) and AMI decoding. When 1, zero suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) decoding is disabled,
and only AMI decoding is performed.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.RSR
Line Receive Status Register
(0.2.4.6)94h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
EXZC
2
--
1
BPVC
0
LOS
Bit 3: Excessive Zero Count (EXZC) – When 0, the excessive zero count is zero. When 1, the excessive zero
count is one or more.
Bit 1: Bipolar Violation Count (BPVC) – When 0, the bipolar violation count is zero. When 1, the bipolar violation
count is one or more.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal (LOS) – When 0, the receive line is not in a loss of signal (LOS) condition. When 1, the
receive line is in an LOS condition. See Section 10.10.6.
Note: When zero suppression (B3ZS or HDB3) decoding is disabled, the LOS condition is cleared, and cannot be
detected
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.RSRL
Line Receive Status Register Latched
(0.2.4.6)96h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
ZSCDL
4
EXZL
3
EXZCL
2
BPVL
1
BPVCL
0
LOSL
Bit 5: Zero Suppression Code Detect Latched (ZSCDL) – This bit is set when a B3ZS or HDB3 signature is
detected.
Bit 4: Excessive Zero Latched (EXZL) – This bit is set when an excessive zero event is detected on the incoming
bipolar data stream.
Bit 3: Excessive Zero Count Latched (EXZCL) – This bit is set when the LINE.RSR.EXZC bit transitions from
zero to one.
Bit 2: Bipolar Violation Latched (BPVL) – This bit is set when a bipolar violation (or E3 LCV if enabled) is
detected on the incoming bipolar data stream.
Bit 1: Bipolar Violation Count Latched (BPVCL) – This bit is set when the LINE.RSR.BPVC bit transitions from
zero to one.
Bit 0: Loss of Signal Change Latched (LOSL) – This bit is set when the LINE.RSR.LOS bit changes state.
154
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.RSRIE
Line Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0.2.4.6)98h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
ZSCDIE
0
4
EXZIE
0
3
EXZCIE
0
2
BPVIE
0
1
BPVCIE
0
0
LOSIE
0
Bit 5: Zero Suppression Code Detect Interrupt Enable (ZSCDIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
LINE.RSRL.ZSCDL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Excessive Zero Interrupt Enable (EXZIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LINE.RSRL.EXZL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: Excessive Zero Count Interrupt Enable (EXZCIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LINE.RSRL.EXZCL
bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Bipolar Violation Interrupt Enable (BPVIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LINE.RSRL.BPVL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Bipolar Violation Count Interrupt Enable (BPVCIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
LINE.RSRL.BPVCL bit and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set. is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Interrupt Enable (LOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LINE.RSRL.LOSL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
155
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.RBPVCR
Line Receive Bipolar Violation Count Register
(0.2.4.6)9Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
BPV15
0
14
BPV14
0
13
BPV13
0
12
BPV12
0
11
BPV11
0
10
BPV10
0
9
BPV9
0
8
BPV8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
BPV7
0
6
BPV6
0
5
BPV5
0
4
BPV4
0
3
BPV3
0
2
BPV2
0
1
BPV1
0
0
BPV0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Bipolar Violation Count (BPV[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of bipolar violations
detected on the incoming bipolar data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
LINE.REXZCR
Line Receive Excessive Zero Count Register
(0.2.4.6)9Eh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
EXZ15
0
14
EXZ14
0
13
EXZ13
0
12
EXZ12
0
11
EXZ11
0
10
EXZ10
0
9
EXZ9
0
8
EXZ8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
EXZ7
0
6
EXZ6
0
5
EXZ5
0
4
EXZ4
0
3
EXZ3
0
2
EXZ2
0
1
EXZ1
0
0
EXZ0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Excessive Zero Count (EXZ[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of excessive zero
conditions detected on the incoming bipolar data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section
10.4.5).
156
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.6 HDLC
12.6.1 HDLC Transmit Side Register Map
The transmit side utilizes five registers.
Table 12-17. Transmit Side HDLC Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)A0h
(0,2,4,6)A2h
(0,2,4,6)A4h
(0,2,4,6)A6h
(0,2,4,6)A8h
(0,2,4,6)AAh
(0,2,4,6)ACh
(0,2,4,6)AEh
Register
HDLC.TCR
HDLC.TFDR
HDLC.TSR
HDLC.TSRL
HDLC.TSRIE
----
Register Description
HDLC Transmit Control Register
HDLC Transmit FIFO Data Register
HDLC Transmit Status Register
HDLC Transmit Status Register Latched
HDLC Transmit Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Unused
Unused
12.6.1.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.TCR
HDLC Transmit Control Register
(0,2,4,6)A0h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
TDAL4
0
11
TDAL3
1
10
TDAL2
0
9
TDAL1
0
8
TDAL0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
TPSD
0
5
TFEI
0
4
TIFV
0
3
TBRE
0
2
TDIE
0
1
TFPD
0
0
TFRST
0
Bits 12 to 8: Transmit HDLC Data Storage Available Level (TDAL[4:0]) – These five bits indicate the minimum
number of bytes ([TDAL x 8}+1) that must be available for storage (do not contain data) in the Transmit FIFO for
HDLC data storage to be available. For example, a value of 21 (15h) results in HDLC data storage being available
(THDA=1) when the Transmit FIFO has 169 (A9h) bytes or more available for storage, and HDLC data storage not
being available (THDA=0) when the Transmit FIFO has 168 (A8h) bytes or less available for storage.
Default value (after reset) is 128 bytes minimum available.
Bit 6: Transmit Packet Start Disable (TPSD) – When 0, the Transmit Packet Processor will continue sending
packets after the current packet end. When 1, the Transmit Packet Processor will stop sending packets after the
current packet end.
Bit 5: Transmit FCS Error Insertion (TFEI) – When 0, the calculated FCS (inverted CRC-16) is appended to the
packet. When 1, the inverse of the calculated FCS (non-inverted CRC-16) is appended to the packet causing an
FCS error. This bit is ignored if transmit FCS processing is disabled (TFPD = 1).
Bit 4: Transmit Inter-frame Fill Value (TIFV) – When 0, inter-frame fill is done with the flag sequence (7Eh).
When 1, inter-frame fill is done with all ‘1’s.
157
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 3: Transmit Bit Reordering Enable (TBRE) – When 0, bit reordering is disabled (The first bit transmitted is the
LSB of the Transmit FIFO Data byte TFD[0]). When 1, bit reordering is enabled (The first bit transmitted is the MSB
of the Transmit FIFO Data byte TFD[7]).
Bit 2: Transmit Data Inversion Enable (TDIE) – When 0, the outgoing data is directly output from packet
processing. When 1, the outgoing data is inverted before being output from packet processing.
Bit 1: Transmit FCS Processing Disable (TFPD) – This bit controls whether or not an FCS is calculated and
appended to the end of each packet. When 0, the calculated FCS bytes are appended to the end of the packet.
When 1, the packet is transmitted without an FCS.
Bit 0: Transmit FIFO Reset (TFRST) – When 0, the Transmit FIFO will resume normal operations, however, data
is discarded until a start of packet is received after RAM power-up is completed. When 1, the Transmit FIFO is
emptied, any transfer in progress is halted, the FIFO RAM is powered down, and all incoming data is discarded (all
TFDR register writes are ignored).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.TFDR
HDLC Transmit FIFO Data Register
(0,2,4,6)A2h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
TFD7
0
14
TFD6
0
13
TFD5
0
12
TFD4
0
11
TFD3
0
10
TFD2
0
9
TFD1
0
8
TFD0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
-0
1
-0
0
TDPE
0
Note: The FIFO data and status are loaded into the Transmit FIFO when the Transmit FIFO Data (TFD[7:0]) is
written (upper byte write). When read, the value of these bits is always zero.
Bits 15 to 8: Transmit FIFO Data (TFD[7:0]) – These eight bits are the packet data to be stored in the Transmit
FIFO. TFD[7] is the MSB, and TFD[0] is the LSB. If bit reordering is disabled, TFD[0] is the first bit transmitted, and
TFD[7] is the last bit transmitted. If bit reordering is enabled, TFD[7] is the first bit transmitted, and TFD[0] is the
last bit transmitted.
Bit 0: Transmit FIFO Data Packet End (TDPE) – When 0, the Transmit FIFO data is not a packet end. When 1,
the Transmit FIFO data is a packet end.
158
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.TSR
HDLC Transmit Status Register
(0,2,4,6)A4h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
TFFL5
12
TFFL4
11
TFFL3
10
TFFL2
9
TFFL1
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
TFF
1
TFE
8
TFFL0
0
THDA
Bits 13 to 8: Transmit FIFO Fill Level (TFFL[5:0]) – These six bits indicate the number of eight byte groups
available for storage (do not contain data) in the Transmit FIFO. E.g., a value of 21 (15h) indicates the FIFO has
168 (A8h) to 175 (AFh) bytes are available for storage.
Bit 2: Transmit FIFO Full (TFF) – When 0, the Transmit FIFO contains 255 or less bytes of data. When 1, the
Transmit FIFO is full.
Bit 1: Transmit FIFO Empty (TFE) – When 0, the Transmit FIFO contains at least one byte of data. When 1, the
Transmit FIFO is empty.
Bit 0: Transmit HDLC Data Storage Available (THDA) – When 0, the Transmit FIFO has less storage space
available in the Transmit FIFO than the Transmit HDLC data storage available level (TDAL[4:0]). When 1, the
Transmit FIFO has the same or more storage space available than the Transmit FIFO HDLC data storage available
level.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.TSRL
HDLC Transmit Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)A6h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
TFOL
4
TFUL
3
TPEL
2
--
1
TFEL
0
THDAL
Bit 5: Transmit FIFO Overflow Latched (TFOL) – This bit is set when a Transmit FIFO overflow condition occurs.
Bit 4: Transmit FIFO Underflow Latched (TFUL) – This bit is set when a Transmit FIFO underflow condition
occurs. An underflow condition results in a loss of data.
Bit 3: Transmit Packet End Latched (TPEL) – This bit is set when an end of packet is read from the Transmit
FIFO.
Bit 1: Transmit FIFO Empty Latched (TFEL) – This bit is set when the TFE bit transitions from 0 to 1.
Note: This bit is also set when HDLC.TCR.TFRST is deasserted.
Bit 0: Transmit HDLC Data Available Latched (THDAL) – This bit is set when the THDA bit transitions from 0 to
1.
Note: This bit is also set when HDLC.TCR.TFRST is deasserted.
159
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.TSRIE
HDLC Transmit Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)A8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
TFOIE
0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
4
TFUIE
0
3
TPEIE
0
2
-0
1
TFEIE
0
0
THDAIE
0
Bit 5: Transmit FIFO Overflow Interrupt Enable (TFOIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TFOL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Transmit FIFO Underflow Interrupt Enable (TFUIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TFUL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: Transmit Packet End Interrupt Enable (TPEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TPEL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Transmit FIFO Full Interrupt Enable (TFFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TFFL bit is set and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Transmit FIFO Empty Interrupt Enable (TFEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TFEL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Transmit HDLC Data Available Interrupt Enable (THDAIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the THDAL bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
160
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.6.2 HDLC Receive Side Register Map
The receive side utilizes five registers.
Table 12-18. Receive Side HDLC Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)B0h
(0,2,4,6)B2h
(0,2,4,6)B4h
(0,2,4,6)B6h
(0,2,4,6)B8h
(0,2,4,6)BAh
(0,2,4,6)BCh
(0,2,4,6)BEh
Register
HDLC.RCR
-HDLC.RSR
HDLC.RSRL
HDLC.RSRIE
-HDLC.RFDR
--
Register Description
HDLC Receive Control Register
Unused
HDLC Receive Status Register
HDLC Receive Status Register Latched
HDLC Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
HDLC Receive FIFO Data Register
Unused
12.6.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.RCR
HDLC Receive Control Register
(0,2,4,6)B0h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
RDAL4
0
11
RDAL3
1
10
RDAL2
0
9
RDAL1
0
8
RDAL0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
RBRE
0
2
RDIE
0
1
RFPD
0
0
RFRST
0
Bits 13 to 8: Receive HDLC Data Available Level (RDAL[4:0]) – These five bits indicate the minimum number of
eight byte groups that must be stored (contain data) in the Receive FIFO before HDLC data is considered to be
available (RHDA=1). For example, a value of 21 (15h) results in HDLC data being available when the Receive
FIFO contains 168 (A8h) bytes or more.
Bit 3: Receive Bit Reordering Enable (RBRE) – When 0, bit reordering is disabled (The first bit received is in the
LSB of the Receive FIFO Data byte RFD[0]). When 1, bit reordering is enabled (The first bit received is in the MSB
of the Receive FIFO Data byte RFD[7]).
Bit 2: Receive Data Inversion Enable (RDIE) – When 0, the incoming data is directly passed on for packet
processing. When 1, the incoming data is inverted before being passed on for packet processing.
Bit 1: Receive FCS Processing Disable (RFPD) – When 0, FCS processing is performed (the packets have an
FCS appended). When 1, FCS processing is disabled (the packets do not have an FCS appended).
Bit 0: Receive FIFO Reset (RFRST) – When 0, the Receive FIFO will resume normal operations, however, data is
discarded until a start of packet is received after RAM power-up is completed. When 1, the Receive FIFO is
emptied, any transfer in progress is halted, the FIFO RAM is powered down, the RHDA bit is forced low, and all
incoming data is discarded.
161
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.RSR
HDLC Receive Status Register
(0,2,4,6)B4h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
RFF
1
RFE
0
RHDA
Bit 2: Receive FIFO Full (RFF) – When 0, the Receive FIFO contains 255 or less bytes of data. When 1, the
Receive FIFO is full.
Bit 1: Receive FIFO Empty (RFE) – When 0, the Receive FIFO contains at least one byte of data. When 1, the
Receive FIFO is empty.
Bit 0: Receive HDLC Data Available (RHDA) – When 0, the Receive FIFO contains less data than the Receive
HDLC data available level (RDAL[4:0]). When 1, the Receive FIFO contains the same or more data than the
Receive HDLC data available level.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.RSRL
HDLC Receive Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)B6h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
RFOL
6
--
5
--
4
RPEL
3
RPSL
2
RFFL
1
--
0
RHDAL
Bit 7: Receive FIFO Overflow Latched (RFOL) – This bit is set when a Receive FIFO overflow condition occurs.
An overflow condition results in a loss of data.
Bit 4: Receive Packet End Latched (RPEL) – This bit is set when an end of packet is stored in the Receive FIFO.
Bit 3: Receive Packet Start Latched (RPSL) – This bit is set when a start of packet is stored in the Receive FIFO.
Bit 2: Receive FIFO Full Latched (RFFL) – This bit is set when the RFF bit transitions from 0 to 1.
Bit 0: Receive HDLC Data Available Latched (RHDAL) – This bit is set when the RHDA bit transitions from 0 to
1.
162
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.RSRIE
HDLC Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)B8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RFOIE
0
6
-0
5
-0
4
RPEIE
0
3
RPSIE
0
2
RFFIE
0
1
-0
0
RHDAIE
0
Bit 7: Receive FIFO Overflow Interrupt Enable (RFOIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RFOL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Receive Packet End Interrupt Enable (RPEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RPEL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: Receive Packet Start Interrupt Enable (RPSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RPSL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Receive FIFO Full Interrupt Enable (RFFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RFFL bit is set and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Receive HDLC Data Available Interrupt Enable (RHDAIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RHDAL bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
163
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
HDLC.RFDR
HDLC Receive FIFO Data Register
(0,2,4,6)BCh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
RFD7
X
14
RFD6
X
13
RFD5
X
12
RFD4
X
11
RFD3
X
10
RFD2
X
9
RFD1
X
8
RFD0
X
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
RPS2
X
2
RPS1
X
1
RPS0
X
0
RFDV
0
Note: The FIFO data and status are updated when the Receive FIFO Data (RFD[7:0]) is read (upper byte read).
When this register is read eight bits at a time, a read of the lower byte will reflect the status of the next read of the
upper byte, and reading the upper byte when RFDV=0 may result in a loss of data.
Bits 15 to 8: Receive FIFO Data (RFD[7:0]) – These eight bits are the packet data stored in the Receive FIFO.
RFD[7] is the MSB, and RFD[0] is the LSB. If bit reordering is disabled, RFD[0] is the first bit received, and RFD[7]
is the last bit received. If bit reordering is enabled, RFD[7] is the first bit received, and RFD[0] is the last bit
received.
Bits 3 to 1: Receive Packet Status (RPS[2:0]) – These three bits indicate the status of the received packet and
packet data.
000 = packet middle
001 = packet start.
010 = reserved
011 = reserved
100 = packet end: good packet
101 = packet end: FCS errored packet.
110 = packet end: invalid packet (a non-integer number of bytes).
111 = packet end: aborted packet.
Bit 0: Receive FIFO Data Valid (RFDV) – When 0, the Receive FIFO data (RFD[7:0]) is invalid (the Receive FIFO
is empty). When 1, the Receive FIFO data (RFD[7:0]) is valid.
164
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.7 FEAC Controller
12.7.1 FEAC Transmit Side Register Map
The transmit side utilizes five registers.
Table 12-19. FEAC Transmit Side Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)C0h
(0,2,4,6)C2h
(0,2,4,6)C4h
(0,2,4,6)C6h
(0,2,4,6)C8h
(0,2,4,6)CAh
(0,2,4,6)CCh
(0,2,4,6)CEh
Register
FEAC.TCR
FEAC.TFDR
FEAC.TSR
FEAC.TSRL
FEAC.TSRIE
----
Register Description
FEAC Transmit Control Register
FEAC Transmit Data Register
FEAC Transmit Status Register
FEAC Transmit Status Register Latched
FEAC Transmit Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Unused
Unused
12.7.1.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.TCR
FEAC Transmit Control Register
(0,2,4,6)C0h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-1
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
TFCL
0
1
TFS1
0
0
TFS0
0
Bit 2: Transmit FEAC Codeword Load (TFCL) – A 0 to 1 transition on this bit loads the transmit FEAC processor
mode select bits (TFS[1:0]), and transmit FEAC codes (TFCA[5:0] and TFCB[5:0]). Note: Whenever a FEAC
codeword is loaded, any current FEAC codeword transmission in progress will be immediately halted, and the new
FEAC codeword transmission will be started based on the new values for TFS[1:0], TFCA[5:0], and TFCB[5:0]..
Bits 1 to 0: Transmit FEAC Codeword Select (TFS[1:0]) – These two bits control the transmit FEAC processor
mode. The TFCL bit loads the mode set by this bit.
00 = Idle (all ones)
01 = single code (send code TFCA ten times and send all ones)
10 = dual code (send code TFCA ten times, send code TFCB ten times, and send all ones)
11 = continuous code (send code TFCA continuously)
165
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.TFDR
Transmit FEAC Data Register
(0,2,4,6)C2h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
TFCB5
0
12
TFCB4
0
11
TFCB3
0
10
TFCB2
0
9
TFCB1
0
8
TFCB0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
TFCA5
0
4
TFCA4
0
3
TFCA3
0
2
TFCA2
0
1
TFCA1
0
0
TFCA0
0
Bits 13 to 8: Transmit FEAC Code B (TFCB[5:0]) – These six bits are the transmit FEAC code B data to be
stored inserted into codeword B. TFCB[5] is the LSB (last bit transmitted) of the FEAC code (C[6]), and TFCB[0] is
the MSB (first bit transmitted) of the FEAC code (C[1]).
Bits 5 to 0: Transmit FEAC Code A (TFCA[5:0]) – These six bits are the transmit FEAC code A data to be stored
inserted into codeword A. TFCA[5] is the LSB (last bit transmitted) of the FEAC code (C[6]), and TFCA[0] is the
MSB (first bit transmitted) of the FEAC code (C[1]).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.TSR
FEAC Transmit Status Register
(0,2,4,6)C4h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
--
1
--
0
TFI
Bit 0: Transmit FEAC Idle (TFI) – When 0, the Transmit FEAC processor is sending a FEAC codeword. When 1,
the Transmit FEAC processor is sending an Idle signal (all ones).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.TSRL
FEAC Transmit Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)C6h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
--
1
--
0
TFIL
Bit 0: Transmit FEAC Idle Latched (TFIL) – This bit is set when the TFI bit transitions from 0 to 1. Note:
Immediately after a reset, this bit will be set to one.
166
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.TSRIE
FEAC Transmit Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)C8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
-0
1
-0
0
TFIIE
0
Bit 0: Transmit FEAC Idle Interrupt Enable (TFIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TFIL bit is set and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
12.7.2 FEAC Receive Side Register Map
The receive side utilizes five registers.
Table 12-20. FEAC Receive Side Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)D0h
(0,2,4,6)D2h
(0,2,4,6)D4h
(0,2,4,6)D6h
(0,2,4,6)D8h
(0,2,4,6)DAh
(0,2,4,6)DCh
(0,2,4,6)DEh
Register
FEAC.RCR
-FEAC.RSR
FEAC.RSRL
FEAC.RSRIE
-FEAC.RFDR
--
Register Description
FEAC Receive Control Register
Unused
FEAC Receive Status Register
FEAC Receive Status Register Latched
FEAC Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
FEAC Receive FIFO Data Register
Unused
12.7.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.RCR
FEAC Receive Control Register
(0,2,4,6)D0h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-1
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
-0
1
-0
0
RFR
0
Bit 0: Receive FEAC Reset (RFR) –When 0, the Receive FEAC Processor and Receive FEAC FIFO will resume
normal operations. When 1, the Receive FEAC controller is reset. The FEAC FIFO is emptied, any transfer in
progress is halted, and all incoming data is discarded.
167
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.RSR
FEAC Receive Status Register
(0,2,4,6)D4h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
RFFE
2
--
1
RFCD
0
RFI
Bit 3: Receive FEAC FIFO Empty (RFFE) – When 0, the Receive FIFO contains at least one code. When 1, the
Receive FIFO is empty.
Bit 1: Receive FEAC Codeword Detect (RFCD) – When 0, the Receive FEAC Processor is not currently receiving
a FEAC codeword. When 1, the Receive FEAC Processor is currently receiving a FEAC codeword.
Bit 0: Receive FEAC Idle (RFI) – When 0, the Receive FEAC processor is not receiving a FEAC Idle signal (all
ones). When 1, the Receive FEAC processor is receiving a FEAC Idle signal.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.RSRL
FEAC Receive Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)D6h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
RFFOL
1
RFCDL
0
RFIL
Bit 2: Receive FEAC FIFO Overflow Latched (RFFOL) – This bit is set when a Receive FIFO overflow condition
occurs. An overflow condition results in a loss of data.
Bit 1: Receive FEAC Codeword Detect Latched (RFCDL) – This bit is set when the RFCD bit transitions from 0
to 1.
Bit 0: Receive FEAC Idle Latched (RFIL) – This bit is set when the RFI bit transitions from 0 to 1. Note:
Immediately after a reset, this bit will be set to one.
168
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.RSRIE
FEAC Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)D8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
-0
2
RFFOIE
0
1
RFCDIE
0
0
RFIIE
0
Bit 2: Receive FEAC FIFO Overflow Interrupt Enable (RFFOIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RFFOL bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Receive FEAC Codeword Detect Interrupt Enable (RFCDIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RFCDL
bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Receive FEAC Idle Interrupt Enable (RFIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RFIL bit is set and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
FEAC.RFDR
FEAC Receive FIFO Data Register
(0,2,4,6)DCh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RFFI
0
6
-0
5
RFF5
0
4
RFF4
0
3
RFF3
0
2
RFF2
0
1
RFF1
0
0
RFF0
0
Bit 7: Receive FEAC FIFO Data Invalid (RFFI) – When 0, the Receive FIFO data (RFF[5:0]) is valid. When 1, the
Receive FIFO data is invalid (Receive FIFO is empty).
Bits 5 to 0: Receive FEAC FIFO Data (RFF[5:0]) – These six bits are the FEAC code data stored in the Receive
FIFO. RFF[5] is the LSB (last bit received) of the FEAC code (C[6]), and RFF[0] is the MSB (first bit received) of the
FEAC code (C[1]). The Receive FEAC FIFO data (RFF[5:0]) is updated when it is read (lower byte read).
169
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.8 Trail Trace
12.8.1 Trail Trace Transmit Side
The transmit side utilizes three registers. Register Map
Table 12-21. Transmit Side Trail Trace Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)E8h
(0,2,4,6)EAh
(0,2,4,6)ECh
(0,2,4,6)EEh
Register
TT.TCR
TT.TTIAR
TT.TIR
--
Register Description
Trail Trace Transmit Control Register
Trail Trace Transmit Identifier Address Register
Trail Trace Transmit Identifier Register
Unused
12.8.1.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.TCR
Trail Trace Transmit Control Register
(0,2,4,6)E8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
Reserved
0
3
TMAD
0
2
TIDLE
0
1
TDIE
0
0
TBRE
0
Bit 3: Transmit Multi-frame Alignment Insertion Disable (TMAD) – When 0, multi-frame alignment signal (MAS)
insertion is enabled, and the first bit transmitted of each trail trace byte is overwritten with an MAS bit. When 1,
MAS insertion is disabled, and the trail trace bytes from the Transmit Data Storage are output without being
modified.
Bit 2: Transmit Trail Trace Identifier Idle (TIDLE) – When 0, the programmed transmit trail trace identifier will be
transmitted. When 1, all zeros will be transmitted.
Bit 1: Transmit Data Inversion Enable (TDIE) – When 0, the outgoing data from trail trace processing is output
directly. When 1, the outgoing data from trail trace processing is inverted before being output.
Bit 0: Transmit Bit Reordering Enable (TBRE) – When 0, bit reordering is disabled (The first bit transmitted is the
MSB TT.TIR.TTD[7] of the byte). When 1, bit reordering is enabled (The first bit transmitted is the LSB
TT.TIR.TTD[0] of the byte).
170
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.TTIAR
Trail Trace Transmit Identifier Address Register
(0,2,4,6)EAh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
TTIA3
0
2
TTIA2
0
1
TTIA1
0
0
TTIA0
0
Bits 3 to 0: Transmit Trail Trace Identifier Address (TTIA[3:0]) – These four bits indicate the transmit trail trace
identifier byte to be read/written by the next memory access. Address 0h indicates the first byte of the transmit trail
trace identifier. Note: The value of these bits increments with each transmit trail trace identifier memory access
(when these bits are Fh, a memory access will return them to 0h).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.TIR
Trail Trace Transmit Identifier Register
(0,2,4,6)ECh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
TTD7
0
6
TTD6
0
5
TTD5
0
4
TTD4
0
3
TTD3
0
2
TTD2
0
1
TTD1
0
0
TTD0
0
Bits 7 to 0: Transmit Trail Trace Identifier Data (TTD[7:0]) – These eight bits are the transmit trail trace identifier
data. The transmit trail trace identifier address will be incremented whenever these bits are read or written (when
address location Fh is read or written, the address will return to 0h).
171
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.8.2 Trail Trace Receive Side Register Map
The receive side utilizes seven registers.
Table 12-22. Trail Trace Receive Side Register Map
Address
(0,2,4,6)F0h
(0,2,4,6)F2h
(0,2,4,6)F4h
(0,2,4,6)F6h
(0,2,4,6)F8h
(0,2,4,6)FAh
(0,2,4,6)FCh
(0,2,4,6)FEh
Register
TT.RCR
TT.RIAR
TT.RSR
TT.RSRL
TT.RSRIE
-TT.RIR
TT.EIR
Register Description
Trail Trace Receive Control Register
Trail Trace Receive Identifier Address Register
Trail Trace Receive Status Register
Trail Trace Receive Status Register Latched
Trail Trace Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
Unused
Trail Trace Receive Identifier Register
Trail Trace Expected Identifier Register
12.8.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RCR
Trail Trace Receive Control Register
(0,2,4,6)F0h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
RMAD
0
2
RETCE
0
1
RDIE
0
0
RBRE
0
Bit 3: Receive Multi-frame Alignment Disable (RMAD) – When 0, multi-frame alignment is performed. When 1,
multi-frame alignment is disabled and the trail trace bytes are stored starting with a random byte.
Bit 2: Receive Expected Trail Trace Comparison Enable (RETCE) – When 0, expected trail trace comparison is
disabled. When 1, expected trail trace comparison is performed. Note: When the RMAD bit is one, expected trail
trace comparison is disabled regardless of the setting of this bit.
Bit 1: Receive Data Inversion Enable (RDIE) – When 0, the incoming data is directly passed on for trail trace
processing. When 1, the incoming data is inverted before being passed on for trail trace processing.
Bit 0: Receive Bit Reordering Enable (RBRE) – When 0, bit reordering is disabled (The first bit received is the
MSB TT.RIR.RTD[7] of the byte). When 1, bit reordering is enabled (The first bit received is the LSB
TT.RIR.RTD[0] of the byte).
172
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RTIAR
Trail Trace Receive Identifier Address Register
(0,2,4,6)F2h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
Reserved
0
12
Reserved
0
11
ETIA3
0
10
ETIA2
0
9
ETIA1
0
8
ETIA0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
RTIA3
0
2
RTIA2
0
1
RTIA1
0
0
RTIA0
0
Bits 11 to 8: Expected Trail Trace Identifier Address (ETIA[3:0]) – These four bits indicate the expected trail
trace identifier byte to be read/written by the next memory access. Address 0h indicates the first byte of the
expected trail trace identifier. Note: The value of these bits increments with each expected trail trace identifier
memory access (when these bits are Fh, a memory access will return them to 0h).
Bits 3 to 0: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Address (RTIA[3:0]) – These four bits indicate the receive trail trace
identifier byte to be read by the next memory access. Address 0h indicates the first byte of the receive trail trace
identifier. Note: The value of these bits increments with each received trail trace identifier memory access (when
these bits are Fh, a memory access will return them to 0h).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RSR
Trail Trace Receive Status Register
(0,2,4,6)F4h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
--
2
RTIM
1
RTIU
0
RIDL
Bit 2: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch (RTIM)
0 = Received and expected trail trace identifiers match.
1 = Received and expected trail trace identifiers do not match; trail trace identifier
mismatch (TIM) declared.
Bit 1: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Unstable (RTIU)
0 = Received trail trace identifier is not unstable
1 = Received trail trace identifier is in an unstable condition (TIU); TIU is declared when eight
consecutive trail trace identifiers are received that do not match either the receive trail trace
identifier or the previously stored current trail trace identifier.
Bit 0: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Idle (RIDL)
0 = Received trail trace identifier is not in idle condition.
1 = Received trail trace identifier is in idle condition. Idle condition is declared upon the reception of
an all zeros trail trace identifier five consecutive times.
173
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RSRL
Trail Trace Receive Status Register Latched
(0,2,4,6)F6h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
RTICL
2
RTIML
1
RTIUL
0
RIDLL
Bit 3: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Change Latched (RTICL) – This bit is set when the receive trail trace
identifier is updated.
Bit 2: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch Latched (RTIML) – This bit is set when the TT.RSR.RTIM bit
transitions from 0 to 1.
Bit 1: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Unstable Latched (RTIUL) – This bit is set when the TT.RSR.RTIU bit
transitions from 0 to 1.
Bit 0: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Idle Latched (RIDLL) – This bit is set when the TT.RSR.RIDL bit transitions
from 0 to 1.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RSRIE
Trail Trace Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable
(0,2,4,6)F8h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
RTICIE
0
2
RTIMIE
0
1
RTIUIE
0
0
RIDLIE
0
Bit 3: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Change Interrupt Enable (RTICIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
TT.RSRL.RTICL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Mismatch Interrupt Enable (RTIMIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
TT.RSRL.RTIML bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Unstable Interrupt Enable (RTIUIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
TT.RSRL.RTIUL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Idle Interrupt Enable (RIDLIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the
TT.RSRL.RIDLL bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
174
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.RIR
Trail Trace Receive Identifier Register
(0,2,4,6)FCh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RTD7
0
6
RTD6
0
5
RTD5
0
4
RTD4
0
3
RTD3
0
2
RTD2
0
1
RTD1
0
0
RTD0
0
Bits 7 to 0: Receive Trail Trace Identifier Data (RTD[7:0]) – These eight bits are the receive trail trace identifier
data. The receive trail trace identifier address will be incremented whenever these bits are read (when byte Fh is
read, the address will return to 0h).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
TT.EIR
Trail Trace Expected Identifier Register
(0,2,4,6)FEh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
ETD7
0
6
ETD6
0
5
ETD5
0
4
ETD4
0
3
ETD3
0
2
ETD2
0
1
ETD1
0
0
ETD0
0
Bits 7 to 0: Expected Trail Trace Identifier Data (ETD[7:0]) – These eight bits are the expected trail trace
identifier data. The expected trail trace identifier address will be incremented whenever these bits are read or
written (when byte Fh is read or written, the address will return to 0h).
175
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9 DS3/E3 Framer
12.9.1 Transmit DS3
The transmit DS3 utilizes two registers.
Table 12-23. Transmit DS3 Framer Register Map
Address
Register
(1,3,5,7)18h T3.TCR
(1,3,5,7)1Ah T3.TEIR
(1,3,5,7)1Ch
-(1,3,5,7)1Eh
--
Register Description
T3 Transmit Control Register
T3 Transmit Error Insertion Register
Reserved
Reserved
12.9.1.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.TCR
T3 Transmit Control Register
(1,3,5,7)18h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
PBGE
0
11
TIDLE
0
10
CBGD
0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
TFEBE
0
4
AFEBED
0
3
TRDI
0
2
ARDID
0
1
TFGC
0
0
TAIS
0
Bit 12: P-bit Generation Enable (PBGE) – When 0, Transmit Frame Processor P-bit generation is disabled. If
transmit frame generation is also disabled, the P-bit overhead periods in the incoming DS3 signal will be passed
through to overhead insertion. When 1, Transmit Frame Processor P-bit generation is enabled. The P-bit overhead
periods in the incoming DS3 signal will be overwritten even if transmit frame generation is disabled
Bit 11: Transmit DS3 Idle Signal (TIDLE) –
0 = Transmit DS3 Idle signal is not inserted
1 = Transmit DS3 Idle signal is inserted into the DS3 frame.
Bit 10: C-bit Generation Disable (CBGD) (M23 mode only) – When 0, Transmit Frame Processor C-bit
generation is enabled. The C-bit overhead periods in the incoming M23 DS3 signal will be overwritten with zeros.
When 1, Transmit Frame Processor C-bit generation is disabled. The C-bit overhead periods in the incoming M23
DS3 signal will be treated as payload, and passed through to overhead insertion. This bit is ignored in C-bit DS3
mode.
Bit 5: Transmit FEBE Error (TFEBE) – When automatic far-end block error generation is defeated (AFEBED = 1),
the inverse of this bit is inserted into the bits C41, C42, and C43. Note: a far-end block error value of zero (TFEBE=1)
indicates a far-end block error. This bit is ignored in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 4: Automatic FEBE Defeat (AFEBED) – When 0, a far-end block error is automatically generated based upon
the receive C-bit parity errors or framing errors. When 1, a far-end block error is inserted from the register bit
TFEBE. This bit is ignored in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 3: Transmit RDI Alarm (TRDI) – When automatic RDI generation is defeated (ARDID = 1), the inverse of this
bit is inserted into the X-bits (X1 and X2). Note: an RDI value of zero (TRDI=1) indicates an alarm.
176
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 2: Automatic RDI Defeat (ARDID) – When 0, the RDI is automatically generated based received DS3 alarms.
When 1, the RDI is inserted from the register bit TRDI.
Bit 1: Transmit Frame Generation Control (TFGC) – When this bit is zero, the Transmit Frame Processor frame
generation is enabled. The DS3 overhead positions in the incoming DS3 payload will be overwritten with the
internally generated DS3 overhead. When this bit is one, the Transmit Frame Processor frame generation is
disabled. The DS3 overhead positions in the incoming DS3 payload will be passed through to error insertion. Note:
Frame generation will still overwrite the P-bits if PBGE = 1. Also, the DS3 overhead periods can still be overwritten
by overhead insertion.
Bit 0: Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAIS) –
0 = Transmit Alarm Indication Signal is not inserted
1 = Transmit Alarm Indication Signal is inserted into data stream payload
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.TEIR
T3 Transmit Error Insertion Register
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
CCPEIE
0
10
CPEI
0
9
CFBEIE
0
8
FBEI
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
Reserved
0
6
CPEIE
0
5
PEI
0
4
FEIC1
0
3
FEIC0
0
2
FEI
0
1
TSEI
0
0
MEIMS
0
Bit 11: Continuous C-bit Parity Error Insertion Enable (CCPEIE) – When 0, single C-bit parity error insertion is
enabled. When 1, continuous C-bit parity error insertion is enabled, and C-bit parity errors will be transmitted
continuously if CPEI is high.
Bit 10: C-bit Parity Error Insertion Enable (CPEI) – When 0, C-bit parity error insertion is disabled. When 1, C-bit
parity error insertion is enabled.
Bit 9: Continuous Far-End Block Error Insertion Enable (CFBEIE) – When 0, single far-end block error
insertion is enabled. When 1, continuous far-end block error insertion is enabled, and far-end block errors will be
transmitted continuously if FBEI is high.
Bit 8: Far-End Block Error Insertion Enable (FBEI) – When 0, far-end block error insertion is disabled. When 1,
far-end block error insertion is enabled.
Bit 6: Continuous P-bit Parity Error Insertion Enable (CPEIE) – When 0, single P-bit parity error insertion is
enabled. When 1, continuous P-bit parity error insertion is enabled, and P-bit parity errors will be transmitted
continuously if PEI is high.
Bit 5: P-bit Parity Error Insertion Enable (PEI) – When 0, P-bit parity error insertion is disabled. When 1, P-bit
parity error insertion is enabled.
Bits 4 to 3: Framing Error Insertion Control (FEIC[1:0]) – These two bits control the framing error event to be
inserted.
00 = F-bit error.
01 = M-bit error.
10 = SEF error.
11 = OOMF error.
Bit 2: Framing Error Insertion Enable (FEI) – When 0, framing error insertion is disabled. When 1, framing error
insertion is enabled.
177
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 1: Transmit Single Error Insert (TSEI) – This bit causes an error of the enabled type(s) to be inserted in the
transmit data stream if manual error insertion is disabled (MEIMS = 0). A 0 to 1 transition causes a single error to
be inserted. For a second error to be inserted, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. Note: If MEIMS is low, and
this bit transitions more than once between error insertion opportunities, only one error will be inserted.
Bit 0: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS) – When 0, error insertion is initiated by the TSEI register bit.
When 1, error insertion is initiated by the transmit manual error insertion signal (TMEI). Note: If TMEI or TSEI is
one, changing the state of this bit may cause an error to be inserted.
12.9.2 Receive DS3 Register Map
The receive DS3 utilizes eleven registers. Two registers are shared for C-Bit and M23 DS3 modes. The M23 DS3
mode does not use the RFEBER or RCPECR count registers.
Table 12-24. Receive DS3 Framer Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)20h
(1,3,5,7)22h
(1,3,5,7)24h
(1,3,5,7)26h
(1,3,5,7)28h
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
(1,3,5,7)30h
(1,3,5,7)32h
(1,3,5,7)34h
(1,3,5,7)36h
(1,3,5,7)38h
(1,3,5,7)3Ah
(1,3,5,7)3Ch
(1,3,5,7)3Eh
Register
T3.RCR
-T3.RSR1
T3.RSR2
T3.RSRL1
T3.RSRL2
T3.RSRIE1
T3.RSRIE2
--T3.RFECR
T3.RPECR
T3.RFBECR
T3.RCPECR
---
Register Description
T3 Receive Control Register
Reserved
T3 Receive Status Register #1
T3 Receive Status Register #2
T3 Receive Status Register Latched #1
T3 Receive Status Register Latched #2
T3 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
T3 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
Reserved
Reserved
T3 Receive Framing Error Count Register
T3 Receive P-bit Parity Error Count Register
T3 Receive Far-End Block Error Count Register
T3 Receive C-bit Parity Error Count Register
Unused
Unused
12.9.2.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RCR
T3 Receive Control Register
(1,3,5,7)20h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
COVHD
0
13
MAOD
0
12
MDAISI
0
11
AAISD
0
10
ECC
0
9
FECC1
0
8
FECC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RAILE
0
6
RAILD
0
5
RAIOD
0
4
RAIAD
0
3
ROMD
0
2
LIP1
0
1
LIP0
0
0
FRSYNC
0
Bit 14: C-bit Overhead Masking Disable (COVHD) – When 0, the C-bit positions will be marked as overhead
(RDENn=0). When 1, the C-bit positions will be marked as data (RDENn=1). This bit is ignored in C-bit DS3 mode
or when the ROMD bit is set to one.
178
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 13: Multi-frame Alignment OOF Disable (MAOD) – When 0, an OOF condition is declared whenever an
OOMF or SEF condition is declared. When 1, an OOF condition is declared only when an SEF condition is
declared.
Bit 12: Manual Downstream AIS Insertion (MDAISI) – When 0, manual downstream AIS insertion is disabled.
When 1, manual downstream AIS insertion is enabled.
Bit 11: Automatic Downstream AIS Disable (AAISD) – When 0, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition
will cause downstream AIS to be inserted. When 1, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition will not cause
downstream AIS to be inserted.
Bit 10: Error Count Control (ECC) – When 0, framing errors, P-bit parity errors, C-bit parity errors, and far-end
block errors will not be counted if an OOF or AIS condition is present. P-bit parity errors, C-bit parity errors, and farend block errors will also not be counted during the DS3 frame in which an OOF condition is terminated, and the
next DS3 frame. When 1, framing errors, P-bit parity errors, C-bit parity errors, and far-end block errors will be
counted regardless of the presence of an OOF or AIS condition.
Bits 9 to 8: Framing Error Count Control (FECC[1:0]) – These two bits control the type of framing error events
that are counted.
00 = count OOF occurrences (counted regardless of the setting of the ECC bit).
01 = count M bit and F bit errors.
10 = count only F bit errors.
11 = count only M bit errors.
Bit 7: Receive Alarm Indication on LOF Enable (RAILE) – When 0, an LOF condition does not affect the receive
alarm indication signal (RAI). When 1, an LOF condition will cause the transmit DS3 X-bits to be set to zero if
transmit automatic RDI is enabled.
Bit 6: Receive Alarm Indication on LOS Disable (RAILD) – When 0, an LOS condition will cause the transmit
DS3 X-bits to be set to zero if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an LOS condition does not affect the RAI
signal.
Bit 5: Receive Alarm Indication on SEF Disable (RAIOD) – When 0, an SEF condition will cause the transmit
DS3 X-bits to be set to zero if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an SEF condition does not affect the RAI
signal.
Bit 4: Receive Alarm Indication on AIS Disable (RAIAD) – When 0, an AIS condition will cause the transmit DS3
X-bits to be set to zero if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an AIS condition does not affect the RAI
signal.
Bit 3: Receive Overhead Masking Disable (ROMD) – When 0, the DS3 overhead positions in the outgoing DS3
payload will be marked as overhead by RDENn. When 1, the DS3 overhead positions in the outgoing DS3 payload
will be marked as payload data by RDENn. When this bit is set to one, the COVHD bit is ignored.
Bits 2 to 1: LOF Integration Period (LIP[1:0]) – These two bits determine the OOF integration period for
declaring LOF.
00 = OOF is integrated for 3 ms before declaring LOF
01 = OOF is integrated for 2 ms before declaring LOF
10 = OOF is integrated for 1 ms before declaring LOF.
11 = LOF is declared at the same time as OOF.
Bit 0: Force Framer Resynchronization (FRSYNC) – A 0 to 1 transition forces an OOF, SEF, and OOMF
condition. The bit must be cleared and set to one again to force another resynchronization
179
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSR1
T3 Receive Status Register #1
(1,3,5,7)24h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
Reserved
13
--
12
Reserved
11
T3FM
10
AIC
9
IDLE
8
RUA1
Bit #
Name
7
OOMF
6
SEF
5
--
4
LOF
3
RDI
2
AIS
1
OOF
0
LOS
Bit 11: T3 Framing Format Mismatch (T3FM) – This bit indicates the DS3 framer is programmed for a framing
format (C-bit or M23) that is different than the format indicated by the incoming DS3 signal.
Bit 10: Application Identification Channel (AIC) – This bit indicates the current state of the Application
Identification Channel (AIC) from the C11 bit. AIC = 1 is C-bit mode, AIC = 0 is M23 mode.
Bit 9: DS3 Idle Signal (IDLE) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a DS3 idle signal (Idle) condition.
When 1, the receive frame processor is in an Idle condition.
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a receive unframed all
1’s (RUA1) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an RUA1 condition.
Bit 7: Out Of Multi-frame (OOMF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an out of multi-frame (OOMF)
condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an OOMF condition.
Bit 6: Severely Errored Frame (SEF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a severely errored frame
(SEF) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an SEF condition.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame (LOF) – When 0, the receive framer is not in a loss of frame (LOF) condition. When 1, the
receive frame processor is in an LOF condition.
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication (RDI) – This bit indicates the current state of the remote defect indication (RDI)
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an alarm indication signal
(AIS) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an AIS condition.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame (OOF) – When 0, the receive framer is not in an out of frame (OOF) condition. When 1, the
receive frame processor is in an OOF condition.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal (LOS) – When 0, the receive framer is not in a loss of signal (LOS) condition. When 1, the
receive framer is in an LOS condition.
180
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSR2
T3 Receive Status Register #2
(1,3,5,7)26h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
CPEC
2
FBEC
1
PEC
0
FEC
Bit 3: C-bit Parity Error Count (CPEC) – When 0, the C-bit parity error count is zero. When 1, the C-bit parity
error count is one or more. This bit is set to zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 2: Remote Error Indication Count (FBEC) – When 0, the remote error indication count is zero. When 1, the
remote error indication count is one or more. This bit is set to zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 1: P-bit Parity Error Count (PEC) – When 0, the P-bit parity error count is zero. When 1, the P-bit parity error
count is one or more.
Bit 0: Framing Error Count (FEC) – When 0, the framing error count is zero. When 1, the framing error count is
one or more. The type of framing error event counted is determined by T3.RCR.FECC[1:0]
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSRL1
T3 Receive Status Register Latched #1
(1,3,5,7)28h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
Reserved
13
Reserved
12
Reserved
11
T3FML
10
AICL
9
IDLEL
8
RUA1L
Bit #
Name
7
OOMFL
6
SEFL
5
COFAL
4
LOFL
3
RAIL
2
AISL
1
OOFL
0
LOSL
Bit 11: T3 Framing Format Mismatch Latched (T3FML) – This bit is set when the T3FM bit transitions from zero
to one.
Bit 10: Application Identification Channel Change Latched (AICL) – This bit is set when the AIC bit changes
state.
Bit 9: DS3 Idle Signal Change Latched (IDLEL) – This bit is set when the IDLE bit changes state.
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Change Latched (RUA1L) – This bit is set when the RUA1 bit changes state.
Bit 7: Out Of Multi-frame Change Latched (OOMFL) – This bit is set when the OOMF bit changes state.
Bit 6: Severely Errored Frame Change Latched (SEFL) – This bit is set when the SEF bit changes state.
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Latched (COFAL) – This bit is set when the data path frame counters are
updated with a new DS3 frame alignment that is different from the previous DS3 frame alignment.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Change Latched (LOFL) – This bit is set when the LOF bit changes state.
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication Change Latched (RDIL) – This bit is set when the RDI bit changes state.
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Change Latched (AISL) – This bit is set when the AIS bit changes state.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Change Latched (OOFL) – This bit is set when the OOF bit changes state.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Change Latched (LOSL) – This bit is set when the LOS bit changes state.
181
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSRL2
T3 Receive Status Register Latched #2
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
CPEL
10
FBEL
9
PEL
8
FEL
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
CPECL
2
FBECL
1
PECL
0
FECL
Bit 11: C-bit Parity Error Latched (CPEL) – This bit is set when a C-bit parity error is detected. This bit is set to
zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 10: Remote Error Indication Latched (FBEL) – This bit is set when a far-end block error is detected. This bit
is set to zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 9: P-bit Parity Error Latched (PEL) – This bit is set when a P-bit parity error is detected.
Bit 8: Framing Error Latched (FEL) – This bit is set when a framing error is detected. The type of framing error
event that causes this bit to be set is determined by T3.RCR.FECC[1:0]
Bit 3: C-bit Parity Error Count Latched (CPECL) – This bit is set when the CPEC bit transitions from zero to one.
This bit is set to zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 2: Remote Error Indication Count Latched (FBECL) – This bit is set when the FBEC bit transitions from zero
to one. This bit is set to zero in M23 DS3 mode.
Bit 1: P-bit Parity Error Count Latched (PECL) – This bit is set when the PEC bit transitions from zero to one.
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Latched (FECL) – This bit is set when the FEC bit transitions from zero to one.
182
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSRIE1
T3 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
Reserved
0
12
Reserved
0
11
T3FMIE
0
10
AICIE
0
9
IDLEIE
0
8
RUA1IE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
OOMFIE
0
6
SEFIE
0
5
COFAIE
0
4
LOFIE
0
3
RAIIE
0
2
AISIE
0
1
OOFIE
0
0
LOSIE
0
Bit 11: T3 Framing Format Mismatch Interrupt Enable (T3FMIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the T3FML bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 10: Application Identification Channel Interrupt Enable (AICIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the AICL bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 9: DS3 Idle Signal Change Interrupt Enable (IDLEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the IDLEL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Interrupt Enable (RUA1IE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RUA1L bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 7: Out Of Multi-frame Interrupt Enable (OOMFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the OOMFL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 6: Severely Errored Frame Interrupt Enable (SEFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the SEFL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Interrupt Enable (COFAIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the COFAL bit is
set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Interrupt Enable (LOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOFL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication Interrupt Enable (RDIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RDIL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
183
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Interrupt Enable (AISIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the AISL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Interrupt Enable (OOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the OOFL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Interrupt Enable (LOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOSL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RSRIE2
T3 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
CPEIE
0
10
FBEIE
0
9
PEIE
0
8
FEIE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
CPECIE
0
2
FBECIE
0
1
PECIE
0
0
FECIE
0
Bit 11: C-bit Parity Error Interrupt Enable (CPEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the CPEL bit is set and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 10: Remote Error Interrupt Enable (FBEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FBEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 9: P-bit Parity Error Interrupt Enable (PEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the PEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 8: Framing Error Interrupt Enable (FEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: C-bit Parity Error Count Interrupt Enable (CPECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the CPECL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
184
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 2: Far-End Block Error Count Interrupt Enable (FBECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FBECL bit is
set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: P-bit Parity Error Count Interrupt Enable (PECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the PECL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Interrupt Enable (FECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FECL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RFECR
T3 Receive Framing Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)34h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
FE15
0
14
FE14
0
13
FE13
0
12
FE12
0
11
FE11
0
10
FE10
0
9
FE9
0
8
FE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
FE7
0
6
FE6
0
5
FE5
0
4
FE4
0
3
FE3
0
2
FE2
0
1
FE1
0
0
FE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Framing Error Count (FE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of framing error events on
the incoming DS3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RPECR
T3 Receive P-bit Parity Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)36h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
PE15
0
14
PE14
0
13
PE13
0
12
PE12
0
11
PE11
0
10
PE10
0
9
PE9
0
8
PE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
PE7
0
6
PE6
0
5
PE5
0
4
PE4
0
3
PE3
0
2
PE2
0
1
PE1
0
0
PE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: P-bit Parity Error Count (PE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of P-bit parity errors
detected on the incoming DS3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
185
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RFBECR
T3 Receive Far-End Block Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)38h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
FBE15
0
14
FBE14
0
13
FBE13
0
12
FBE12
0
11
FBE11
0
10
FBE10
0
9
FBE9
0
8
FBE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
FBE7
0
6
FBE6
0
5
FBE5
0
4
FBE4
0
3
FBE3
0
2
FBE2
0
1
FBE1
0
0
FBE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Far-End Block Error Count (FBE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of far-end block
errors detected on the incoming DS3 data stream. The associated counter will not increment in M23 DS3 mode.
This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
T3.RCPECR
T3 Receive C-bit Parity Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)3Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
CPE15
0
14
CPE14
0
13
CPE13
0
12
CPE12
0
11
CPE11
0
10
CPE10
0
9
CPE9
0
8
CPE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
CPE7
0
6
CPE6
0
5
CPE5
0
4
CPE4
0
3
CPE3
0
2
CPE2
0
1
CPE1
0
0
CPE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: C-bit Parity Error Count (CPE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of C-bit parity errors
detected on the incoming DS3 data stream. The associated counter will not increment in M23 DS3 mode. This
register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
186
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.3 Transmit G.751 E3
The transmit G.751 E3 utilizes two registers.
12.9.3.1 Register Map
Table 12-25. Transmit G.751 E3 Framer Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)18h
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
(1,3,5,7)1Ch
(1,3,5,7)1Eh
Register
Register Description
E3G751.TCR
E3G751.TEIR
---
E3 G.751 Transmit Control Register
E3 G.751 Transmit Error Insertion Register
Reserved
Reserved
12.9.3.2 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.TCR
E3 G.751 Transmit Control Register
(1,3,5,7)18h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
-0
13
-0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
TNBC1
0
8
TNBC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
TABC1
0
2
TABC0
0
1
TFGC
0
0
TAIS
0
Bits 9 to 8: Transmit N Bit Control (TNBC[1:0]) – These two bits control the source of the N bit.
00 = 1
01 = transmit data from HDLC controller.
10 = transmit data from FEAC controller.
11 = 0
Note: If TNBC[1:0] is 10 and TABC[1:0] is 01, both the N bit and A bit will carry the same transmit FEAC controller
(one bit per frame period), however, the N bit and A bit in the same frame may or may not be equal.
Bits 3 to 2: Transmit A Bit Control (TABC[1:0]) – These two bits control the source of the A bit.
00 = automatically generated based upon received E3 alarms.
01 = transmit from the FEAC controller.
10 = 0
11 = 1
Note: If TABC[1:0] is 01 and TNBC[1:0] is 10, both the A bit and N bit will carry the same transmit FEAC controller
(one bit per frame period), however, the A bit and N bit in the same frame may or may not be equal.
Bit 1: Transmit Frame Generation Control (TFGC) – When this bit is zero, the Transmit Frame Processor frame
generation is enabled. The E3 overhead positions in the incoming E3 payload will be overwritten with the internally
generated E3 overhead. When this bit is one, the Transmit Frame Processor frame generation is disabled. The E3
overhead positions in the incoming E3 payload will be passed through to error insertion. Note: The E3 overhead
periods can still be overwritten by overhead insertion.
Bit 0: Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAIS) – When 0, the normal signal is transmitted. When 1, the output
E3 data stream is forced to all ones (AIS).
187
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.TEIR
E3 G.751 Transmit Error Insertion Register
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
Reserved
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
Reserved
0
6
Reserved
0
5
Reserved
0
4
FEIC1
0
3
FEIC0
0
2
FEI
0
1
TSEI
0
0
MEIMS
0
Bits 4 to 3: Framing Error Insert Control (FEIC[1:0]) – These two bits control the framing error event to be
inserted.
00 = single bit error in one frame.
01 = word error in one frame.
10 = single bit error in four consecutive frames.
11 = word error in four consecutive frames.
Bit 2: Framing Error Insertion Enable (FEI) – When 0, framing error insertion is disabled. When 1, framing error
insertion is enabled.
Bit 1: Transmit Single Error Insert (TSEI) – This bit causes an error of the enabled type(s) to be inserted in the
transmit data stream if manual error insertion is disabled (MEIMS = 0). A 0 to 1 transition causes a single error to
be inserted. For a second error to be inserted, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. Note: If MEIMS is low, and
this bit transitions more than once between error insertion opportunities, only one error will be inserted.
Bit 0: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS) – When 0, error insertion is initiated by the TSEI register bit.
When 1, error insertion is initiated by the transmit manual error insertion signal (TMEI). Note: If TMEI or TSEI is
one, changing the state of this bit may cause an error to be inserted.
188
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.4 Receive G.751 E3 Register Map
The receive G.751 E3 utilizes eight registers.
Table 12-26. Receive G.751 E3 Framer Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)20h
(1,3,5,7)22h
(1,3,5,7)24h
(1,3,5,7)26h
(1,3,5,7)28h
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
(1,3,5,7)30h
(1,3,5,7)32h
(1,3,5,7)34h
(1,3,5,7)36h
(1,3,5,7)38h
(1,3,5,7)3Ah
(1,3,5,7)3Ch
(1,3,5,7)3Eh
Register
Register Description
E3G751.RCR
-E3G751.RSR1
E3G751.RSR2
E3G751.RSRL1
E3G751.RSRL2
E3G751.RSRIE1
E3G751.RSRIE2
--E3G751.RFECR
------
E3 G.751 Receive Control Register
Reserved
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register #1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register #2
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Latched #1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Latched #2
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
Reserved
Reserved
E3 G.751 Receive Framing Error Count Register
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Unused
Unused
12.9.4.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RCR
E3 G.751 Receive Control Register
(1,3,5,7)20h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
DLS
0
12
MDAISI
0
11
AAISD
0
10
ECC
0
9
FECC1
0
8
FECC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RAILE
0
6
RAILD
0
5
RAIOD
0
4
RAIAD
0
3
ROMD
0
2
LIP1
0
1
LIP0
0
0
FRSYNC
0
Bit 13: Receive FEAC Data Link Source (DLS) – When 0, the receive FEAC controller will be sourced from the N
bit. When 1, the receive FEAC controller will be sourced from the A bit.
Bit 12: Manual Downstream AIS Insertion (MDAISI) – When 0, manual downstream AIS insertion is disabled.
When 1, manual downstream AIS insertion is enabled.
Bit 11: Automatic Downstream AIS Disable (AAISD) – When 0, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition
will cause downstream AIS to be inserted. When 1, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition will not cause
downstream AIS to be inserted.
Bit 10: Error Count Control (ECC) – When 0, framing errors will not be counted if an OOF or AIS condition is
present. When 1, framing errors will be counted regardless of the presence of an OOF or AIS condition.
189
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bits 9 to 8: Framing Error Count Control (FECC[1:0]) – These two bits control the type of framing error events
that are counted.
00 = count OOF occurrences (counted regardless of the setting of the ECC bit)..
01 = count each bit error in the FAS (up to 10 per frame).
10 = count frame alignment signal (FAS) errors (up to one per frame).
11 = reserved
Bit 7: Receive Alarm Indication on LOF Enable (RAILE) – When 0, an LOF condition does not affect the receive
alarm indication signal (RAI). When 1, an LOF condition will cause the transmit E3 A bit to be set to one if transmit
automatic RAI is enabled.
Bit 6: Receive Alarm Indication on LOS Disable (RAILD) – When 0, an LOS condition will cause the transmit E3
A bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RAI is enabled. When 1, an LOS condition does not affect the RAI
signal.
Bit 5: Receive Alarm Indication on OOF Disable (RAIOD) – When 0, an OOF condition will cause the transmit
E3 A bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RAI is enabled. When 1, an OOF condition does not affect the RAI
signal.
Bit 4: Receive Alarm Indication on AIS Disable (RAIAD) – When 0, an AIS condition will cause the transmit E3
A bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RAI is enabled. When 1, an AIS condition does not affect the RAI signal.
Bit 3: Receive Overhead Masking Disable (ROMD) – When 0, the E3 overhead positions in the outgoing E3
payload will be marked as overhead by RDENn. When 1, the E3 overhead positions in the outgoing E3 payload will
be marked as data by RDENn.
Bits 2 to 1: LOF Integration Period (LIP[1:0]) – These two bits determine the OOF integration period for
declaring LOF.
00 = OOF is integrated for 3 ms before declaring LOF
01 = OOF is integrated for 2 ms before declaring LOF.
10 = OOF is integrated for 1 ms before declaring LOF
11 = LOF is declared at the same time as OOF
Bit 0: Force Framer Resynchronization (FRSYNC) – A 0 to 1 transition forces an OOF condition at the FAS
check. This bit must be cleared and set to one again to force another resynchronization
190
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSR1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register #1
(1,3,5,7)24h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
Reserved
13
--
12
Reserved
11
Reserved
10
Reserved
9
Reserved
8
RUA1
Bit #
Name
7
RAB
6
RNB
5
--
4
LOF
3
RDI
2
AIS
1
OOF
0
LOS
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a receive unframed all
1’s (RUA1) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an RUA1 condition.
Bit 7: Receive A Bit (RAB) – This bit is the integrated A bit extracted from the E3 frame.
Bit 6: Receive N Bit (RNB) – This bit is the integrated N bit extracted from the E3 frame.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame (LOF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a loss of frame (LOF) condition.
When 1, the receive frame processor is in an LOF condition.
Bit 3: Remote Alarm Indication (RDI) – This bit indicates the current state of the remote alarm indication (RDI).
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an alarm indication signal
(AIS) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an AIS condition.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame (OOF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an out of frame (OOF) condition.
When 1, the receive frame processor is in an OOF condition.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal (LOS) – When 0, the receive loss of signal (LOS) input (RLOS) is low. When 1, RLOS is
high.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSR2
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register #2
(1,3,5,7)26h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
Reserved
2
Reserved
1
Reserved
0
FEC
Bit 0: Framing Error Count (FEC) – When 0, the framing error count is zero. When 1, the framing error count is
one or more.
191
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSRL1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Latched #1
(1,3,5,7)28h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
Reserved
13
Reserved
12
Reserved
11
Reserved
10
Reserved
9
Reserved
8
RUA1L
Bit #
Name
7
ACL
6
NCL
5
COFAL
4
LOFL
3
RDIL
2
AISL
1
OOFL
0
LOSL
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Change Latched (RUA1L) – This bit is set when the RUA1 bit changes state.
Bit 7: A Bit Change Latched (ACL) – This bit is set when the RAB bit changes state.
Bit 6: N Bit Change Latched (NCL) – This bit is set when the RNB bit changes state.
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Latched (COFAL) – This bit is set when the data path frame counters are
updated with a new frame alignment that is different from the previous frame alignment.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Change Latched (LOFL) – This bit is set when the LOF bit changes state.
Bit 3: Remote Alarm Indication Change Latched (RDIL) – This bit is set when the RDI bit changes state.
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Change Latched (AISL) – This bit is set when the AIS bit changes state.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Change Latched (OOFL) – This bit is set when the OOF bit changes state.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Change Latched (LOSL) – This bit is set when the LOS bit changes state.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSRL2
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Latched #2
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
Reserved
10
Reserved
9
Reserved
8
FEL
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
Reserved
2
Reserved
1
Reserved
0
FECL
Bit 8: Framing Error Latched (FEL) – This bit is set when a framing error is detected.
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Latched (FECL) – This bit is set when the FEC bit transitions from zero to one.
192
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSRIE1
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
Reserved
0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
RUA1IE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
ACIE
0
6
NCIE
0
5
COFAIE
0
4
LOFIE
0
3
RDIIE
0
2
AISIE
0
1
OOFIE
0
0
LOSIE
0
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Interrupt Enable (RUA1IE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RUA1L bit and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 7: A Bit Change Interrupt Enable (ACIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the ACL bit and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 6: N Bit Change Interrupt Enable (NCIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the NCL bit and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Interrupt Enable (COFAIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the COFAL bit
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Interrupt Enable (LOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOFL bit and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 3: Remote Alarm Indication Interrupt Enable (RDIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RDIL bit and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Interrupt Enable (AISIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the AISL bit and the bit
in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Interrupt Enable (OOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the OOFL bit and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Interrupt Enable (LOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOSL bit and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port are set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
193
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RSRIE2
E3 G.751 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
FEIE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
Reserved
0
2
Reserved
0
1
Reserved
0
0
FECIE
0
Bit 8: Framing Error Interrupt Enable (FEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Interrupt Enable (FECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FECL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G751.RFECR
E3 G.751 Receive Framing Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)34h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
FE15
0
14
FE14
0
13
FE13
0
12
FE12
0
11
FE11
0
10
FE10
0
9
FE9
0
8
FE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
FE7
0
6
FE6
0
5
FE5
0
4
FE4
0
3
FE3
0
2
FE2
0
1
FE1
0
0
FE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Framing Error Count (FE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of framing error events on
the incoming E3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
194
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.5 Transmit G.832 E3 Register Map
The transmit G.832 E3 utilizes four registers.
Table 12-27. Transmit G.832 E3 Framer Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)18h
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
(1,3,5,7)1Ch
(1,3,5,7)1Eh
Register
E3G832.TCR
E3G832.TEIR
E3G832.TMABR
E3G832.TNGBR
Register Description
E3 G.832 Transmit Control Register
E3 G.832 Transmit Error Insertion Register
E3 G.832 Transmit MA Byte Register
E3 G.832 Transmit NR and GC Byte Register
12.9.5.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.TCR
E3 G.832 Transmit Control Register
(1,3,5,7)18h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
-0
13
-0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
TGCC
0
9
TNRC1
0
8
TNRC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
TFEBE
0
4
AFEBED
0
3
TRDI
0
2
ARDID
0
1
TFGC
0
0
TAIS
0
Bit 10: Transmit GC Byte Control (TGCC) – When 0, the GC byte is inserted from the transmit HDLC controller .
When 1, the GC byte is inserted from the GC byte register.
Note: If bit TGCC is 0 and TNRC[1:0] is 01, both the GC byte and NR byte will carry the same transmit HDLC
controller (eight bits per frame period), however, the GC byte and NR byte in the same frame may or may not be
equal.
Bits 9 to 8: Transmit NR Byte Control (TNRC[1:0]) – These two bits control the source of the NR byte.
00 = all ones.
01 = transmit from the HDLC controller.
10 = transmit from the FEAC controller.
11 = NR byte register.
Note: If TNRC[1:0] is 01 and TGCC is 0, both the NR byte and GC byte will carry the same transmit HDLC
controller (eight bits per frame period), however, the NR byte and GC byte in the same frame may or may not be
equal.
Bit 5: Transmit REI Error (TFEBE) – When automatic REI generation is defeated (AFEBED = 1), this bit is
inserted into the second bit of the MA byte.
Bit 4: Automatic REI Defeat (AFEBED) – When 0, the REI is automatically generated based upon the transmit
remote error indication (TREI) signal. When 1, the REI is inserted from the register bit TFEBE.
Bit 3: Transmit RDI Alarm (TRDI) – When automatic RDI generation is defeated (ARDID = 1), this bit is inserted
into the first bit of the MA byte.
Bit 2: Automatic RDI Defeat (ARDID) – When 0, the RDI is automatically generated based upon the received E3
alarms. When 1, the RDI is inserted from the register bit TRDI.
195
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 1: Transmit Frame Generation Control (TFGC) – When this bit is zero, the Transmit Frame Processor frame
generation is enabled. The E3 overhead positions in the incoming E3 payload will be overwritten with the internally
generated DS3 overhead. When this bit is one, the Transmit Frame Processor frame generation is disabled. The
E3 overhead positions in the incoming E3 payload will be passed through to error insertion. Note: The E3 overhead
periods can still be overwritten by overhead insertion.
Bit 0: Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAIS) – When 0, the normal signal is transmitted. When 1, the E3
output data stream is forced to all ones (AIS).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.TEIR
E3 G.832 Transmit Error Insertion Register
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
CFBEIE
0
8
FBEI
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
PBEE
0
6
CPEIE
0
5
PEI
0
4
FEIC1
0
3
FEIC0
0
2
FEI
0
1
TSEI
0
0
MEIMS
0
Bit 9: Continuous Remote Error Indication Error Insertion Enable (CFBEIE) – When 0, single remote error
indication (REI) error insertion is enabled. When 1, continuous REI error insertion is enabled, and REI errors will be
transmitted continuously if FEBI is high.
Bit 8: Remote Error Indication Error Insertion Enable (FBEI) – When 0, REI error insertion is disabled. When 1,
REI error insertion is enabled.
Bit 7: Parity Block Error Enable (PBEE) – When 0, a parity error is generated by inverting a single bit in the EM
byte. When 1, a parity error is generated by inverting all eight bits in the EM byte.
Bit 6: Continuous Parity Error Insertion Enable (CPEIE) – When 0, single parity (BIP-8) error insertion is
enabled. When 1, continuous parity error insertion is enabled, and parity errors will be transmitted continuously if
PEI is high.
Bit 5: Parity Error Insertion Enable (PEI) – When 0, parity error insertion is disabled. When 1, parity error
insertion is enabled.
Bits 4 to 3: Framing Error Control (FEIC[1:0]) – These two bits control the framing error event to be inserted.
00 = single bit error in one frame.
01 = word error in one frame.
10 = single bit error in four consecutive frames.
11 = word error in four consecutive frames.
Bit 2: Framing Error Insertion Enable (FEI) – When 0, framing error insertion is disabled. When 1, framing error
insertion is enabled.
Bit 1: Transmit Single Error Insert (TSEI) – This bit causes an error of the enabled type(s) to be inserted in the
transmit data stream if manual error insertion is disabled (MEIMS = 0). A 0 to 1 transition causes a single error to
be inserted. For a second error to be inserted, this bit must be set to 0, and back to 1. Note: If MEIMS is low, and
this bit transitions more than once between error insertion opportunities, only one error will be inserted.
Bit 0: Manual Error Insert Mode Select (MEIMS) – When 0, error insertion is initiated by the TSEI register bit.
When 1, error insertion is initiated by the transmit manual error insertion signal (TMEI). Note: If TMEI or TSEI is
one, changing the state of this bit may cause an error to be inserted.
196
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.TMABR
E3 G.832 Transmit MA Byte Register
(1,3,5,7)1Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
TPT2
0
6
TPT1
0
5
TPT0
0
4
TTIGD
0
3
TTI3
0
2
TTI2
0
1
TTI1
0
0
TTI0
0
Bits 7 to 5: Transmit Payload Type (TPT[2:0]) – These bits determines the value transmitted in the payload type
(third, fourth, and fifth bits in the MA byte).
Bit 4: Transmit Timing Source Indicator Bit Generation Disable (TTIGD) – When 0, the last three bits of the MA
byte (MA[6:8]) are generated from the four timing source indicator bits TTI[3:0]. When 1, TTI[3] is ignored and
TTI[2:0] are directly inserted into the last three bits of the MA byte.
Bits 3 to 0: Transmit Timing Source Indication (TTI[3:0]) – These four bits make up the timing source indicator
bits.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.TNGBR
E3 G.832 Transmit NR and GC Byte Register
(1,3,5,7)1Eh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
TGC7
0
14
TGC6
0
13
TGC5
0
12
TGC4
0
11
TGC3
0
10
TGC2
0
9
TGC1
0
8
TGC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
TNR7
0
6
TNR6
0
5
TNR5
0
4
TNR4
0
3
TNR3
0
2
TNR2
0
1
TNR1
0
0
TNR0
0
Bits 15 to 8: Transmit GC Byte (TGC[7:0]) – These eight bits are the GC byte to be inserted into the E3 frame.
Bits 7 to 0: Transmit NR Byte (TNR[7:0]) – These eight bits are the NR byte to be inserted into the E3 frame.
197
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.6 Receive G.832 E3 Register Map
The receive G.832 E3 utilizes thirteen registers.
Table 12-28. Receive G.832 E3 Framer Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)20h
(1,3,5,7)22h
(1,3,5,7)24h
(1,3,5,7)26h
(1,3,5,7)28h
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
(1,3,5,7)30h
(1,3,5,7)32h
(1,3,5,7)34h
(1,3,5,7)36h
(1,3,5,7)38h
(1,3,5,7)3Ah
(1,3,5,7)3Ch
(1,3,5,7)3Eh
Register
Register Description
E3G832.RCR
E3G832.RMACR
E3G832.RSR1
E3G832.RSR2
E3G832.RSRL1
E3G832.RSRL2
E3G832.RSRIE1
E3G832.RSRIE2
E3G832.RMABR
E3G832.RNGBR
E3G832.RFECR
E3G832.RPECR
E3G832.RFBER
----
E3 G.832 Receive Control Register
E3 G.832 Receive MA Byte Control Register
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register #1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register #2
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Latched #1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Latched #2
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
E3 G.832 Receive MA Byte Register
E3 G.832 Receive NR and GC Byte Register
E3 G.832 Receive Framing Error Count Register
E3 G.832 Receive Parity Error Count Register
E3 G.832 Receive Remote Error Indication Count Register
Reserved
Unused
Unused
12.9.6.1 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RCR
E3 G.832 Receive Control Register
(1,3,5,7)20h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
PEC
0
13
DLS
0
12
MDAISI
0
11
AAISD
0
10
ECC
0
9
FECC1
0
8
FECC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RDILE
0
6
RDILD
0
5
RDIOD
0
4
RDIAD
0
3
ROMD
0
2
LIP1
0
1
LIP0
0
0
FRSYNC
0
Bit 14: Parity Error Count (PEC) – When 0, BIP-8 block errors (EM byte) are detected (no more than one per
frame). When 1, BIP-8-bit errors are detected (up to 8 per frame).
Bit 13: Receive HDLC Data Link Source (DLS) – When 0, the receive HDLC data link will be sourced from the
GC byte. When 1, the receive HDLC data link will be sourced from the NR byte.
Bit 12: Manual Downstream AIS Insertion (MDAISI) – When 0, manual downstream AIS insertion is disabled.
When 1, manual downstream AIS insertion is enabled.
Bit 11: Automatic Downstream AIS Disable (AAISD) – When 0, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition
will cause downstream AIS to be inserted. When 1, the presence of an LOS, OOF, or AIS condition will not cause
downstream AIS to be inserted.
Bit 10: Error Count Control (ECC) – When 0, framing errors, parity errors, and REI errors will not be counted if an
OOF or AIS condition is present. Parity errors and REI errors will also not be counted during the E3 frame in which
198
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
an OOF or AIS condition is terminated, and the next E3 frame. When 1, framing errors, parity errors, and REI
errors will be counted regardless of the presence of an OOF or AIS condition.
Bits 9 to 8: Framing Error Count Control (FECC[1:0]) – These two bits control the type of framing error events
that are counted.
00 = count OOF occurrences (counted regardless of the setting of the ECC bit)..
01 = count each bit error in FA1 and FA2 (up to 16 per frame).
10 = count frame alignment word (FA1 and FA2) errors (up to one per frame).
11 = count FA1 byte errors and FA2 byte errors (up to 2 per frame).
Bit 7: Receive Defect Indication on LOF Enable (RDILE) – When 0, an LOF condition does not affect the receive
defect indication signal (RDI). When 1, an LOF condition will cause the transmit E3 RDI bit to be set to one if
transmit automatic RDI is enabled.
Bit 6: Receive Defect Indication on LOS Disable (RDILD) – When 0, an LOS condition will cause the transmit E3
RDI bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an LOS condition does not affect the RDI
signal.
Bit 5: Receive Defect Indication on OOF Disable (RDIOD) – When 0, an OOF condition will cause the transmit
E3 RDI bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an OOF condition does not affect the RDI
signal.
Bit 4: Receive Defect Indication on AIS Disable (RDIAD) – When 0, an AIS condition will cause the transmit E3
RDI bit to be set to one if transmit automatic RDI is enabled. When 1, an AIS condition does not affect the RDI
signal.
Bit 3: Receive Overhead Masking Disable (ROMD) – When 0, the E3 overhead positions in the outgoing E3
payload will be marked as overhead by RDENn. When 1, the E3 overhead positions in the outgoing E3 payload will
be marked as data by RDENn.
Bits 2 to 1: LOF Integration Period (LIP[1:0]) – These two bits determine the OOF integration period for
declaring LOF.
00 = OOF is integrated for 3 ms before declaring LOF.
01 = OOF is integrated for 2 ms before declaring LOF.
10 = OOF is integrated for 1 ms before declaring LOF.
11 = LOF is declared at the same time as OOF.
Bit 0: Force Framer Resynchronization (FRSYNC) – A 0 to 1 transition forces. an OOF condition at the next
framing word check. This bit must be cleared and set to one again to force another resynchronization.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RMACR
E3 G.832 Receive MA Byte Control Register
(1,3,5,7)22h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
EPT2
0
2
EPT1
0
1
EPT0
0
0
TIED
0
Bits 3 to 1: Expected Payload Type (EPT[2:0]) – These three bits contain the expected value of the payload
type.
Bit 0: Timing Source Indicator Bit Extraction Disable (TIED) – When 0, the four timing source indications bits
are extracted from the last three bits of the MA byte (MA[6:8]), and stored in a register. When 1, timing source
indicator bit extraction is disabled, and the last three bits of the MA byte are integrated and stored in a register.
199
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSR1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register #1
(1,3,5,7)24h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
--
13
--
12
RPTU
11
RPTM
10
Reserved
9
Reserved
8
RUA1
Bit #
Name
7
Reserved
6
Reserved
5
--
4
LOF
3
RAI
2
AIS
1
OOF
0
LOS
Bit 12: Receive Payload Type Unstable (RPTU) – When 0, the receive payload type is stable. When 1, the
receive payload type is unstable.
Bit 11: Receive Payload Type Mismatch (RPTM) – When 0, the receive payload type and expected payload type
match. When 1, the receive payload type and expected payload type do not match.
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a receive unframed all
1’s (RUA1) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an RUA1 condition.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame (LOF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a loss of frame (LOF) condition.
When 1, the receive frame processor is in an LOF condition.
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication (RDI) – This bit indicates the current state of the remote defect indication (RDI).
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an alarm indication signal
(AIS) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an AIS condition.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame (OOF) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in an out of frame (OOF) condition.
When 1, the receive frame processor is in an OOF condition.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal (LOS) – When 0, the receive loss of signal (LOS) input (RLOS) is low. When 1, RLOS is
high.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSR2
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register #2
(1,3,5,7)26h
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
--
10
--
9
--
8
--
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
Reserved
2
FBEC
1
PEC
0
FEC
Bit 2: Remote Error Indication Count (FBEC) – When 0, the remote error indication count is zero. When 1, the
remote error indication count is one or more.
Bit 1: Parity Error Count (PEC) – When 0, the parity error count is zero. When 1, the parity error count is one or
more.
Bit 0: Framing Error Count (FEC) – When 0, the framing error count is zero. When 1, the framing error count is
one or more.
200
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSRL1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Latched #1
(1,3,5,7)28h
Bit #
Name
15
Reserved
14
--
13
TIL
12
RPTUL
11
RPTML
10
RPTL
9
Reserved
8
RUA1L
Bit #
Name
7
GCL
6
NRL
5
COFAL
4
LOFL
3
RDIL
2
AISL
1
OOFL
0
LOSL
Bit 13: Timing Source Indication Change Latched (TIL) – This bit is set when the TI[3:0] bits change state.
Bit 12: Receive Payload Type Unstable Latched (RPTUL) – This bit is set when the RPTU bit transitions from
zero to one.
Bit 11: Receive Payload Type Mismatch Latched (RPTML) – This bit is set when the RPTM bit transitions from
zero to one.
Bit 10: Receive Payload Type Change Latched (RPTL) – This bit is set when the RPT[2:0] bits change state.
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Change Latched (RUA1L) – This bit is set when the RUA1 bit changes state.
Bit 7: GC Byte Change Latched (GCL) – This bit is set when the RGC byte changes state.
Bit 6: NR Byte Change Latched (NRL) – This bit is set when the RNR byte changes state.
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Latched (COFAL) – This bit is set when the data path frame counters are
updated with a new frame alignment that is different from the previous frame alignment.
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Change Latched (LOFL) – This bit is set when the LOF bit changes state.
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication Change Latched (RDIL) – This bit is set when the RDI bit changes state.
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Change Latched (AISL) – This bit is set when the AIS bit changes state.
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Change Latched (OOFL) – This bit is set when the OOF bit changes state.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Change Latched (LOSL) – This bit is set when the LOS bit changes state.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSRL2
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Latched #2
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
Bit #
Name
15
--
14
--
13
--
12
--
11
Reserved
10
FBEL
9
PEL
8
FEL
Bit #
Name
7
--
6
--
5
--
4
--
3
Reserved
2
FBECL
1
PECL
0
FECL
Bit 10: Remote Error Indication Latched (FBEL) – This bit is set when a remote error indication is detected.
Bit 9: Parity Error Latched (PEL) – This bit is set when a BIP-8 parity error is detected.
Bit 8: Framing Error Latched (FEL) – This bit is set when a framing error is detected.
Bit 2: Remote Error Indication Count Latched (FBECL) – This bit is set when the FBEC bit transitions from zero
to one.
Bit 1: Parity Error Count Latched (PECL) – This bit is set when the PEC bit transitions from zero to one.
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Latched (FECL) – This bit is set when the FEC bit transitions from zero to one.
201
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSRIE1
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
-0
13
TIIE
0
12
RPTUIE
0
11
RPTMIE
0
10
RPTIE
0
9
Reserved
0
8
RUA1IE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
GCIE
0
6
NRIE
0
5
COFAIE
0
4
LOFIE
0
3
RAIIE
0
2
AISIE
0
1
OOFIE
0
0
LOSIE
0
Bit 13: Timing Indication Interrupt Enable (TIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the TIL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 12: Receive Payload Type Unstable Interrupt Enable (RPTUIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RPTUL
bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 11: Receive Payload Type Mismatch Interrupt Enable (RPTMIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RPTML
bit is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 10: Receive Payload Type Interrupt Enable (RPTIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RPTL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Interrupt Enable (RUA1IE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RUA1L bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 7: GC Byte Interrupt Enable (GCIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the GCL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 6: NR Byte Interrupt Enable (NRIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the NRL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 5: Change Of Frame Alignment Interrupt Enable (COFAIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the COFAL bit is
set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 4: Loss Of Frame Interrupt Enable (LOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOFL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
202
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Bit 3: Remote Defect Indication Interrupt Enable (RDIIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RDIL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Alarm Indication Signal Interrupt Enable (AISIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the AISL bit is set and
the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Out Of Frame Interrupt Enable (OOFIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the OOFL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Interrupt Enable (LOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOSL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
203
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RSRIE2
E3 G.832 Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #2
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
Reserved
0
10
FBEIE
0
9
PEIE
0
8
FEIE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
-0
4
-0
3
Reserved
0
2
FBECIE
0
1
PECIE
0
0
FECIE
0
Bit 10: Remote Error Indication Interrupt Enable (FBEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FBEL bit is set
and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 9: Parity Error Interrupt Enable (PEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the PEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 8: Framing Error Interrupt Enable (FEIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FEL bit is set and the bit in
GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 2: Remote Error Indication Count Interrupt Enable (FBECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FBECL bit
is set and the bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 1: Parity Error Count Interrupt Enable (PECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the PECL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Framing Error Count Interrupt Enable (FECIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the FECL bit is set and the
bit in GL.ISRIE.PSRIE[4:1] that corresponds to this port is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
204
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RMABR
E3 G.832 Receive MA Byte Register
(1,3,5,7)30h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
-0
14
-0
13
-0
12
-0
11
-0
10
-0
9
-0
8
-0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
RPT2
0
5
RPT1
0
4
RPT0
0
3
TI3
0
2
TI2
0
1
TI1
0
0
TI0
0
Bits 6 to 4: Receive Payload Type (RPT[2:0]) – These three bits are the integrated version of the payload type
(MA[3:5]) from the MA byte.
Bits 3 to 0: Receive Timing Source Indication (TI[3:0]) – When timing source indicator extraction is enabled,
these four bits are the integrated version of the four timing source indicator bits extracted from the last three bits of
the MA byte (MA[6:8]). When timing source indicator bit extraction is disabled, TI[3] is zero, and TI[2:0] contain the
integrated version of the last three bits of the MA byte.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RNGBR
E3 G.832 Receive NR and GC Byte Register
(1,3,5,7)32h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
RGC7
0
14
RGC6
0
13
RGC5
0
12
RGC4
0
11
RGC3
0
10
RGC2
0
9
RGC1
0
8
RGC0
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
RNR7
0
6
RNR6
0
5
RNR5
0
4
RNR4
0
3
RNR3
0
2
RNR2
0
1
RNR1
0
0
RNR0
0
Bits 15 to 8: Receive GC Byte (RGC[7:0]) – These eight bits are the integrated version of the GC byte as
extracted from the E3 frame.
Bits 7 to 0: Receive NR Byte (RNR[7:0]) – These eight bits are the integrated version of the NR byte as extracted
from the E3 frame.
205
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RFECR
E3 G.832 Receive Framing Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)34h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
FE15
0
14
FE14
0
13
FE13
0
12
FE12
0
11
FE11
0
10
FE10
0
9
FE9
0
8
FE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
FE7
0
6
FE6
0
5
FE5
0
4
FE4
0
3
FE3
0
2
FE2
0
1
FE1
0
0
FE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Framing Error Count (FE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of framing error events on
the incoming E3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RPECR
E3 G.832 Receive Parity Error Count Register
(1,3,5,7)36h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
PE15
0
14
PE14
0
13
PE13
0
12
PE12
0
11
PE11
0
10
PE10
0
9
PE9
0
8
PE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
PE7
0
6
PE6
0
5
PE5
0
4
PE4
0
3
PE3
0
2
PE2
0
1
PE1
0
0
PE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Parity Error Count (PE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of parity (BIP-8) errors
detected on the incoming E3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see Section 10.4.5).
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
E3G832.RFBER
E3 G.832 Receive Remote Error Indication Count Register
(1,3,5,7)38h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
FBE15
0
14
FBE14
0
13
FBE13
0
12
FBE12
0
11
FBE11
0
10
FBE10
0
9
FBE9
0
8
FBE8
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
FBE7
0
6
FBE6
0
5
FBE5
0
4
FBE4
0
3
FBE3
0
2
FBE2
0
1
FBE1
0
0
FBE0
0
Bits 15 to 0: Remote Error Indication Count (FBE[15:0]) – These sixteen bits indicate the number of remote
error indications detected on the incoming E3 data stream. This register is updated via the PMU signal (see
Section 10.4.5).
206
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.7 Transmit Clear Channel
The transmit Clear Channel mode utilizes one register.
12.9.7.1 Register Map
Table 12-29. Transmit Clear Channel Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)18h
(1,3,5,7)1Ah
(1,3,5,7)1Ch
(1,3,5,7)1Eh
Register
CC.TCR
----
Register Description
Clear Channel Transmit Control Register
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
12.9.7.2 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
CC.TCR
Clear Channel Transmit Control Register
(1,3,5,7)18h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
-0
13
-0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
Reserved
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
-0
6
-0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
Reserved
0
2
Reserved
0
1
Reserved
0
0
TAIS
0
Bit 0: Transmit Alarm Indication Signal (TAIS) – When 0, the normal signal is transmitted. When 1, the output
clear channel data stream is forced to all ones (AIS). Note: This bit is logically ORed with the TAIS input signal.
207
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
12.9.8 Receive Clear Channel
The receive Clear Channel mode utilizes four registers.
12.9.8.1 Register Map
Table 12-30. Receive Clear Channel Register Map
Address
(1,3,5,7)20h
(1,3,5,7)22h
(1,3,5,7)24h
(1,3,5,7)26h
(1,3,5,7)28h
(1,3,5,7)2Ah
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
(1,3,5,7)2Eh
(1,3,5,7)30h
(1,3,5,7)32h
(1,3,5,7)34h
(1,3,5,7)36h
(1,3,5,7)38h
(1,3,5,7)3Ah
(1,3,5,7)3Ch
(1,3,5,7)3Eh
Register
CC.RCR
-CC.RSR1
-CC.RSRL1
-CC.RSRIE1
----------
Register Description
Clear Channel Receive Control Register
Reserved
Clear Channel Receive Status Register #1
Reserved
Clear Channel Receive Status Register Latched #1
Reserved
Clear Channel Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Unused
Unused
12.9.8.2 Register Bit Descriptions
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
CC.RCR
Clear Channel Receive Control Register
(1,3,5,7)20h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
Reserved
0
12
MDAISI
0
11
AAISD
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
Reserved
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
Reserved
0
6
Reserved
0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
Reserved
0
2
Reserved
0
1
Reserved
0
0
Reserved
0
Bit 12: Manual Downstream AIS Insertion (MDAISI) – When 0, manual downstream AIS insertion is disabled.
When 1, manual downstream AIS insertion is enabled.
Bit 11: Automatic Downstream AIS Disable (AAISD) – When 0, the presence of an LOS condition will cause
downstream AIS to be inserted. When 1, the presence of an LOS condition will not cause downstream AIS to be
inserted.
208
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
CC.RSR1
Clear Channel Receive Status Register #1
(1,3,5,7)24h
14
Reserved
0
13
-0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
RUA1
0
Bit #
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserved Reserved
-Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
LOS
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s (RUA1) – When 0, the receive frame processor is not in a receive unframed all
1’s (RUA1) condition. When 1, the receive frame processor is in an RUA1 condition.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal (LOS) – When 0, the receive loss of signal (LOS) input (RLOS) is low. When 1, RLOS is
high.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
CC.RSRL1
Clear Channel Receive Status Register Latched #1
(1,3,5,7)28h
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
Reserved
0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
RUA1L
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
Reserved
0
6
Reserved
0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
Reserved
0
2
Reserved
0
1
Reserved
0
0
LOSL
0
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Latched (RUA1L) – This bit is set when the RUA1 bit changes state.
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Change Latched (LOSL) – This bit is set when the LOS bit changes state.
Register Name:
Register Description:
Register Address:
CC.RSRIE1
Clear Channel Receive Status Register Interrupt Enable #1
(1,3,5,7)2Ch
Bit #
Name
Default
15
Reserved
0
14
Reserved
0
13
Reserved
0
12
Reserved
0
11
Reserved
0
10
Reserved
0
9
Reserved
0
8
RUA1IE
0
Bit #
Name
Default
7
Reserved
0
6
Reserved
0
5
Reserved
0
4
Reserved
0
3
Reserved
0
2
Reserved
0
1
Reserved
0
0
LOSIE
0
Bit 8: Receive Unframed All 1’s Interrupt Enable (RUA1IE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the RUA1L bit is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
Bit 0: Loss Of Signal Interrupt Enable (LOSIE) – This bit enables an interrupt if the LOSL bit is set.
0 = interrupt disabled
1 = interrupt enabled
209
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
13 JTAG INFORMATION
13.1 JTAG Description
This device supports the standard instruction codes SAMPLE/PRELOAD, BYPASS, and EXTEST. Optional public
instructions included are HIGHZ, CLAMP, and IDCODE. The device contains the following items, which meet the
requirements set by the IEEE 1149.1 Standard Test Access Port (TAP) and Boundary Scan Architecture:
Test Access Port (TAP)
TAP Controller
Instruction Register
Bypass Register
Boundary Scan Register
Device Identification Register
The Test Access Port has the necessary interface pins, namely JTCLK, JTDI, JTDO, and JTMS, and the optional
JTRST input. Details on these pins can be found in Section 8. Refer to IEEE 1149.1-1990, IEEE 1149.1a-1993, and
IEEE 1149.1b-1994 for details about the Boundary Scan Architecture and the Test Access Port.
Figure 13-1. JTAG Block Diagram
Boundary Scan
Register
Identification
Register
Mux
Bypass
Register
Instruction
Register
Select
Test Access Port
Controller
10K
10K
JTDI
JTMS
Tri-State
10K
JTCLK
JTRST
210
JTDO
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
13.2 JTAG TAP Controller State Machine Description
This section covers the details on the operation of the Test Access Port (TAP) Controller State Machine. See
Figure 13-2 for details on each of the states described below. The TAP controller is a finite state machine that
responds to the logic level at JTMS on the rising edge of JTCLK.
Figure 13-2. JTAG TAP Controller State Machine
Test-Logic-Reset
1
0
0
Run-Test/Idle
1
Select
DR-Scan
1
0
1
0
1
Capture-DR
Capture-IR
0
0
Shift-DR
Shift-IR
0
1
1
1
Exit1-IR
0
0
Pause-DR
Pause-IR
0
1
0
1
0
Exit2-DR
Exit2-IR
1
1
Update-DR
1
0
1
Exit1- DR
0
1
Select
IR-Scan
0
Update-IR
1
0
Test-Logic-Reset. When JTRST is changed from low to high, the TAP controller starts in the Test-Logic-Reset
state, and the Instruction Register is loaded with the IDCODE instruction. All system logic and I/O pads on the
device operate normally. This state can also be reached from any other state by holding JTMS high and clocking
JTCLK five times.
Run-Test-Idle. Run-Test-Idle is used between scan operations or during specific tests. The Instruction Register
and Test Register remain idle.
Select-DR-Scan. All test registers retain their previous state. With JTMS low, a rising edge of JTCLK moves the
controller into the Capture-DR state and initiates a scan sequence. JTMS high moves the controller to the SelectIR-Scan state.
Capture-DR. Data may be parallel loaded into the Test Data register selected by the current instruction. If the
instruction does not call for a parallel load or the selected register does not allow parallel loads, the Test Register
remains at its current value. On the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller goes to the Shift-DR state if JTMS is low or
to the Exit1-DR state if JTMS is high.
211
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Shift-DR. The Test Data Register selected by the current instruction is connected between JTDI and JTDO and
shifts data one stage towards its serial output on each rising edge of JTCLK. If a Test Register selected by the
current instruction is not placed in the serial path, it maintains its previous state.
Exit1-DR. While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Update-DR state
that terminates the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Pause-DR
state.
Pause-DR. Shifting of the Test registers is halted while in this state. All Test registers selected by the current
instruction retain their previous state. The controller remains in this state while JTMS is low. A rising edge on
JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Exit2-DR state.
Exit2-DR. While in this state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high puts the controller in the Update-DR state
and terminate the scanning process. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Shift-DR
state.
Update-DR. A falling edge on JTCLK while in the Update-DR state latches the data from the shift register path of
the Test registers into the data output latches. This prevents changes at the parallel output due to changes in the
shift register. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low, puts the controller in the Run-Test-Idle state. With JTMS
high, the controller enters the Select-DR-Scan state.
Select-IR-Scan. All Test registers retain their previous state. The Instruction register remains unchanged during
this state. With JTMS low, a rising edge on JTCLK moves the controller into the Capture-IR state and initiates a
scan sequence for the Instruction register. JTMS high during a rising edge on JTCLK puts the controller back into
the Test-Logic-Reset state.
Capture-IR. The Capture-IR state is used to load the shift register in the Instruction register with a fixed value of
001. This value is loaded on the rising edge of JTCLK. If JTMS is high on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller
enters the Exit1-IR state. If JTMS is low on the rising edge of JTCLK, the controller enters the Shift-IR state.
Shift-IR. In this state, the shift register in the Instruction register is connected between JTDI and JTDO and shifts
data one stage for every rising edge of JTCLK towards the serial output. The parallel registers, as well as all Test
registers, remain at their previous states. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high moves the controller to the Exit1IR state. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low keeps the controller in the Shift-IR state while moving data one
stage through the Instruction shift register.
Exit1-IR. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low puts the controller in the Pause-IR state. If JTMS is high on the
rising edge of JTCLK, the controller enters the Update-IR state and terminate the scanning process.
Pause-IR. Shifting of the Instruction register is halted temporarily. With JTMS high, a rising edge on JTCLK puts
the controller in the Exit2-IR state. The controller remains in the Pause-IR state if JTMS is low during a rising edge
on JTCLK.
Exit2-IR. A rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS high put the controller in the Update-IR state. The controller loops
back to the Shift-IR state if JTMS is low during a rising edge of JTCLK in this state.
Update-IR. The instruction shifted into the Instruction shift register is latched into the parallel output on the falling
edge of JTCLK as the controller enters this state. Once latched, this instruction becomes the current instruction. A
rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low, puts the controller in the Run-Test-Idle state. With JTMS high, the controller
enters the Select-DR-Scan state.
212
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
13.3 JTAG Instruction Register and Instructions
The instruction register contains a shift register as well as a latched parallel output and is 3 bits in length. When the
TAP controller enters the Shift-IR state, the instruction shift register is connected between JTDI and JTDO. While in
the Shift-IR state, a rising edge on JTCLK with JTMS low shifts data one stage toward the serial output at JTDO. A
rising edge on JTCLK in the Exit1-IR state or the Exit2-IR state with JTMS high moves the controller to the UpdateIR state. The falling edge of that same JTCLK latches the data in the instruction shift register to the instruction
parallel output. Instructions supported by the device and their respective operational binary codes are shown in
Table 13-1.
Table 13-1. JTAG Instruction Codes
INSTRUCTIONS
SELECTED REGISTER
INSTRUCTION CODES
EXTEST
IDCODE
SAMPLE/PRELOAD
CLAMP
HIGHZ
—
—
BYPASS
Boundary Scan
Device Identification
Boundary Scan
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
Bypass
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
SAMPLE/PRELOAD. This is a mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification. This instruction supports
two functions. The digital I/Os of the device can be sampled at the boundary scan register without interfering with
the normal operation of the device and the boundary scan register can be pre-loaded for the EXTEST instruction.
The positive edge of JTCLK in the Capture-DR state samples all digital input pins into the boundary scan register.
The boundary scan register is connected between JTDI and JTDO. The data on JTDI pin is clocked into the
boundary scan register and the data captured in the Capture-DR state is shifted out the TDO pin in the Shift-DR
state.
EXTEST. This is a mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification. This instruction allows testing of all
interconnections to the device. When the EXTEST instruction is latched in the instruction register, the following
actions occur. Once enabled by the Update-IR state, the parallel outputs of all digital output pins are driven
according to the values in the boundary scan registers on the positive edge of JTCLK. The boundary scan register
is connected between JTDI and JTDO. The positive edge of JTCLK in the Capture-DR state samples all digital
input pins into the boundary scan register. The negative edge of JTCLK in the Update-DR state causes all of the
digital output pins to be driven according to the values in the boundary scan registers that have been shifted in
during the Shift-DR state. The outputs are returned to their normal mode or HIZ mode at the positive edge of
JTCLK during the Update-IR state when an instruction other than EXTEST or CLAMP is activated.
BYPASS. This is a mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification. When the BYPASS instruction is
latched into the parallel instruction register, JTDI connects to JTDO through the 1-bit bypass test register. This
allows data to pass from JTDI to JTDO not affecting the device’s normal operation. This mode can be used to
bypass one or more chips in a system with multiple chips that have their JTAG scan chain connected in series. The
chips not in bypass can then be tested with the normal JTAG modes.
IDCODE. This is a mandatory instruction for the IEEE 1149.1 specification. When the IDCODE instruction is
latched into the parallel instruction register, the identification test register is selected. The device identification code
is loaded into the identification register on the rising edge of JTCLK following entry into the Capture-DR state. ShiftDR can be used to shift the identification code out serially through JTDO. During Test-Logic-Reset, the
identification code is forced into the instruction register’s parallel output.
HIGHZ. All digital outputs are placed into a high-impedance state. The bypass register is connected between JTDI
and JTDO. The outputs are put into the HIZ mode when the HIZ instruction is loaded in the Update-IR state and on
the positive edge of JTCLK. The outputs are returned to their normal mode or driven from the boundary scan
register at the positive edge of JTCLK during the Update-IR state when an instruction other than HIZ is activated.
213
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
CLAMP. All digital output pins output data from the boundary scan parallel output while connecting the bypass
register between JTDI and JTDO. The outputs do not change during the CLAMP instruction. If the previous
instruction was not EXTEST, the outputs will be driven according to the values in the boundary scan register at the
positive edge of JTCLK in the Update-IR state. The typical use of this instruction is in a system that has the JTAG
scan chain of multiple chips connected in series, and all of the chips have their outputs initialized using the
EXTEST mode. Then some of the chips are left initialized using the CLAMP mode and others have their IO
controlled using the EXTEST mode. This reduces the size of the scan chain during the partial testing of the system.
13.4 JTAG ID Codes
Table 13-2. JTAG ID Codes
DS3171
REVISION
ID[31:28]
Consult factory
DEVICE CODE
ID[27:12]
0000000001000100
MANUFACTURER’S CODE
ID[11:1]
00010100001
REQUIRED
ID[0]
1
DS3172
Consult factory
0000000001000101
00010100001
1
DS3173
Consult factory
0000000001000110
00010100001
1
DS3174
Consult factory
0000000001000111
00010100001
1
DEVICE
13.5 JTAG Functional Timing
This functional timing for the JTAG circuits shows:
•
The JTAG controller starting from reset state
•
Shifting out the first 4 LSB bits of the IDCODE
•
Shifting in the BYPASS instruction (111) while shifting out the mandatory X01 pattern
•
Shifting the TDI pin to the TDO pin through the bypass shift register
•
An asynchronous reset occurs while shifting
Figure 13-3. JTAG Functional Timing
(INST)
(STATE)
IDCODE
Run Test
Idle
Reset
Select DR
Scan
Capture
DR
Shift
DR
IDCODE
BYPASS
Exit1
DR
Update
DR
Select DR
Scan
Select IR
Scan
Capture
IR
Shift IR
Exit1
IR
Update
IR
Select DR
Scan
Capture
DR
Shift
DR
Test
Logic Idle
JTCLK
JTRST
JTMS
X
X
JTDI
X
X
JTDO
Output
Pin
X
Output pin level change if in "EXTEST" instruction mode
13.6 IO Pins
All input, output, and inout pins are inout pins in JTAG mode.
214
X
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
14 PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Table 14-1 details the breakdown of the assigned pins for each device.
Table 14-1. Pin Assignment Breakdown
DS3174
DS3173
DS3172
DS3171
I/O Signals
154
129
104
79
Digital VDD
40
40
40
40
Analog VDD
13
13
13
13
VSS
68
68
68
68
275 assigned
pins
250 assigned
pins
225 assigned
pins
200 assigned
pins
Total
Figure 14-1. DS3174 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
VSS
RPOS1
VDD_RX3
RXN3
TXN3
TSOFO1
TLCLK1
B
MODE
VDD
ROHSOF
1
RNEG1
TCLKI1
RXP3
TXP3
C
GPIO[5]
GPIO[6]
A[10]
TPOS1
D
VDD_RX1
A[5]
A[9]
TNEG1
ROHCLK
1
E
A[1]
A[4]
A[8]
JTRST*
TOHEN1
TSER1
9
10
TSOFI1 RLCLK1
TOHSOF
VDD_JA3
1
TOHCLK1
TCLKO1
TOH1
VDD_TX3 RSOFO1
RCLKO1
ROH1
RSER1
ROH3
11
12
13
14
15
RCLKO3
RLCLK3
TCLKO3
TCLKI3
RNEG3
RSER3
RSOFO3
TNEG3
RPOS3
TLCLK3
TSOFO3
RXN1
RXP1
JTCLK
JTMS
GPIO[1]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD_JA1
A[3]
A[7]
JTDO
GPIO[2]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
H
A[0]
A[2]
A[6]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
J
TXN1
TXP1
JTDI
VDD_TX1
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
CLKA
RDY*
RD*
WR*
D[15]
VDD_CLA
D
VSS
K
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
L
CLKB
CLKC
CS*
INT*
WIDTH
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
M
TXN2
TXP2
TEST*
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
N
VDD_TX2
ALE
D[6]
D[11]
VDD_JA2
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
P
D[0]
D[2]
D[7]
D[12]
GPIO[4]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
R
RXN2
RXP2
HIZ*
D[13]
GPIO[3]
VDD
VDD
VDD
T
VDD_RX2
D[3]
D[8]
D[14]
TSER2
U
D[1]
D[4]
D[9]
TNEG2
TOHEN2
ROHCLK
2
VSS
VSS
VSS
RSER2
ROH4
TOHCLK4
ROH2
TOH4
VSS
VDD
VDD
TOHSOF ROHCLK
4
4
TOHEN4
ROHSOF
TSOFI4
4
V
GPIO[7]
GPIO[8]
D[10]
TPOS2
TLCLK4
TSOFO4
W
VDD
RNEG2
TCLKI2
RXP4
TXP4
TSOFI2
RLCLK2
RSER4
RSOFO4
Y
VSS
D[5]
ROHSOF
2
RPOS2
VDD_RX4
RXN4
TXN4
TSOFO2
TLCLK2
RCLKO4
RLCLK4
Note: Green indicates VSS; red indicates VDD; blank cells indicate No Connect balls.
215
18
19
20
VSS
RST*
VDD
TSER3
TPOS3
ROHSOF
TSOFI3
3
TOHSOF ROHCLK
TOHCLK3
3
3
TOHEN3
F
TCLKO2
TOH2
RCLKO2
TOHSOF
VDD_JA4
2
TOHCLK2
17
TOH3
G
VDD_TX4 RSOFO2
16
TSER4
TCLKO4
VDD
TPOS4
TNEG4
RPOS4
TCLKI4
RNEG4
VDD
VSS
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 14-2. DS3173 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
VSS
RPOS1
VDD_RX3
RXN3
TXN3
TSOFO1
TLCLK1
B
MODE
VDD
ROHSOF
1
RNEG1
TCLKI1
RXP3
TXP3
C
GPIO[5]
GPIO[6]
A[10]
TPOS1
D
VDD_RX1
A[5]
A[9]
TNEG1
ROHCLK
1
E
A[1]
A[4]
A[8]
JTRST*
TOHEN1
TSER1
9
10
TSOFI1 RLCLK1
TOHSOF
VDD_JA3
1
TOHCLK1
TCLKO1
TOH1
VDD_TX3 RSOFO1
RCLKO1
ROH1
RSER1
ROH3
11
12
13
14
15
RCLKO3
RLCLK3
TCLKO3
TCLKI3
RNEG3
RSER3
RSOFO3
TNEG3
RPOS3
TLCLK3
TSOFO3
RXN1
RXP1
JTCLK
JTMS
GPIO[1]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD_JA1
A[3]
A[7]
JTDO
GPIO[2]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
H
A[0]
A[2]
A[6]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
J
TXN1
TXP1
JTDI
VDD_TX1
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
CLKA
RDY*
RD*
WR*
D[15]
VDD_CLA
D
VSS
K
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
L
CLKB
CLKC
CS*
INT*
WIDTH
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
M
TXN2
TXP2
TEST*
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
N
VDD_TX2
ALE
D[6]
D[11]
VDD_JA2
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
P
D[0]
D[2]
D[7]
D[12]
GPIO[4]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
R
RXN2
RXP2
HIZ*
D[13]
GPIO[3]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
T
VDD_RX2
D[3]
D[8]
D[14]
TOHEN2
ROHCLK
2
TSER2
RSOFO2
RSER2
D[1]
D[4]
D[9]
TNEG2
GPIO[7]
GPIO[8]
D[10]
TPOS2
W
VDD
RNEG2
TCLKI2
Y
VSS
D[5]
ROHSOF
2
TCLKO2
TOH2
RCLKO2
TOHSOF
2
TOHCLK2
RPOS2
TSOFI2
RLCLK2
TSOFO2
TLCLK2
18
19
20
VSS
RST*
VDD
TSER3
TPOS3
ROHSOF
TSOFI3
3
TOHSOF ROHCLK
TOHCLK3
3
3
TOHEN3
F
V
17
TOH3
G
U
16
ROH2
VDD
VSS
Note: Green indicates VSS; red indicates VDD; blank cells indicate No Connect balls.
Figure 14-3. DS3172 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA
1
2
3
A
VSS
RPOS1
B
MODE
VDD
ROHSOF
1
4
5
RNEG1
C
GPIO[5]
GPIO[6]
A[10]
TPOS1
D
VDD_RX1
A[5]
A[9]
TNEG1
ROHCLK
1
E
A[1]
A[4]
A[8]
JTRST*
TOHEN1
TSER1
F
RXN1
RXP1
JTCLK
JTMS
GPIO[1]
VDD
G
VDD_JA1
A[3]
A[7]
JTDO
GPIO[2]
VDD
TCLKI1
A[0]
A[2]
A[6]
J
TXN1
TXP1
JTDI
VDD_TX1
K
CLKA
RDY*
RD*
WR*
D[15]
VDD_CLA
D
INT*
WIDTH
L
CLKB
CLKC
CS*
TXN2
TXP2
TEST*
N
VDD_TX2
ALE
D[6]
D[11]
7
8
TSOFO1
TLCLK1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
VDD_JA2
TCLKO1
TOH1
RCLKO1
RSOFO1
RSER1
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
D[0]
D[2]
D[7]
D[12]
GPIO[4]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
RXN2
RXP2
HIZ*
D[13]
GPIO[3]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
T
VDD_RX2
D[3]
D[8]
D[14]
TOHEN2
ROHCLK
2
TSER2
RSOFO2
RSER2
ROH4
D[1]
D[4]
D[9]
TNEG2
GPIO[7]
GPIO[8]
D[10]
TPOS2
W
VDD
RNEG2
TCLKI2
Y
VSS
D[5]
ROHSOF
2
RPOS2
TCLKO2
TOH2
RCLKO2
TOHSOF
2
TOHCLK2
TSOFI2
RLCLK2
TSOFO2
TLCLK2
18
19
20
VDD
ROH1
P
V
17
RST*
R
U
16
VSS
TSOFI1 RLCLK1
TOHSOF
1
TOHCLK1
H
M
6
ROH2
VDD
Note: Green indicates VSS; red indicates VDD; blank cells indicate No Connect balls.
216
VSS
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 14-4. DS3171 Pin Assignments—400-Lead PBGA
1
2
3
A
VSS
RPOS1
B
MODE
VDD
ROHSOF
1
4
5
6
RNEG1
C
GPIO[5]
GPIO[6]
A[10]
TPOS1
D
VDD_RX1
A[5]
A[9]
TNEG1
ROHCLK
1
E
A[1]
A[4]
A[8]
JTRST*
TOHEN1
TSER1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
TCLKI1
TSOFI1 RLCLK1
TOHSOF
1
TOHCLK1
TCLKO1
TOH1
RCLKO1
RSOFO1
RSER1
RXN1
RXP1
JTCLK
JTMS
GPIO[1]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
A[3]
A[7]
JTDO
GPIO[2]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
H
A[0]
A[2]
A[6]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
J
TXN1
TXP1
JTDI
VDD_TX1
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
CLKA
RDY*
RD*
WR*
D[15]
VDD_CLA
D
VSS
K
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
L
CLKB
CLKC
CS*
INT*
WIDTH
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
TEST*
D[0]
ALE
D[6]
D[11]
D[2]
D[7]
D[12]
R
T
HIZ*
D[13]
D[3]
D[8]
D[14]
U
D[1]
D[4]
D[9]
D[10]
V
GPIO[7]
GPIO[8]
W
VDD
D[5]
Y
VSS
19
20
VDD
ROH1
VDD_JA1
P
18
RST*
F
N
17
VSS
G
M
16
TSOFO1 TLCLK1
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
GPIO[4]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
GPIO[3]
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
Note: Green indicates VSS; red indicates VDD; blank cells indicate No Connect balls.
217
VSS
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
15 PACKAGE INFORMATION
(The package drawing(s) in this data sheet may not reflect the most current specifications. The package number provided for
each package is a link to the latest package outline information.)
15.1 400-Lead TE-PBGA (27mm x 27mm, 1.27mm Pitch) (56-G6003-003)
218
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
16 PACKAGE THERMAL INFORMATION
The 36 thermal VSS balls in the center 6X6 matrix must be thermally and electrically connected to the
internal GND plane of the PC board to achieve these thermal characteristics.
PARAMETER
VALUE
Target Ambient Temperature Range
-40°C to +85°C
Die Junction Temperature Range
-40 to +125°C
Theta-JA, Still Air
Note 1:
12.6 °C/W (Note 1)
Theta-JA is based on the package mounted on a 4-layer JEDEC board
and measured in a JEDEC test chamber.
219
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
17 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS
Voltage Range on Any Input, Bidirectional or Open Drain
Output Lead with Respect to VSS…..………………………………………………………………………..-0.3V to +5.5V
Supply Voltage (VDD) Range with Respect to VSS…..……………………………………………………...-0.3V to +3.63V
Ambient Operating Temperature Range……………………………………………………………………..-40°C to +85°C
Junction Operating Temperature Range……………………………………………………………………-40°C to +125°C
Storage Temperature Range………………………………………………………………………………...-55°C to +125°C
Soldering Temperature..…………………………………………………………….See IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020 Standard
These are stress ratings only and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated in the operation
sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods of time can affect device
reliability. Ambient Operating Temperature Range is assuming the device is mounted on a JEDEC standard test board in a convection cooled
JEDEC test enclosure.
Note: The typical values listed below are not production tested.
Table 17-1. Recommended DC Operating Conditions
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
SYMBOL
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Logic 1
VIH
2.0
5.5
V
Logic 0
VIL
-0.3
+0.8
V
Supply (VDD) ±5%
VDD
3.135
3.300
3.465
V
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Table 17-2. DC Electrical Characteristics
(Tj = -40°C to +85°C)
PARAMETER
Supply Current (VDD = 3.465V)
(Note 1)
Power-Down Current (All DISABLE
Bits Set) (Note 2)
Lead Capacitance
Input Leakage
Input Leakage (Input Pins with
Internal Pullup Resistors)
Output Leakage (when Hi-Z)
Output Voltage (IOH = -4.0mA)
Output Voltage (IOL = +4.0mA)
Output Voltage (IOH = -8.0mA)
Output Voltage (IOL = +8.0mA)
Note 1:
Note 2:
SYMBOL
IDD
IDDD
CONDITIONS
DS3174
725
DS3173
449
DS3172
328
DS3171
273
DS3174
68
DS3173
52
DS3172
36
DS3171
21
mA
CIO
IIL
-10
+10
pF
µA
IILP
-350
+10
µA
-10
2.4
+10
µA
V
V
V
V
ILO
VOH
VOL
VOH
VOL
7
mA
4mA outputs
4mA outputs
8mA outputs
8mA outputs
0.4
2.4
0.4
Mode: DS3 data rate, transmitting all ones on the LIU, all clocks = 45MHz, digital outputs without load; all inputs between VDD and
VSS; inputs with pullups connected to VDD.
All outputs loaded with rated capacitance; all inputs between VDD and VSS; inputs with pullups connected to VDD.
220
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 17-3. Output Pin Drive
PIN NAME
TLCLKn
TPOSn/TDATn
TNEGn
TXPn
TXNn
TOHCLKn
TOHSOFn
ROHn
ROHCLKn
ROHSOFn
TCLKOn/TGCLKn
TSOFOn/TDENn
RSERn
RCLKOn/RGCLKn
RSOFOn/RDENn
D[15:0]
RDY
INT
GPIO[7:0]
JTDO
CLKB
CLKC
TYPE
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
IO
Oz
Oz
IO
Oz
IO
IO
DRIVE
STRENGTH
(mA)
6
6
6
N/A (analog)
N/A (analog)
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
221
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
18 AC TIMING CHARACTERISTICS
There are several common AC characteristic definitions. These generic definitions are shown below in Figure 18-1,
Figure 18-2, Figure 18-3, and Figure 18-4. Definitions that are specific to a given interface are shown in that
interface’s subsection.
Figure 18-1. Clock Period and Duty Cycle Definitions
t1
Clock
t2
t2
Figure 18-2. Rise Time, Fall Time, and Jitter Definitions
t1
t4/2
Clock
t3
t3
Figure 18-3. Hold, Setup, and Delay Definitions (Rising Clock Edge)
Clock
t5
t6
Signal
t7
Signal
222
t4
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 18-4. Hold, Setup, and Delay Definitions (Falling Clock Edge)
Clock
t5
t6
Signal
t7
Signal
Figure 18-5. To/From Hi Z Delay Definitions (Rising Clock Edge)
Clock
t8
t9
Signal
Figure 18-6. To/From Hi Z Delay Definitions (Falling Clock Edge)
Clock
t8
t9
Signal
223
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
18.1 Framer AC Characteristics
All AC timing characteristics are specified with a 25 pF capacitive load on all output pins, VIH = 2.4V and VIL = 0.8V.
The voltage threshold for all timing measurements is VDD/2. The generic timing definitions shown in Figure 18-1,
Figure 18-2, Figure 18-3, and Figure 18-6 apply to this interface.
Table 18-1. Framer Port Timing
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
SYMBOL
CLK Period
CONDITIONS
MIN
t1
Note 1
19.23
t2/t1
Note 2
40
CLK Rise or Fall Times (20% to 80%)
t3
Note 2
DIN to CLK Setup Time
t5
CLK to DIN Hold Time
t6
CLK to DOUT Delay
t7
CLK Clock Duty Cycle (t2/t1)
Note 3
Note 4
Note 3
Note 4
Note 5
Note 6
TYP
MAX
UNITS
ns
50
3
7
1
1
2
2
60
%
4
ns
11
9
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note 1: Any mode, 52MHz TCLKIn, RLCLKn input clocks.
Note 2: Any mode, TCLKIn, RLCLKn input clocks.
Note 3: TCLKIn, RLCLKn clock inputs to TOHMIn/TSOFIn, TFOHn/TSERn inputs.
Note 4: TCLKOn, RCLKOn clock outputs to TOHMIn/TSOFIn, TFOHn/TSERn inputs.
Note 5: TCLKIn, RLCLKn clock input to TSOFOn/TDENn, RSERn, RSOFOn/RDENn outputs.
Note 6: TCLKOn, RCLKOn clock output to TSOFOn/TDENn, RSERn, RSOFOn/RDENn outputs.
18.2 Line Interface AC Characteristics
All AC timing characteristics are specified with a 25 pF capacitive load on all output pins, VIH = 2.4V and VIL = 0.8V.
The voltage threshold for all timing measurements is VDD/2. The generic timing definitions shown in Figure 18-1,
Figure 18-2, Figure 18-3, and Figure 18-6 apply to this interface.
Table 18-2. Line Interface Timing
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
CLK Period
SYMBOL
CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
t1
Note 1
19.23
t2/t1
Note 2
40
CLK Rise or Fall Times (20% to 80%)
t3
Note 2
DIN to CLK Setup Time
t5
Note 3
4
ns
CLK to DIN Hold Time
t6
Note 3
0
ns
CLK to DOUT Delay
t7
Note 4
2
10
ns
Note 5
2
8
ns
CLK Clock Duty Cycle (t2/t1)
Note 1: Any mode, 52MHz TCLKIn, RLCLKn input clocks.
Note 2: Any mode, TCLKIn, RLCLKn input clocks.
Note 3: RLCLKn clock inputs to RPOSn/RDATn, RNEGn/RLCVn/ROHMIn inputs.
Note 4: TCLKIn, RLCLKn clock input to TPOSn/TDATn, TNEGn/TOHMOn outputs.
Note 5: TLCLKn, TCLKOn, RCLKOn clock output to TPOSn/TDATn, TNEGn/TOHMOn outputs.
224
ns
50
60
%
4
ns
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
18.3 Misc Pin AC Characteristics
All AC timing characteristics are specified with a 25 pF capacitive load on all output pins, VIH = 2.4V and VIL = 0.8V.
The voltage threshold for all timing measurements is VDD/2. The generic timing definitions shown in Figure 18-1,
Figure 18-2, Figure 18-3, and Figure 18-6 apply to this interface.
Table 18-3. Misc Pin Timing
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
SYMBOL
CONDITIONS
Asynchronous Input High, Low Time
t1-t2, t2
Note 1
Asynchronous Input Rise, Fall Time
t3
Note 1
MIN
TYP
MAX
500
UNITS
ns
10
ns
Note 1: TMEI (GPIO), PMU(GPIO), 8KREFI(GPIO) and RST inputs.
18.4 Overhead Port AC Characteristics
All AC timing characteristics are specified with a 25 pF capacitive load on all output pins, VIH = 2.4V and VIL = 0.8.
The voltage threshold for all timing measurements is VDD/2. The generic timing definitions shown in Figure 18-1,
Figure 18-2, Figure 18-3, and Figure 18-6 apply to this interface.
Table 18-4. Overhead Port Timing
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +125°C.)
PARAMETER
CLK Period
CLK Clock high and low time
DIN to CLK Setup Time
CLK to DIN Hold Time
CLK to DOUT Delay
SYMBOL
t1
t1-t2, t2
t5
t6
t7
CONDITIONS
Note 1
Note 1
Note 2
Note 2
Note 3
Note 1: TOHCLKn, ROHCLKn output clocks.
Note 2: TOHCLKn clock falling edge outputs to TOHn, TOHENn inputs.
Note 3: TOHCLKn, ROHCLKn clock falling edge outputs to TOHSOFn, ROHn, ROHSOF outputs.
225
MIN
500
200
20
20
-20
TYP
MAX
UNITS
20
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
18.5 Micro Interface AC Characteristics
The AC characteristics for the external bus interface. This table references Figure 18-7and Figure 18-8.
Table 18-5. Micro Interface Timing
(VDD = 3.3 ±5%, Tj = -40°C to +125°C.)
SIGNAL
NAME(S)
SYMBOL
A[10:0]
ALE
A[10:0]
A[10:0]
ALE
A[N:0], ALE
CS, R/W
D[15:0]
RD, WR, DS
RD, WR, DS
t1a
t1b
t2
t3
t4
t5
t6
t8
t9a
t9b
D[15:0]
t10
CS, R/W
D[15:0]
D[15:0]
RDY
RDY
RDY
RDY
RDY
R/W
R/W
t12
t13
t14
t15
t16
t17
t18
t19
t20
t21
DESCRIPTION
Setup Time to RD, WR, DS Active
Setup Time to RD, WR, DS Active
Setup Time to ALE Inactive
Hold Time from ALE Inactive
Pulse Width
Hold Time from RD, WR, DS Inactive
Setup Time to RD, WR Active
Output Delay Time from RD, DS Active
Pulse Width if not using RDY Handshake
Delay from RDY
Output Deassert Delay Time from RD, DS
Inactive
Hold Time from RD, WR, DS Inactive
Input Setup Time to WR, DS Inactive
Input Hold Time from WR, DS Inactive
Delay Time from RD, WR, DS Active
Delay Time from RD, WR, DS Inactive
Enable Delay Time from CS Active
Disable Delay Time from CS Inactive
Ending High Pulse Width
Setup Time to DS Active
Hold Time to DS Inactive
MIN
TYP
MAX UNITS NOTES
10
10
2
2
5
0
0
30
35
15
2
10
0
10
5
5
0
12
10
1
2
2
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
1
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
1
1
1
1, 4
1
ns
1, 3
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Note 1:
The input/output timing reference level for all signals is VDD/2. Transition time (80/20%) on RD, WR, and CS inputs is 5ns max.
Note 2:
Multiplexed mode timing only.
Note 3:
D[15:0] output valid until not driven.
Note 4:
Timing required if not using RDY handshake.
226
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 18-7. Micro Interface Nonmultiplexed Read/Write Cycle
t1a
t5
A[10:0]
t6
t12
CS*
t8
t10
D[15:0]
t13
t14
D[15:0]
R/W*
RD*
WR*
DS*
t20
t21
t9a
t17
t18
t9b
RDY*
t16
t15
227
t19
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 18-8. Micro Interface Multiplexed Read Cycle
t1a
A[10:0]
t2
ALE
t3
t5
t4
t1b
t12
t6
CS*
t8
t10
D[15:0]
t13
t14
D[15:0]
R/W*
RD*
WR*
DS*
t20
t21
t9a
t17
t18
t9b
RDY*
t16
t15
228
t19
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
18.6 CLAD Jitter Characteristics
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
Intrinsic Jitter (UIP-P)
Intrinsic Jitter (UIRMS)
Peak Jitter Transfer
MAX
UNITS
0.025
0.0045
1.75
UIP-P
UIRMS
dB
18.7 LIU Interface AC Characteristics
18.7.1 Waveform Templates
Table 18-6. DS3 Waveform Template
TIME (IN UNIT INTERVALS)
NORMALIZED AMPLITUDE EQUATION
UPPER CURVE
-0.85 ≤ T ≤ -0.68
-0.68 ≤ T ≤ +0.36
0.36 ≤ T ≤ 1.4
-0.85 ≤ T ≤ -0.36
-0.36 ≤ T ≤ +0.36
0.36 ≤ T ≤ 1.4
0.03
0.5 {1 + sin[(π / 2)(1 + T / 0.34)]} + 0.03
0.08 + 0.407e-1.84(T - 0.36)
LOWER CURVE
-0.03
0.5 {1 + sin[(π / 2)(1 + T / 0.18)]} - 0.03
-0.03
Governing Specifications: ANSI T1.102 and Bellcore GR-499.
Table 18-7. DS3 Waveform Test Parameters and Limits
PARAMETER
Rate
Line Code
Transmission Medium
Test Measurement Point
Test Termination
Pulse Amplitude
Pulse Shape
Unframed All-Ones Power Level
at 22.368MHz
Unframed All-Ones Power Level
at 44.736MHz
Pulse Imbalance of Isolated Pulses
SPECIFICATION
44.736Mbps (±20ppm)
B3ZS
Coaxial cable (AT&T 734A or equivalent)
At the end of 0 to 450ft of coaxial cable
75Ω (±1%) resistive
Between 0.36V and 0.85V
An isolated pulse (preceded by two zeros and
followed by one or more zeros) falls within the
curves listed in Figure 18-9.
Between -1.8dBm and +5.7dBm
At least 20dB less than the power measured at
22.368MHz
Ratio of positive and negative pulses must be
between 0.90 and 1.10.
229
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 18-9. E3 Waveform Template
1.2
1.1
17
1.0
0.9
8.65
0.8
OUTPUT LEVEL (V)
0.7
G.703
E3
TEMPLATE
0.6
0.5
12.1
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
24.5
0
29.1
-0.1
-0.2
TIME (ns)
Table 18-8. E3 Waveform Test Parameters and Limits
PARAMETER
Rate
Line Code
Transmission Medium
Test Measurement Point
Test Termination
Pulse Amplitude
Pulse Shape
Ratio of the Amplitudes of Positive and Negative
Pulses at the Center of the Pulse Interval
Ratio of the Widths of Positive and Negative Pulses
at the Nominal Half Amplitude
SPECIFICATION
34.368Mbps (±20ppm)
HDB3
Coaxial cable (AT&T 734A or equivalent)
At the transmitter
75Ω (±1%) resistive
1.0V (nominal)
An isolated pulse (preceded by two zeros and
followed by one or more zeros) falls within the
template shown in Figure 18-9.
0.95 to 1.05
0.95 to 1.05
230
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Figure 18-10. DS3 Pulse Mask Template
18.7.2 LIU Input/Output Characteristics
Table 18-9. Receiver Input Characteristics—DS3 Mode
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
Receive Sensitivity (Length of Cable)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio, Interfering Signal Test (Notes 1, 2)
Input Pulse Amplitude, RMON = 0 (Notes 2, 3)
Input Pulse Amplitude, RMON = 1 (Notes 2, 3)
Analog LOS Declare, RMON = 0 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Clear, RMON = 0 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Declare, RMON = 1 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Clear, RMON = 1 (Note 4)
Intrinsic Jitter Generation (Note 2)
231
MIN
TYP
900
1200
10
-16
-24
-17
MAX
ft
1000
200
-28
-38
-29
0.03
UNITS
mVpk
mVpk
dB
dB
dB
dB
UIP-P
DS3171/DS3172/DS3173/DS3174
Table 18-10. Receiver Input Characteristics—E3 Mode
(VDD = 3.3V ±5%, TA = -40°C to +85°C.)
PARAMETER
Receive Sensitivity (Length of Cable)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio, Interfering Signal Test (Notes 2, 3)
Input Pulse Amplitude, RMON = 0 (Notes 2, 3)
Input Pulse Amplitude, RMON = 1 (Notes 2, 3)
Analog LOS Declare, RMON = 0 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Clear, RMON = 0 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Declare, RMON = 1 (Note 4)
Analog LOS Clear, RMON = 1 (Note 4)
Intrinsic Jitter Generation (Note 2)
15
MIN
TYP
900
1200
12
-16
-24
-17
MAX
UNITS
ft
1300
260
-28
-38
-29
0.03
mVpk
mVpk
dB
dB
dB
dB
UIP-P
23
Note 1: An interfering signal (2 – 1 PRBS for DS3, 2 – 1 PRBS for E3, B3ZS/HDB3 encoded, compliant waveshape, nominal bit rate) is
added to the wanted signal. The combined signal is passed through 0 to 900ft of coaxial cable and presented to the LIU. This spec
-9
indicates the lowest signal-to-noise ratio that results in a bit error ratio
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
